Mazatrol Programming Matrix)

Return to Main MenuPROGRAMMING MANUAL for MAZATROL MATRIX (For Machining Centers) MAZATROL PROGRAMMING MANUAL No. : H740PA0040E Serial No. : Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. IMPORTANT NOTICE 1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible. 2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety. If such modifications are required, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. 3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all such items are in place. 4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. 5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use. 6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name. Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak Corporation, Japan 03. 2006 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Preface Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine. Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply. Rule 1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working states may take place at the user site. During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones, not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand. It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are “inexecutable” functions. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as follows: 2. 3. : Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life. DANGER : Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human life or body. WARNING : Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious machine damage. CAUTION HGENPA0041E S-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Basics ! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the operating panel until an initial display has been made. WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors, unexpected operation of the machine will result. ! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check, solid check, and other functions, if provided. ! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine. ! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction function is executed without its thorough understanding. ! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified without a thorough understanding. Remarks on the cutting conditions recommended by the NC ! Before using the following cutting conditions: - Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions Determination Function - Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function - Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation Function Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken – especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup. ! Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining. Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death. WARNING S-2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Programming ! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event of contact with the tool. ! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds. ! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently from the way it did before. ! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs. ! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.) ! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.) ! If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.) ! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function will not work correctly. ! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the machines of INTEGREX e-Series and the other turning machines. Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before using this system. Sample program Machines of INTEGREX e-Series The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. –1 WARNING Turning machines The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. S1000M3 S1000M203 S-3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ! For the machines of INTEGREX e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate command) of the EIA program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through 180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected positions may incite collisions. To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command (G50.1, G51.1). ! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path check function, the solid check function, and other functions, and confirm that the program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven machining program to change in operational status. If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status, interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation. For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on this path. For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program. ! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path. CAUTION S-4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Operations ! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system variables before starting the above operations. ! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur. ! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value. ! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the active program. ! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement. ! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area. As a result, serious machine damage will result. ! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial movement will become faster than that expected. WARNING CAUTION S-5 it contains important data that enables the prompt recovery of the machine if it fails. If this data has been deleted or modified. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software products (including user-created ones) Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer equipment Operating Environment 1. Ambient temperature During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) 2. 1. 3. insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to deteriorate quickly. Keeping the Backup Data Note: Do not attempt to delete or modify the data stored in the following folder. Be sure not to modify or delete this data. Take notice of this when operating the unit. Recovery Data Storage Folder: D:\MazakBackUp Although this folder is not used when the NC unit is running normally. Relative humidity During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing) Note: As humidity increases. 2. Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed below.BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT Limited Warranty The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose. S-6 E . the NC unit may require a long recovery time. 5-1 5-1 Cursor Movement ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5-1-1 5-1-2 5-2 Editing ........................................................................3-4 Auxiliary Coordinates............................................................................................................3-2 Machine Coordinates System and Workpiece Coordinates System.......................5-1 Case of listing mode ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1 SYSTEM OF COORDINATES.............................................................3-5 4 CALLING UP AND THE END OF THE PROGRAM DISPLAY . 1-1 MAZATROL PROGRAM...................................................................................................................................4-2 End of the Program Creation......................3-3 Basic Coordinates ...................................................... 5-2 Insertion ....................................................................................... 5-2 Search ..............................................................................................................5-2 Editing functions and menus...................................................................................................................... 5-1 Case of creating mode............................................................................4-1 Calling Up the PROGRAM Display (Listing Mode) ...................... 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 Listing Mode and Creating Mode....4-3 5 EDITION OF DATA........................................................3-1 Workpiece Coordinates System ......................... 5-7 5-2-1 5-2-2 5-2-3 C-1 ...................................................................................................4-1 Calling Up the PROGRAM Display (Creating Mode) ......................................................................................CONTENTS Page 1 2 3 INTRODUCTION ......................................... 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 Machine Coordinates System..................................... ................................................ 7-46 7-6-1 7-6-2 7-6-3 7-6-4 7-6-5 7-6-6 7-6-7 C-2 .............6-1 Tool Data Window ............... 7-9 Automatic tool development for cemented carbide drill ............................................................................................................................................. 7-34 New tapping auto-setting scheme ..............7-1 Basic Coordinates System Unit .....................5-2-4 5-2-5 5-2-6 Deletion...............................................................6-1 Desk Calculator Functions................................................. 5-20 6 WINDOW FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 7-9 Unit data and automatic tool development of the point machining unit ........................ 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 Types of Units ..................................................................................................................................................................6-1 Tool File Window ................................................................ 7-8 Procedure for selecting point machining unit................................................................................................... 7-40 Tool path of the point machining unit.................................................6-2 7 PROGRAM CREATION...........................................................7-5 Auxiliary Coordinates System Unit ..............................7-7 Point Machining Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................7-8 Types of point machining units ................................................................................... 5-14 End of program ........................................................................................ 5-11 Copy ... 7-35 Tool sequence data of the point machining unit .................................................................................7-6 Types of the Machining Unit .........................................................................................................................................................6-1 Tap Nominal Diameter Window ......................................7-1 Common Unit ................................................................................................ 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 MAZATROL Help................................................ ............................................................................................................ 7-147 Shape sequence of the line machining unit ........................................................................................ 7-149 Precautions in line machining ................................. 7-209 Override in case of the overall width cutting ...................7-245 7-10 Special Mode Unit ............................ automatic tool development and tool path of the line machining unit ......................7-246 7-10-1 Procedure for calling up the special mode unit..................................................................................................... 7-246 7-10-2 M-code unit ......................... 7-203 Precautions in face machining....................................................................................... 7-88 7-7 Line Machining Units .............................................. 7-222 7-8-1 7-8-2 7-8-3 7-8-4 7-8-5 7-8-6 7-8-7 7-9 End Unit........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-154 7-7-1 7-7-2 7-7-3 7-7-4 7-7-5 7-7-6 7-7-7 7-8 Face Machining Units ............................................................ automatic tool development and tool path of the face machining unit .7-156 Types of face machining units ....... 7-156 Procedure for selecting face machining unit....................................................................... 7-247 7-10-4 Basic coordinate shift unit (option)..........................7-103 Types of line machining units ....................................................... 7-104 Unit data........................................................................................ 7-150 Automatic corner override.................................. 7-249 C-3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-246 7-10-3 Subprogram unit .......................................... 7-158 Tool sequence data of the face machining unit ............................................................... 7-157 Unit data......7-6-8 Shape sequence of the point machining unit................................................................................................................. 7-220 Definitions of forms in line machining and face machining units ...... 7-103 Procedure for selecting line machining unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-105 Tool sequence data of the line machining unit .................................................................... .......... 8-5 Assignment of priority numbers ......................................................................... 7-265 7-12-6 Type of measurement....................................................................................................................... 7-258 7-11-3 Composition of the sequence ...........................7-261 7-12-1 Procedure for calling up the MMS unit.................. 7-259 7-12 MMS Unit....................................................................................................................................................................8-4 Editing Function and Input Method of Priority Numbers .......................................................................... 7-261 7-12-2 Composition of the unit ......................................................................................................................................... 7-263 7-12-5 Feeler calibration measurement .......................................................................... 7-269 8 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL.............................. 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-3 Priority Machining Order........8-1 Priority Machining Zone...................................................................................................... 8-7 Deletion of all the priority numbers ....................................................................................................................... 7-258 7-11-2 Structure of the unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-6 Change of priority numbers .................8-5 Input of priority numbers .......................7-258 7-11-1 Input procedure..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-256 7-11 Manual Program Mode Unit.................................................................................................................. 7-254 7-10-6 Indexing unit ........ 8-8 How to use the SUB PROG PROC END function ... 8-8 8-3-1 8-3-2 8-3-3 8-3-4 8-3-5 C-4 .....................................................7-10-5 Pallet changing unit ............... 7-261 7-12-4 Measurement of length of feeler in manual mode ........................ 7-255 7-10-7 Process end unit ............................................. 7-261 7-12-3 Composition of the MMS sequence.......................................................................... .......................13-15 14 APPENDIX.......................................................................... 10-1 10-1 Setting Tool Path Control (TPC) Data ...................................9-1 Method of Measurement of Coordinates by MDI-MMS........... 9-1 9-1 9-2 Method of Measurement of Coordinates by TEACH Function....14-1 14-2 What To Do in Such a Case? ...8-4 Relation between the Subprogram Unit and the Priority Machining Function................13-1 13-2 Detailed Description .........14-8 C-5 ............................................8-10 Relation between the Index Unit and Priority Machining Function....................................................................................................... 14-1 14-1 Program Example.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1 13-1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................8-13 8-5 8-6 8-7 9 COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION ........... 12-1 13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT................................................................................9-4 10 TPC DATA CREATION ........................8-11 Relation between the M-Code Unit and the Priority Machining Function................................................8-12 Relation between Multi-workpiece Machining and the Priority Machining Function.........................13-1 13-3 Three-digit G-format of MAZATROL Program ......10-1 10-2 Description of Each TPC Data Item................ 11-1 12 CASE OF APPEARANCE OF ALARM ..................................................................................................................................13-2 13-4 Various Data Description Using G10 .........................................10-4 11 BACKGROUND PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................................................................................. NOTE - C-6 E .. INTRODUCTION 1 1 INTRODUCTION This manual describes only programming based on the MAZATROL language of the MAZATROL MATRIX system. even a user who is to operate the system for the first time can readily create and edit programs. but it is possible that the machining cannot be performed because of the processing of a calculation error. Before proceeding with automatic operation therefore. H740PAA040E 1-1 . Note: The MAZATROL MATRIX controls the machining center by digital calculation. The description given in this manual assumes that the readers have already read the relevant Operating Manual of the machine and thoroughly understood its contents. Programming in the MAZATROL language uses an interactive method that allows the system to be operated in accordance with the messages displayed on the monitor. do not fail to inspect the path of the tool on the display in order to verify that the machining is being done correctly. Carefully read this manual and the Operating Manual of the machine to correctly operate the MAZATROL MATRIX system and use its capabilities to their maximum. Thus. NOTE - 1-2 E .1 INTRODUCTION . Inside chamfering Moreover.Boring of stepped through hole .Boring of stepped non-through hole Face machining unit .. 3.Left-hand chamfering ...Tapping ..Used to specify the data concerning the name of the tool and the movement of the tool.Used to specify the data related to the machining dimensions.Central linear machining .Drilling . Machining unit Used to specify the data concerning the machining method and the machining form...Pocket milling-mountain ..Left-hand linear machining .Boring . The units 5 through 8 are entered when necessary.End milling-step ....Right-hand chamfering ..3-D (option) H740PAB040E 2-1 . The machining unit is available in the following three types: Point machining unit .RGH CBOR machining . It specifies the common data to a program assembly such as the material.Circular milling ..Face milling .Pocket milling . 1. the machining of several workpieces.Counterbore-tapping Line machining unit ...Reaming .. . Common unit This concerns a unit which is obligatorily entered in the program head..Back boring .. the necessary data are specified in the following two sequences: Tool sequence .End milling-slot .Outside linear machining .MAZATROL PROGRAM 2 2 MAZATROL PROGRAM The machining MAZATROL program of a workpiece consists in principle of the four units discribed in 1 through 4 below.Right-hand linear machining . Basic coordinates system unit Used to specify the value of the coordinates (basic coordinates) of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system.Inside linear machining ...Boring of non-through hole .Outside chamfering . Shape sequence . 2....Boring of through hole ...Pocket milling-valley . the initial point. etc.End milling-top ..RGH BCB machining .. 2 MAZATROL PROGRAM 4....... Special mode unit There are the following special mode units... 5.................Use to specify the angle of the indexing table..Changing of pallet Indexing* ..... It is possible that these units marked with an asterisk (*) can not be used or executed in certain machine models....... 2-2 E .........Output of M-code Sub-program ............ 7. Manual program mode unit This unit is entered to establish a program corresponding to the EIA/ISO program using the Gand M-codes which permits performing minute movement or a movement other than machining........Delimits the useful scope of the priority function for the same tool......Calling up a sub-program Pallet changing* .............. End unit Unit created at the end of program.. Process end .............. MMS unit Automatic measurement of a basic coordinates system (WPC). 8... Auxiliary coordinates system unit Used to specify the auxiliary coordinates system (OFFSET).... 6.... M-code . MMS unit cannot be used for certain machines or will not be performed even if programmed. SYSTEM OF COORDINATES 3 3 SYSTEM OF COORDINATES In the preparation of the program. +Z +Y Machining zone (Machine coordinates system) Axis of X coordinate –X Axis of Z coordinate –Z +X Machine zero point (X0. Z0) –Y Axis of Y coordinate Table NM210-00510 Fig. There are two types of systems of coordinates: . The system of coordinates of the machining center consists of three axes of coordinates which each cross the reference zero point at right angles. 3-1 Coordinates system 3-1 Machine Coordinates System The machine actually moves in its own system of coordinates called the machine coordinates system. An arbitrary point found in this system of coordinates can be defined by the value of the coordinates in the 3 axes (X. Y0. the machine coordinates system has the machining zone on the side of the minus (negative) direction from the machine zero point.Machine coordinates system . 3-2 Machine coordinates system (vertical machining center) H743PAC010E 3-1 . Generally. A point of reference in this system of coordinates is known as machine zero point.Workpiece coordinates system Z-axis X-axis Reference zero point Y-axis M3P001 Fig. Y and Z). a system of coordinates is used for introducing the position of the machining and the form of the machining. 0) P3 = ( 0. and the system of coordinates taking this point as reference is called the workpiece coordinates system. the value of the coordinates of the configuration is the following: Workpiece zero point = ( 0. tedious and inflexible. 3-2 . 0. 0. Consequently.3 3-2 SYSTEM OF COORDINATES Workpiece Coordinates System If the program is prepared on the basis of the machine coordinates system. 0) P2 = (150. 0) The adoption of the workpiece zero point facilitates the entering of the machining dimensions and therefore the programming. The point thus taken is called the workpiece zero point.When the dimensions are entered of the configuration on the basis of the above plan of the workpiece. .In this case. 100. 100. Example: Plan of the workpiece P3 P2 R5 100 95 60 20 5 5 Zero point of the workpiece to be taken 50 100 145 150 M3P002 φ50 R5 P1 . 0) P1 = (150. the entering of the machining position and of the form of machining is very complex. a temporary reference point is taken in the machine coodinates system for preparing the program. the bottom left hand corner is taken as the workpiece zero point. 3-3 Machine coordinates system and workpiece coordinates system 3-3 . Machine coordinates system Machine coordinates system Workpiece coordinates system <Model V.SYSTEM OF COORDINATES 3 3-3 Machine Coordinates System and Workpiece Coordinates System The relationship between the machine coordinates system and workpiece coordinates system when workpiece has been mounted on the table of a machine is shown below. double column type> NM210-00511 <Model V> NM210-00512 Machine coordinates system Workpiece coordinates system <Model H> Note: NM210-00513 The above relationship may slightly differ according to the type of machine being used. Fig. 4 0. WPC X -500. The basic coordinates are entered as values of the coordinates of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system. if there is one.and Y-axes of the machine coordinates system and the X. Basic coordinate Z (Example: –200) Angle formed by the X. It is necessary therefore to enter in the program. the position relation between the machine coordinates system and the workpiece coordinates system. Basic coordinates unit No. of basic coordinates unit Basic coordinate X (Example: –500) Basic coordinate Y (Example: –300) Coordinate or angle of 4th axis. Z -200. The unit of the basic coordinates is entered by utilizing the coordinates measurement function after the workpiece is placed on the machine.and Yaxes of the workpiece coordinates system. Y -300. Basic coordinate Z Basic coordinate X Machine zero point Machine coordinates system Basic coordinate Y −Z −X +Z +Y +X −Y Workpiece coordinates system Workpiece zero point NM210-00514 Fig. The unit of entry is called the basic coordinates unit (WPC).3 3-4 SYSTEM OF COORDINATES Basic Coordinates The machine moves in the machine coordinates system whilst the program is prepared depending on the workpiece coordinates system. 3-4 Basic coordinates Example of entering of the basic coordinates unit: UNo. th 0. 1 UNIT WPC-0 ADD. 3-4 . 0) P2 = (50. P1 = (70 + 50 × 1 3 . +y1 +x1 P2 P1 30° R0 70 Zero point offset in auxiliary coordinates mode M3P004 R1 50 20 As the figure above shows. positions P1 and P2 are entered as follows by offsetting the workpiece zero point to R1. P1 = (50. the use of auxiliary coordinates permits performing this entering easily. 50 × ) 2 2 However. the entering of the position of hole P1 requires a very complicated calculation. Example of entering of auxiliary coordinates +y0 P2 P1 20 30° R0 +x0 50 70 Workpiece zero point M3P003 In this example. 20) 3-5 . 1.SYSTEM OF COORDINATES 3 3-5 Auxiliary Coordinates The auxiliary coordinates are used for offsetting the workpiece zero point to any position in order to further facilitate the preparation of the program. The auxiliary coordinates unit (OFFSET) is entered as a value of offsetting in the workpiece zero point. The system of auxiliary coordinates specified in a subprogram is voided at the time of the return on the main program. 2 UNIT OFFSET U (X) 70. the state without a system of auxiliary coordinates is assumed. Cancellation of auxiliary coordinates The system of auxiliary coordinates is voided in the following cases: A.) B. D (th) 30. Main program WPC-1 Machining [1] Subprogram Machining [2] Subprogram WPC-2 WPC is a code that signifies the basic coordinates system. 3-5 Basic coordinates system after execution of subprogram 3-6 E . (When the system of basic coordinates was specified in the subprogram as shown below. the auxiliary coordinates unit to be programmed is as follows: UNo. the return is made to this system of auxiliary coordinates. When the main program contains a system of auxiliary coordinates. Machining [2] is performed under the coordinates system of WPC-2. W (Z) 0. The system of auxiliary coordinates is voided when a new system of basic coordinates is introduced. Auxiliary coordinates unit Offsetting on Z-axis Angle with relation to workpiece coordinates system Offsetting on X-axis Offsetting on Y-axis 2. V (Y) 0. In this case. the return to the main program has the effect of voiding the system of auxiliary coordinates of the main program. M3P005 Fig.3 SYSTEM OF COORDINATES In this case. it is impossible to edit the program involved. etc. PARAM DIAGNOS DATA I/O 3D SETUP DISPLAY MAP (2) Press the menu key [PROGRAM]. COPY) Shape check function Changeover to listing mode Creating mode Note 1: During automatic operation.CALLING UP AND THE END OF THE PROGRAM DISPLAY 4 4 4-1 CALLING UP AND THE END OF THE PROGRAM DISPLAY Listing Mode and Creating Mode The PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display has following two modes: . ! This causes the change of the menu and the transition to listing mode. 4-2 Calling Up the PROGRAM Display (Listing Mode) In order to display the contents of a program (listing mode).Creating mode This mode serves to create or edit a program.). ! POSITION The following menu will be displayed. comparing. Program creation Program editing (INSERT. PROGRAM EDIT TPC WPC MSR TOOL PATH PROCESS PROGRAM CONTROL LAYOUT HELP PROGRAM FILE WORK No. SEARCH H740PAD040E 4-1 . Functions available in each mode are shown below. TOOL LAYOUT PROGRAM TOOL DATA C-COND. . saving. Note 2: During input/output processing (loading. (1) Press the display selector key (key located to the left of the menu keys). it is impossible to edit the program and the subprogram concerned. perform the following procedure to select the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.Listing mode This mode serves to display the contents of a program. Table 4-1 Functions availvale in the listing/creating mode Listing mode Selecting of program to be displayed Changeover to creating mode Changeover to TOOL PATH display Changeover to PROGRAM FILE display Coordinate measuring function Checking of program during automatic operation Help function Searching function See the Notes below. ERASE. At the time of the creation of a new program. Note 1: If a work number is composed of figures alone. perform the following procedure. listing window refers to a window that displays a list of work numbers of the programs that have already been registered in the NC equipment. A combination of up to 32 alphanumeric characters: 0 to 9 and A to Z. “+” and “–”.”. You can check the work-Nos.] is reversed and and the work-Nos. including the symbols “_”.). that program will be displayed on the screen. you must set a work number not used in other programs. . (2) Enter the work number by means of numeric keys.If a work number already registered in the NC unit is set. (1) Press the [WORK No. * The work-Nos. 4-2 . can be used for a work number. .4 4-3 CALLING UP AND THE END OF THE PROGRAM DISPLAY Calling Up the PROGRAM Display (Creating Mode) In order to create or edit a program (creating mode). The program is displayed on the screen. nothing is displayed on the screen. To create a new MAZATROL program. therefore. Example: Work No. 1000 Press the keys ! 1 0 0 0 INPUT in this order. it should be a natural number between 1 and 99999999. NM210-00531 (4) Press the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu key. listing window or the PROGRAM FILE display to see which work numbers are not yet used.A “work number” refers to a number assigned to each program to distinguish one program from another. SEARCH PROGRAM EDIT TPC WPC MSR TOOL PATH PROCESS PROGRAM CONTROL LAYOUT HELP PROGRAM FILE ! The display of [WORK No. (3) Place the reprogramming switch in position l (enable). “. Note 2: A program name should not begin with a dot (.] menu key in listing mode. listing window will be displayed. WORK No. ! This causes the transition from listing mode to creating mode. CALLING UP AND THE END OF THE PROGRAM DISPLAY 4 4-4 End of the Program Creation (1) Press the menu selector key (key located to the right of the menu keys). 4-3 . TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE (2) Press the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key. ! The following menu will be displayed. ! This completes the program creation. NOTE - 4-4 E .4 CALLING UP AND THE END OF THE PROGRAM DISPLAY . .EDITION OF DATA 5 5 5-1 EDITION OF DATA Cursor Movement The listing mode and the creating mode offer the different cursor movement methods. TOOL 1 2 FIG PTN 1 UNo. H740PAE040E 5-1 . Pressing the cursor key When the cursor key ( direction of the arrow. Therefore. UNIT 2 ) is pressed. UNo. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. the cursor moves line by line in the Note: In listing mode. the cursor movement is done only by pressing the desired cursor key . Consequently. UNo. 5-1-1 1. 0 UNo. . ) is pressed. Case of listing mode Pressing the page key When the page key ( arrows. move the cursor depending on the method appropriate for each mode. In this case. . the cursor moves unit by unit in the direction of the ≈ ≈ PROGRAM EDIT TPC WPC MSR TOOL PATH PROCESS PROGRAM CONTROL LAYOUT HELP PROGRAM FILE WORK No. MAT 0 UNo. there is a change of menu in order to display the menu of the article to which the cursor is moved. UNIT 1 SNo. the cursor only moves vertically. 5-1-2 Case of creating mode In creating mode. The cursor can be moved freely in the direction of the arrow. the cursor can only move up or down. SEARCH 2. 1 SNo. 2 MAT UNIT TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT UNIT . even if the or key is depressed. .... first of all go to creating mode...Search for a unit number ..... There are the following four types of search: . Unit data is displayed graphically..Insertion ....... WORK No..Help .. The listing mode requires a few operations different from those for the creating mode.Search for a unit name ........ Used to return from creating mode to listing mode Note: 2............... Used to copy the program......... Editing functions The following 6 editing functions are available: . 5-2-1 Editing menus In order to use these functions......Deletion............ a tool sequence or a shape sequence ... .. unit or shape .. Only [SEARCH] and [HELP] functions can be used in the listing mode.. Used to display the intended unit or tool sequence .... Refer to the description in the following notes....Copy .....Search for a name of a tool 5-2 ....Search ...5 5-2 EDITION OF DATA Editing Editing functions and menus 1. Then press the menu selector key in order to display the following menu for editing....... tool sequence or shape sequence .. Used to insert a unit... select [SEARCH] in the menu displayed after entering of the work number.End of program.Search for the end of a program .... Used to erase the unit..... 5-2-2 Search This SEARCH function is used for displaying on the screen................ PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP In listing mode..... a unit or a tool sequence which one wishes to check or modify in the program. SEARCH PROGRAM EDIT TPC WPC MSR TOOL PATH PROCESS PROGRAM CONTROL LAYOUT HELP PROGRAM FILE Note: This following subsections describe the functions centered on the creating mode.. the alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND is displayed. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP Note: This operation is not necessary in listing mode. SEARCH] menu key. SEARCH] to reverse and the screen displays the message UNIT NUMBER <INPUT>?.EDITION OF DATA 5 1. This function is used for resuming the programming whilst in progress. UNIT No. Note 2: In the UNIT No. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP Note: ! This operation is not necessary in listing mode. Search for the end This LAST SEARCH function moves the cursor to the end of the program. Menu selection: [SEARCH] → [LAST SEARCH] (1) Display the menu for editing. wherever the present position of the cursor is. Example: The cursor moves to the number of the unit entered and the unit is displayed on the screen. Search for a unit number This function serves to display the necessary unit from the unit number. LAST SEARCH SEARCH UNIT SEARCH TOOL SEARCH (3) Press the [UNIT No. TOOL 1 2 FIG PTN Note 1: When the number of the entered unit does not exist in the program. Unit number 10 Press the following keys: ! 1 0 INPUT (4) Enter the number of the unit to be found. SEARCH function mode. UNo. SEARCH] (1) Display the menu for editing. the number of the unit entered is searched for from the head of the program. UNIT ← The cursor moves here. This causes the display of the search menu. 10 SNo. ! This causes the display of [UNIT No. (2) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. 5-3 . Menu selection: [SEARCH] → [UNIT No. 2. Menu selection: [SEARCH] → [UNIT SEARCH] → [POINT MACH-ING/LINE MACH-ING/ FACE MACH-ING/OTHER] → Unit name (1) Display the menu for editing. The search menu is then displayed. The cursor goes to the end of the program and the last line is displayed on the screen. ! This causes the display of [LAST SEARCH] to reverse and the screen displays the message LAST SEARCH <INPUT>?. Search for a unit name This function serves to display the line of a required unit on the basis of the unit name. UNIT No. ! The search menu is then displayed. (2) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. LAST SEARCH SEARCH UNIT SEARCH TOOL SEARCH (3) Press the [UNIT SEARCH] menu key.5 EDITION OF DATA (2) Press the [SEARCH] menu key. UNIT No. UNIT ← The cursor moves here. 3. INPUT (4) Press the input key ! . FIG UNo. LAST SEARCH SEARCH UNIT SEARCH TOOL SEARCH (3) Press the [LAST SEARCH] menu key. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP Note: ! The listing mode does not require this operation. ! The unit menu is displayed and the message UNIT NAME SEARCH <INPUT>? is indicated on the screen. UNIT NAME SEARCH <INPUT>? POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM (a) (b) (c) OTHER WPC OFFSET END (d) 5-4 . UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL CTR-DR DRILL The cursor moves here. 1 2 The cursor moves to the following same unit name. 24 SNo. . ! The point machining unit menu is displayed. Press the input key INPUT . UNo. UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL CTR-DR DRILL INPUT results in the searching for the following UNo. The display of [RGH CBOR] is then reversed. Press the [RGH CBOR] menu key. 10 SNo. UNIT NAME SEARCH <INPUT>? DRILLING RGH CBOR RGH BCB REAMING TAPPING BORING BK CBOR CIRC MIL ( CBOR TAP ) HI SPD. BORING BORING BORING BORING (b) Pressing of the [LINE MACH-ING] menu key results in the display of the linear machining unit menu.EDITION OF DATA 5 (4) Select the name of the unit to be found. Note: The alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND is displayed when the name of the unit specified for the search does not exist after the cursor position.Selecting [BORING] from the menu (a) results in the display of the boring unit menu. 1 2 [3] Another pressing of the input key same unit name. 5-5 . (a) Presse the [POINT MACH-ING] menu key. The cursor then goes to the line of the entered unit and the unit is displayed on the screen.USE a Example: [1] ! [2] ! Search under the name of the RGH CBOR machining unit. LINE CTR LINE RGT LINE LFT LINE OUT LINE IN CHMF RGT CHMF LFT CHMF OUT CHMF IN b Select the name of the unit to be found from the menu (b). DRL. STEP POCKET PCKT MT PCKT VLY SLOT FACE MIL TOP EMIL SURFACE 3-D c Select the name of the unit to be found from the menu (c). The search menu is then displayed. LAST SEARCH SEARCH UNIT SEARCH TOOL SEARCH 5-6 . (2) Press the [SEARCH] menu key.Pressing of the [SURFACE 3-D] menu key results in the display of the three-dimensional surface machining unit menu (d). TOOL SEARCH. serves to display the sequence line of the required tool on the basis of the name of the tool.5 EDITION OF DATA (c) Pressing of the [FACE MACH-ING] menu key. SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END 4. UNIT No. ! M CODE The special unit menu is displayed. . PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP Note: ! The listing mode does not require this operation. Pressing of the [ >>> ] menu key permits displaying the three-dimensional surface machining unit menu (e). ROTATE 1 ROTATE 2 ROTATE 3 ROTATE PARALLEL PARALLEL PARALLEL PARALLEL 4 1 2 3 4 >>> d NORMAL 1 NORMAL RULED-S. Search for name of a tool This function. ! The face machining unit menu is displayed. 2 >>> e (d) Press the [OTHER] menu key. Menu selection: [SEARCH] → [TOOL SEARCH] → Tool name (1) Display the menu for editing. CENTER DRILL DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER FACER TAP BORING BAR BACK BOR. 5-2-3 Insertion This INSERT function is used to insert (add) one unit. ! The tool names menu is displayed and the screen displays the message TOOL NAME SEARCH <INPUT>?.EDITION OF DATA 5 (3) Press the [TOOL SEARCH] menu key. CHAMFER [3] Another pressing of the input key name. one tool sequence or one shape sequence during the creating or editing of a program. SNo. SNo.Insertion of a unit . CHAMFER END MILL Note: The alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND is displayed when the name of the tool specified for search does not exist after the cursor position. Press the input key INPUT . 5-7 .Pressing the [ >>> ] menu key permits changing the tool names. The cursor moves to the sequence line of the tool entered and the sequence line is displayed on the screen. tool) is determined depending on the cursor position. This will cause the display of [DRILL] to reverse.Insertion of a tool sequence . TOOL NAME SEARCH <INPUT>? ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL CUTTER ENDMILL OTHER TOOL TOUCH SENSOR >>> . 1 2 3 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL The cursor moves here.Insertion of a shape sequence The line to be inserted (unit.BAR CHIP VACUUM >>> Example: [1] ! [2] ! Search under the tool name: DRILL Press the [DRILL] menu key. 1 2 3 4 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL INPUT results in finding the following same tool The cursor moves to the following same unit name. The following three types of insertion are available: . 1 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL SNo. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. Insertion of a unit Perform the following procedure to insert a unit. 1 SNo. UNo. 1 2 FIG 1 2 UNo. 1 SNo. the empty shape sequence is inserted. the cursor is to be located here. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [INSERT] menu key. 0 UNo. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. Menu selection: [INSERT] (1) Bring the cursor to the next line of the unit to be inserted. pressing the [SHAPE END] menu key results in the insertion of an empty unit. 1 UNo. 2 SNo. 2 SNo. (2) Display the menu for editing. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL In the case where a line is inserted here. ! The display of [INSERT] is reversed and the screen displays the message LINE INSERT <INPUT>?. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT Unit inserted UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Note 1: When the cursor is located on the line of the unit which follows the line of the shape sequence at step (1). 0 UNo. INPUT (4) Press the input key Example: UNo. Then. TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT UNIT FCE MILL TOOL SNo. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL . Example: UNo. 2 UNo. 0 UNo. ! Example: SNo. 3 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT UNIT UNIT FCE MILL This causes the insertion of an empty unit. Shape sequence inserted Unit inserted 5-8 . 2 SNo.5 EDITION OF DATA 1. 0 UNo. 1 2 FIG 1 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT Case where a tool sequence line is to be inserted here (2) Display the menu for editing. the alarm 409 ILLEGAL INSERTION is displayed. “PROGRAM CREATION” for the selection of each unit and data setting. 0 UNo. Note: When the machining unit is inserted. ! The display of [INSERT] is reversed and the screen displays the message LINE INSERT <INPUT>?. INPUT (4) Press the input key ! Example: UNo. 1 SNo. Menu selection: [INSERT] (1) Bring the cursor to the next line of the tool sequence to be inserted. UNo. 0 UNo. “PROGRAM CREATION” for the selection of each unit and data setting. 0 (common unit). Refer to the Chapter 7. the tool sequence and the shape sequence are successively inserted progressively with the development of the operation. Example: UNo. 1 SNo. Insertion of a tool sequence Perform the following procedure to insert a tool sequence. This causes the insertion of an empty tool sequence line. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [INSERT] menu key. 1 SNo.EDITION OF DATA 5 Note 2: When the insertion operation is done in UNo. Refer to the Chapter 7. 2. 1 2 FIG 1 PT MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN . 1 2 3 FIG 1 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL Tool sequence inserted CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT (5) Enter the data. (5) Enter the data. 5-9 . Insertion of a shape sequence Perform the following procedure to insert a shape sequence. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [INSERT] menu key. 2 UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT UNIT FCE MILL Case where a shape sequence line is to be inserted here (2) Display the menu for editing. 2 UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN Shape sequence inserted PT UNIT FCE MILL 5-10 . UNo. 1 SNo. 1 SNo. the alarm 409 ILLEGAL INSERTION is displayed. Example: UNo. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. 2 PT UNIT FCE MILL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN . 3. 1 2 FIG 1 2 UNo. ! The display of [INSERT] is reversed and the screen displays the message LINE INSERT <INPUT>?. INPUT (4) Press the input key ! Example: UNo. 0 (common unit). 1 SNo. Menu selection: [INSERT] (1) Bring the cursor to the next line of the shape sequence to be inserted.5 EDITION OF DATA Note: When the insertion operation is done in UNo. This causes the insertion of an empty shape sequence line. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Case where this unit is to be deleted (2) Display the menu for editing.CURSOR?.Deletion of the unit . 5-11 . 1 SNo. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [ERASE] menu key. The following three types of deletion are available: . 2 SNo. 5-2-4 Deletion This ERASE function is used to erase the unit. Example: SNo.Deletion of the shape sequence 1.Deletion of the tool sequence . ! ! The display of [ERASE] is reversed and the screen displays the message: SELECT PROGRAMS . 0 UNo. The unit on which the cursor is located is selected (display of the unit line is reversed). UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL ← Shape sequnce inserted (5) Enter the data. Note: When the insertion operation is done in UNo. the tool sequence or the shape sequence which has become unnecessary during the creating or editing of a program. Refer to the Chapter 7. “PROGRAM CREATION” for the selection of each unit and data setting. 1 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL SNo. 1 2 FIG 1 2 UNo. 0 (common unit). 2 SNo. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. Example: UNo.EDITION OF DATA 5 Note: When the cursor is located on the line of the unit which follows the line of the shape sequence. an empty shape sequence is inserted as follows. Deletion of the unit (1) Place the cursor on the unit to be deleted. 1 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN PT . the alarm 409 ILLEGAL INSERTION is displayed. ! ! The display of [ERASE] is reversed and the screen displays the message: SELECT PROGRAMS . The selected units are then deleted.5 EDITION OF DATA (4) When multiple units are to be deleted at a time. 5-12 . 1 SNo. 1 SNo. 1 FIG 1 UNo. use the upward and downward cursor keys to designate the area. The tool sequence and the shape sequence in this unit will equally be deleted. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [ERASE] menu key. (5) Press the input key ! INPUT . the alarm 410 ILLEGAL DELETION is displayed. 0 UNo. Deletion of the tool sequence Menu selection: [ERASE] (1) Place the cursor on the tool sequnece to be deleted. Example: UNo. 0 UNo. 1 MAT CBN STL UNIT FCE MILL Note: When the deletion operation is done for UNo. 0 UNo.CURSOR?. The tool sequence on which the cursor is located is selected (display of the sequence line is reversed). 2. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. 2 PT UNIT FCE MILL MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN Unit to be deleted UNo. Example: UNo. 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN PT UNIT FCE MILL Case where this sequence is to be deleted (2) Display the menu for editing. 0 (common unit). Deletion of the shape sequence (1) Place the cursor on the shape sequnece to be deleted. Deletion of the unit. use the upward and downward cursor keys to designate the area. Example: UNo. The shape sequence on which the cursor is located is selected (display of the sequence line is reversed). 1 SNo.” INPUT (5) Press the input key ! 3. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [ERASE] menu key. (4) When multiple shape sequences are to be deleted at a time.” When tool sequence line is inclueded in the area. use the upward and downward cursor keys to designate the area. 1 2 FIG 1 2 UNo.EDITION OF DATA 5 (4) When multiple tool sequences are to be deleted at a time. deletion occurs in the same manner as in “2. Deletion of the tool sequence. ! ! When unit line is inclueded in the area.” When tool sequence line is inclueded in the area. Deletion of the shape sequence. 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN LINE PT UNIT FCE MILL Case where this sequence is to be deleted (2) Display the menu for editing. deletion occurs in the same manner as in “3.CURSOR?. deletion occurs in the same manner as in “1. Deletion of the unit. unit and shape sequence are deleted.” 5-13 . . deletion occurs in the same manner as in “1. ! ! When unit line is inclueded in the area. ! ! The display of [ERASE] is reversed and the screen displays the message: SELECT PROGRAMS . 0 UNo. The designated tool sequence. 2 PT UNIT FCE MILL MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN 5-2-5 Copy During the process of creating or editing of a program.5 EDITION OF DATA (5) Press the input key ! INPUT . unit and tool sequence are deleted. the alarm 454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT will be displayed when selecting the [PROGRAM COPY] menu key. Note 2: When the cursor is located on the common unit. Copying of a program This PROGRAM COPY function is used to copy another program in the process of creating or editing of a program. 1 2 FIG 1 2 UNo. 1 2 FIG 1 UNo. Example: UNo. 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL PTN LINE PT UNIT FCE MILL Shape sequence to be deleted UNo. 1 SNo. There are three types of copying depending on the contents to be copied. Menu selection: [PROGRAM COPY] (1) Move the cursor to the line on which another program is inserted. 1 SNo.Copying of a program . 0 UNo. .Copying of a unit . the alarm 454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT will be displayed when selecting the [PROGRAM COPY] menu key. 5-14 . 1 SNo. 0 UNo. The designated shape sequence. However. this COPY function is used to copy another program or one unit/shape sequence of a program in the process of creating or editing. 0 UNo. 1 2 MAT CBN STL Case where another program is inserted here UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Note 1: When the cursor is not located on the unit line. the common unit and the end unit cannot be copied.Copying of a shape 1. Example: UNo. the alarm 440 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DESIGNATED is displayed. the alarm 405 PROGRAM No. 5-15 . PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [PROGRAM COPY] menu key. 2 UNo. 0 UNo. 1 SNo. 1 UNo. Note 2: When an EIA/ISO program work number is entered. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT WPC-0 UNIT M CODE UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Program copied Note 1: When a work number which is not recorded is entered. 1000 Program in the process of editing UNo. 1 UNo. 0 UNo. 1000 is copied as follows: Program of WNo. Example: ! Work number 1000 Press the following keys: Example: 1 0 0 0 INPUT The program of work number 1000 is then copied. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL UNo. 3 SNo. 3 MAT CST IRN UNIT WPC-0 UNIT M CODE UNIT END Program to be copied Program after copying UNo.EDITION OF DATA 5 (2) Display the menu for editing. 2 UNo. 0 UNo. ! The display of [PROGRAM COPY] is then reversed and the screen displays the message WORKPIECE PROGRAM NUMBER?. (4) Enter the work number of the program to be copied. Programm WNo. NOT FOUND is displayed. The unit and also the tool sequence and the shape sequence which follow are copied. 0). Work number 1000 Press the following keys: ! 1 0 0 0 INPUT (4) Enter the work number of the program containing the unit to be copied. this UNIT COPY function is used to perform the copying. 0 UNo. unit by unit from the program or from another program. Example: UNo. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Case where another unit is inserted here Note 1: When the cursor is not located on the unit line. the screen displays the message UNIT NUMBER <INPUT>?. Copying of a unit In the process of creating or editing a program.5 EDITION OF DATA 2. Menu selection: [UNIT COPY] (1) Move the cursor to the line on which a unit is copied. ! The display of [UNIT COPY] is then reversed and the screen displays message: WORKPIECE PROGRAM NUMBER?. Example: When the work number is entered. the alarm 454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT will be displayed when selecting the [UNIT COPY] menu key. Note 2: When the cursor is located on the common unit (UNo. 1 SNo. 5-16 . the alarm 454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT will be displayed when selecting the [UNIT COPY] menu key. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [UNIT COPY] menu key. (2) Display the menu for editing. the alarm 405 PROGRAM No. 1 FIG 1 UNo. NOT FOUND is displayed. 1000 UNo. 1 SNo. 1 FIG. 1 SNo. 0 UNo. 0 UNo. UNo. 1 of program WNo. 1000 is copied as follows: Program of WNo. 1 SNo. 0 UNo. Any attempt to make such a copy will cause the alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT to be displayed. 1 UNo. Example: ! Unit number 1 Press the following keys: Example: 1 INPUT Unit number 1 in the program of work No. Note 3: When a work number of the EIA/ISO program is entered. Note 2: When an unregistered work number is entered. 5-17 . 2 SNo. 2 MAT CST IRN UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL PTN SQR UNIT RGH CBOR Unit to be copied Program in the process of editing UNo. 1000 is then copied. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Program after copying UNo. 0 cannot be copied.EDITION OF DATA 5 (5) Enter the number of the unit to be copied. 1 2 MAT CBN STL UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL PTN SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL Unit copied Note 1: The common unit UNo. the alarm 440 EIA/ISO PROGRAM DESIGNATED is displayed. 5-18 . 1 SNo. it is impossible to perform the copying if the shape sequence line has already been filled with data. 2 SNo. Example: UNo. PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [SHAPE COPY] menu key. Copying of shape This SHAPE COPY function is used to copy the shape sequence in the process of creation or editing of a program. (2) Display the menu for editing. 1 is copied on this shape sequence line UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN Note: When the cursor is located in a position other than the shape sequence or when data have already been entered in the shape sequence. the alarm 454 CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT is displayed. Menu selection: [SHAPE COPY] (1) Move the cursor to the position in which the shape sequence is to be copied. 1 FIG 1 PT CIR SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN Case where the shape sequence of the unit No. 1 FIG 1 2 3 UNo. ! The display of [SHAPE COPY] is then reversed and the screen displays the message UNIT NUMBER <INPUT>?.5 EDITION OF DATA 3. However. Note 3: When the type of the shape of the unit entered is different from that of the unit to be copied. 1 SNo. 1 is then copied. 2 SNo. Example: ! Unit number 1 Press the following keys: 1 INPUT The shape sequence under unit No. 1 SNo. the alarm 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND is displayed. the alarm 453 NO SHAPE DATA TO COPY IN UNIT is displayed.EDITION OF DATA 5 (4) Enter the number of the unit containing the shape sequence to be copied. 1 is copied as follows: Program after copying UNo. 1 FIG 1 PT CIR SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN Note 1: When the number of an unestablished unit is entered. The shape sequence under unit No. 1 FIG 1 2 3 PT CIR SQR Shape sequence copied PT CIR SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL PTN Example: Program before copying UNo. Note 2: When the number of the unit entered does not contain the shape sequence. 2 SNo. 1 FIG 1 2 3 UNo. 5-19 . 1 FIG Shape sequence to be copied 1 2 3 UNo. the alarm 452 NO SHAPE DATA IN UNIT is displayed. FIG 1 UNo. PTN PT UNIT END CONTI. PTN PT UNIT END CONTI. ! This causes the cursor to move to the left end and the transmission from creating mode to listing mode. EXECUTE 5-20 E . 0 NUMBER 0 ATC RETURN WORK No. 0 NUMBER 0 ATC RETURN WORK No.5 EDITION OF DATA 5-2-6 End of program This PROGRAM COMPLETE function is used to go from creating mode to listing mode. EXECUTE FIG 1 UNo. Menu selection: [PROGRAM COMPLETE] (1) Display the menu for editing PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (2) Press the menu key [PROGRAM COMPLETE]. Press the page key to display the next page. 6-3 Tool Data Window The tool data window can be displayed by pressing the [TOOL DAT WINDOW] menu key while the cursor remains set to either C-SP or FR of the tool sequence line.Auxiliary coordinates system unit (OFFSET) .Common unit .Basic coordinates system unit (WPC) . 6-1 MAZATROL Help The MAZATROL Help can be displayed by pressing the [HELP] menu key while the cursor remains set to a unit. Press the page key to display the next page.WINDOW FUNCTIONS 6 6 WINDOW FUNCTIONS The window display functions described below are provided to make it easy for data to be set during creation and editing of programs. Windows can be displayed by pressing the corresponding menu key. or an end mill or chamfering cutter data item NOM of the tool sequence line of a point-machining unit.) 6-2 Tool File Window The tool file window can be displayed by pressing the [TOOL. The tool data items corresponding to that sequence will be displayed in the window at that time. When the Help is displayed.MMS unit tool sequence (except for patterns X-Y-th CNR and CALIBR.Machining unit . H740PAF040E 6-1 . 6-4 Tap Nominal Diameter Window The tap nominal diameter window can be displayed by pressing the [NOM-φ SELECT] menu key while the cursor remains set to NOM-φ of the tapping or counterbore-tapping unit and unified screw or pipe screw has been selected. The Help can be displayed for the following units: . The tool data items corresponding to that sequence will be displayed in the window at that time. The tap diameter will be automatically set in the program by pressing the input key. Press the page key to display the next page. the unit line to be set will be displayed at the top of the screen and the data item corresponding to the data type specified by the cursor will be displayed in reverse form. F WINDOW] menu key while the cursor remains set to tool sequence data item NOM of a line/face machining unit. Select the appropriate tap diameter in the window using the cursor key to make the display to be reversed. The calculation result will then be displayed in the data input area at the bottom right of the display. Enter a calculation expression and press the input key one time. In the menu.6 6-5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS Desk Calculator Functions When entering shapes (sequence data) for a MAZATROL program. If the result is correct. The particular data will then be set at the cursor position. enter the correct calculation expression after pressing the data cancellation key (this deletes the entire expression) or the clear key (this deletes character by character). 6-2 E . the asterisk sign (∗) means multiplication and the slash sign (/) means division. add/subtract/multiply/divide operations and calculations using trigonometric functions and/or square roots can be carried out by selecting [Calculator] from the menu bar [Window]. If the result is not correct. press the input key once again. Used to create a program corresponding to an EIA/ISO program (7-11) MMS unit .. Used to make the machine perform operations other than machining (7-10) Manual program mode unit ... Used to set auxiliary coordinates (7-4)........ 7-1 Types of Units As shown previously in Chapter 2..... A unit used for workpiece machining (7-5 through 7-8) End unit ............. 7-2 Common Unit This concerns the unit which is always set at the head of the program at the time of the programming.... Common unit............ A unit that must be set at the end of a program (7-9) In addition.........PROGRAM CREATION 7 7 PROGRAM CREATION In the MAZATROL program creation procedures......... When creating a new program. A unit used to set basic coordinates (7-3) Machining unit .......... programming will use an interactive method in which you are to enter and set necessary data with the numeric keys or menu keys in accordance with the messages displayed on the screen....” a MAZATROL program must consist basically of the four units listed below [numbers in parentheses ( ) below denote the section numbers within this manual]........... only the common unit line shown below is displayed on the upper part of the screen... Auxiliary coordinates unit ...... move the cursor to each data item and set the data............. To create a MAZATROL programm. A unit that must be created at the beginning of a program (7-2) Basic coordinates unit ............................. Used for automatic measurement of basic coordinates (7-12) The functions of each of the eight units listed above are described below...... H740PAG040E 7-1 ......................... Data for the common unit are set on the PROGRAM display in creating mode.... “MAZATROL PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES..... Special mode unit. the four units listed below can be created as required.............. <Independent movement on each axis: 0> <Simultaneous movement on all axes: 1> ATC position ATC position Z Initial point Y Movement on Z-axis only.STL AL CAST INITIAL-Z Specify the position on the Z-axis (Z plane) as an absolute value from the workpiece zero point in order to prevent interference of the tool edge with the workpiece or a fixture in case of movement on the X. an alarm will be displayed.and Y-axes X Simultaneous movement on X-. the movement is done in conformity with the data entered in the ATC MODE in the subprogram.-MAT.C.7 PROGRAM CREATION 1.) display. Initial point Z Workpiece zero point M3P077 ATC MODE Specify the mode of movement from the initial point to the ATC position at the time of ATC.MAT. Without specification./T.-MAT. then movement on X.W. When the cursor is moved to MAT the menu shown below is displayed. Note: In the case of designation of 1 (simultaneous movement). Consequently. Example: CST IRN DUCT IRN CBN STL ALY STL STNLESS ALUMINUM L. check that the tool does not interfere with the workpiece or with the fixture of the workpiece./T. In automatic operating mode. 7-2 . To register new workpiece material names. The names of workpiece materials in the menu are the same as those which are listed on the CUTTING CONDITION (W. Data setting in common unit UNo. these names of workpiece materials are already registered in the system and they are MAZAKrecommended ones. Also. “CUTTING CONDITION . this height is taken into consideration for the positioning of the tool. Y-and Z-axes M3P078 Initial point The data of the ATC MODE are only valid in the related program. refer to Part 3.-MAT. 0 MAT ! INITIAL-Z ! ATC MODE ! MULTI MODE ! MULTI FLAG ! PITCH-X ! PITCH-Y ! Cursor position MAT Entering Specify the material of the workpiece using the menu key to perform the automatic determination of the cutting conditions. Section 8-1.and Y-axes. These data will be used in the same way in the case of the use of the auxiliary coordinates system. during the execution of the subprogram.” of the Operating Manual for the machine. Display. . Therefore. enter data in the columns MULTI FLAG.When pressing the [OFFSET TYPE] menu key. as an amount of offset with relation to the programmed workpiece zero point.MULTI 5 ∗ 2 . Menu items . 0 OFS 1 2 3 MAT CBN STL X X1 X2 X3 INITIAL-Z 50 Y Y1 Y2 Y3 ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG 0 th th1 th2 th3 OFFSET TYPE Z Z1 Z2 Z3 " PITCH-X " PITCH-Y " ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ It is possible to set a maximum of 10 OFS numbers.. . .Case of designation of th y 2 Y3 y’ X2 X3 1 Y1 X1 th x M3P080 Y2 x’ 3 7-3 ... Machining of several workpieces (for machining with reference to fixture) . UNo. Y offset for each workpiece. unlike the case of [MULTI 5 ∗ 2]...PROGRAM CREATION 7 Cursor position MULTI MODE Entering Specify the multi-workpiece machining mode using the menu key. there are no restrictions that the workpieces must be arranged in an equidistant manner or in 2 rows/5 rows.. it is possible to machine the workpieces arranged in arbitrary positions.When pressing the [MULTI 5 ∗ 2] menu key..... Ordinary machining (machining of one workpiece) . as an amount of offset with relation to the programmed workpiece zero point.MULTI OFF. enter each coordinate with numerical keys as offset data of the common unit. The relation between the position of the workpiece and the coordinates is as follows: . Press the [OFFSET TYPE] menu key and enter each coordinate as offset data of the common unit.. Machining of several workpieces deviated arbitrarily OFFSET TYPE By fixing the amount of X. PITCH-X and PITCH-Y with numeric keys and press the input key..Case of th = 0 Y direction X2 X3 1 Y1 X direction M3P079 Y2 Y3 2 3 X1 Workpiece zero point (WPC) .OFFSET TYPE .. ...7 PROGRAM CREATION Cursor position MULTI FLAG Entering Specify the execution or non-execution of the machining for each workpiece in case of MULTI 5 ∗ 2........ Non-execution .. Note 3: In the program containing the multi-workpiece machining. PITCH-Y from the position of the reference workpiece........ 6 Y direction PITCH-Y 1 PITCH-X Workpiece zero point 7 8 9 10 Reference workpiece 2 3 4 5 X direction M3P083 Note: Minus data cannot be entered in the articles PITCH-X..... The workpieces are arranged with an equal distance of the values PITCH-X... Note 2: The M-code specified at the end of the tool sequence is executed in case of the machining of each workpiece which undergoes multi-workpiece machining. The M-code entered in the M-code unit is only executed once....... PITCH-Y.. 1 A maximum of 10 identical workpieces can be machined with only one program.. Note 1: The multi-workpiece machining with the manual program mode unit requires the absolute position command of the three axes in the first sequence... 7-4 ... 0 Execution ... The relation of the value of 10 figures in the MULTI FLAG column and the workpiece positions is as follows: MULTI MODE 5 ∗ 2 MULTI FLAG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PITCH-X PITCH-Y ↑ ↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑ 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 Y direction 1 7 8 9 10 2 3 X direction 4 5 M3P081 Set 1 as follows in the MULTI FLAG column for workpiece layout shown below....... Example of entering: MULTI FLAG 6 8 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ↑ 2 4 10 ↑ 8 ↑ 6 ↑ 4 ↑ 2 M3P082 PITCH-X PITCH-Y Specify the pitch in the directions X and Y between the located workpieces in case of MULTI 5 ∗ 2... priority function for the same tool is valid.. Enter the Y coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system. 1. the modal status display on the POSITION display will remain set to G54. WPC (option) X Y th Z C A Enter the X coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system. Enter the C coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK Press the [WPC] menu key. the modal status display of the POSITION display will remain set to G54. Enter the A coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system. instead of using the normal WPC data. If data is set. press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu keys) in creating mode.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-3 Basic Coordinates System Unit This unit serves to specify the distance from the machine zero point to the workpiece zero point. the following menu is displayed for the next unit setting.! ADD.1 P0 and external workpiece offsets will not be displayed exactly. When data setting for the common unit has been finished. Data setting in basic coordinates system unit UNo. WPC ! X ! Y ! th ! Z ! C ! A ! Cursor position UNIT Entering Several basic coordinates systems (WPC) can be specified in one program.1 P0. Permissible input range: 0 to 99 Set data in this item only if you are to use additional basic coordinate data (coordinates A to J) and workpiece offset data (G54 to G59). ADD. Enter the angle formed by the machine coordinates system and the workpiece coordinates system. They are differentiated each other by their numbers. Note: During the execution of a MAZATROL program. If this menu is not displayed. 7-5 . Enter the Z coordinate of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system. 1 UNIT WPC. In order to return to the workpiece zero point. Offsetting the workpiece zero point to point P2 makes the programming easy. UNIT OFFSET U(X) ! V(Y) ! D(th) ! W(Z) ! Cursor position U (X) V (Y) D (th) W (Z) Entering Enter the distance of offset from the workpiece zero point on the X-axis. enter 0 in the columns U (X). W(Z) 0. D(th) 30. it is necessary to select this auxiliary coordinates system unit. Enter the distance of offset from the workpiece zero point on the Y-axis. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK Press the [OFFSET] menu key. Hole 1 Hole 2 Y UNIT OFFSET U(X) 200. V (Y).7 7-4 PROGRAM CREATION Auxiliary Coordinates System Unit In the process of programming. V(Y) 0. 7-6 . D (th) and W (Z). the workpiece zero point can be offset to any position in order to facilitate the entering of data. Example: UNo. 1. Enter the angle formed by the workpiece coordinates system and the auxiliary coordinates system. Enter the distance of offset from the workpiece zero point on the Z-axis. In order to do this. P2 30º X Workpiece zero point 200 Offset workpiece zero point M3P084 The entering of the position of hole 2 with relation to the workpiece zero point is very complicated. Data setting in auxiliary coordinates system unit UNo. ....Face machining unit .: . ) 7-7 ..... used for machining an area and machining form (7-8) Each machining unit includes tool sequence and shape sequence.Line machining unit . used for a contour machining (7-7) .Point machining unit ........ used for drilling of holes (7-6) ..PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-5 Types of the Machining Unit The machining unit is available in the following three types [numbers in parentheses ( below denote the section numbers within this manual].. Circular milling 9. Reaming NM210-00532 NM210-00533 6-(1) Boring of through hole NM210-00534 6-(2) Boring of non-through hole NM210-00535 6-(3) Boring of stepped through hole 5. Back boring 8. RGH BCB machining 4. RGH CBOR machining 3.7 7-6 PROGRAM CREATION Point Machining Unit The point machining unit serves to determine the data concerning the machining method and machining form for the drilling of holes. Tapping NM210-00536 NM210-00537 NM210-00538 NM210-00539 6-(4) Boring of stepped non-through hole 7. 7-1 NM210-00541 NM210-00542 NM210-00543 Types of point machining units 7-8 . 7-6-1 Types of point machining units As shown below 12 types of point machining units shown below are available: 1. Counterbore-tapping NM210-00540 Fig. The unit includes the tool sequence determining the tool data used and the shape sequence determining the data concerning the machining dimensions on the drawing. Drilling 2. USE] refer to Subsection 7-6-4 “Automatic tool development for cemented carbide drill.When the [BORING] menu key is pressed. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. the menu of the four following machining subunits is displayed. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. USE DRILLING RGH CBOR RGH BCB REAMING TAPPING (3) Press the appropriate menu key of the desired machining unit.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-6-2 Procedure for selecting point machining unit (1) Press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu keys) to display the following menu. Data setting UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL CHAMFER NOM-φ No. 1 2 3 4 5 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. BORING BK CBOR CIRC MIL CBOR TAP HI SPD. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " " RGH 90° DEPTH CTR-D C-SP FR M M M DIA DEPTH CHMF UNo. 2 SNo. A. .” 7-6-3 1. Unit data and automatic tool development of the point machining unit Drilling unit (DRILLING) Select this drilling unit for machining of a hole with a drill. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. BORING BORING BORING BORING Remark: For menu item [HI SPD DRL. 7-9 . DRL. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK (2) Press the [POINT MACH-ING] menu key. # The following menu is displayed. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.D10 < DIA 7-10 .05 ≤ DIA ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA ≤ D10: Development of three tools Development is not executed in the following cases: Chamfering cutter DIA + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D2 – D4 CHMF = 0 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. . The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.DIA < 0.05 . If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining.7 PROGRAM CREATION DRILLING unit DIA Tool sequence CHMF DEPTH Centering drill M3P085 The tools in parentheses ( Drill (Drill) (Drill) (Chamfering cutter) M3P086 ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. B. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. Note: In the following cases the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed.DEPTH < CHMF . Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Drill 0. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool sequence RGH CBOR unit CB-DIA CB-DEP CHAMF DEPTH DIA Centering drill M3P087 Drill (Drill) (Drill) End mill (Chamfering cutter) M3P088 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. 2 SNo. A. Data setting UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL END MILL CHAMFER NOM-φ No.PROGRAM CREATION 7 2. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP CTR-D FR M M M CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM DIA DEPTH UNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. RGH CBOR machining unit (RGH CBOR) This unit is selected for machining a hole with a counterbore (faced hole). 7-11 . Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. 05 ≤ DIA ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA ≤ D10: Development of three tools End mill Development is always executed. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. Drill 0. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed. A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole. 1 2 3 4 5 6 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ " $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. .CB-DIA < DIA . If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining.7 PROGRAM CREATION B. Development is not executed in the following casses: Chamfering cutter CHMF = 0 DIA + (CB-DEP × 2) ≥ CB-DIA + (CHMF × 2) < D13 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. 2 SNo. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.DEPTH < CHMF .DEPTH < CB-DEP . RGH BCB machining unit (RGH BCB) This unit is selected for machining a hole with an inversed faced hole. Note: In the following cases the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. Data setting UNIT RGH BCB TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL CHAMFER BCK FACE NOM-φ No. A. 7-12 . HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH CTR-D C-SP FR M M M CB-DIA CB-DEP DIA DEPTH CHMF UNo.D10 < DIA 3. PROGRAM CREATION 7 RGH BCB unit DIA Tool sequence CHMF DEPTH CB-DEP CB-DIA Centering drill Drill (Drill) (Drill) (Chamfering cutter) Back facing M3P090 M3P089 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. Drill 0. Note: In the following cases the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. B. . A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.CB-DIA < DIA . Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.DEPTH < CB-DEP .05 ≤ DIA ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA ≤ D10: Development of three tools Development is not executed in the following cases: Chamfering cutter DIA + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D2 – D4 DIA + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D13 CHMF = 0 Back facing tool Development is always executed. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed.D10 < DIA 7-13 . The bold codes represent parameter addresses.DEPTH < CHMF . HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP FR CTR-D M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UNIT REAMING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL CHAMFER CHIP VAC REAMER DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP NOM-φ No. 2 SNo. In reaming. 7-14 . Reaming unit (REAMING) Select this unit for performing finish machining with reamer. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool sequence REAMING unit DIA CHMF DEPTH Centering drill Drill (Drill) (Drill) (Chamfering cutter) (Chip vacuum) Reamer M3P091 The tools in parentheses ( M3P092’ ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. Case of preceding process = drilling Data setting UNo. A.7 PROGRAM CREATION 4. the content of the tool sequence to be set is different according to the preceding process. The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Case of preceding process = boring Data setting UNo. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Note: In the following case the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole.DEPTH < CHMF B. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP CTR-D FR M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed.05 ≤ DIA – D35 ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA – D35 ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA – D35 ≤ D10: Development of three tools Development is not executed in the following cases: Chamfering cutter DIA + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D2 – D4 CHMF = 0 Chip vacuum Reamer Development is not executed if chip removal is not required. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. Drill 0. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. 7-15 . Development is always executed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 UNIT REAMING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL BOR BAR CHAMFER CHIP VAC REAMER DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP NOM-φ No. . edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. 2 SNo. Development is always executed. A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole.7 PROGRAM CREATION REAMING unit DIA Tool sequence CHMF DEPTH Centering drill Drill (Drill) (Drill) Boring M3P093 (Chamfering cutter) (Chip vacuum) Reamer M3P094 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. a centering drill can be used for chamfering.DEPTH < CHMF 7-16 . Drill 0. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed.05 ≤ DIA – D36 ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA – D36 ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA – D36 ≤ D10: Development of three tools Boring tool Development is always executed. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. Note: In the following case the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. . The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Development is not executed in the following cases: DIA + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D2 – D4 CHMF = 0 Chamfering cutter Chip vacuum Reamer Development is not executed if the chip removal is not required. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP CTR-D FR M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. 7-17 . a centering drill can be used for chamfering. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Case of preceding process = end mill Data setting UNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 UNIT REAMING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL END MILL END MILL CHAMFER CHIP VAC REAMER DIA DEPTH CHMF PRE-REAM CHP NOM-φ No. 2 SNo. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. REAMING unit Tool sequence DIA CHMF DEPTH Centering drill Drill (Drill) (Drill) End mill End mill M3P095 (Chamfering cutter) (Chip vacuum) Reamer M3P096 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. 2 SNo.7 PROGRAM CREATION Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. A. The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. Development is always executed. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed. Note 1: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. Note 2: If [TAPPING CYCLE] menu item is selected for PRE-DIA. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. Development is not executed in the following cases: DIA + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D2 – D4 CHMF = 0 Chamfering cutter Chip vacuum Reamer Development is not executed if the chip removal is not required. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " RGH 90° DEPTH CTR-D C-SP FR M M M NOMMAJOR-φ PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP UNo.DEPTH < CHMF 5. there is no need to set data in PRE-DEP.05 ≤ DIA – D37 ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA – D37 ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA – D37 ≤ D10: Development of three tools End mill Development of two tools is executed. Drill 0. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. . Note: In the following case the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. Data setting UNIT TAPPING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL CHAMFER CHIP VAC TAP NOM-φ No. A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole. Tapping unit (TAPPING) Select this unit for performing tapping. 7-18 . ” 7-19 .For data set in the tool data item LENG COMP. 9 – 7 Example 2: For 1 1/8-7 unified thread: Press the [E (1/8) EIGHTH] menu key. .PROGRAM CREATION 7 <Setting the nominal diameter of unified thread> Example 1: For 3/4-16 unified thread: Press the [Q (1/4) QUARTER] menu key. Note 2: For planetary tapping. TAP-DEP. . PITCH. Enter the data specified in the corresponding tool catalogue. and then press INPUT 3 – 1 6 and in this order. Note 1: The thread depths of PT thread or PS thread are set automatically according to MAZAK specifications. enter the cutting edge length specified in the tool catalogue. and CHMF. Cutting edge length Thread outside diameter Remark: Any given value for tapping can be specified as an auto-set value by editing the required text file within the hard disk. and then press order. and then press this order.Enter the catalogued nominal diameter in the tool data item NOM-φ.. the data to be set for the MAJOR-φ. the NC unit does not function. For details refer to “7-6-5 New tapping autosetting scheme. Example 2: For PF 1 thread: Press 1 3 and INPUT in this and INPUT in this order. enter the tool-catalogued data for the following data items: . and INPUT in <Setting the nominal diameter of pipe thread> Example 1: For PT 3/8 thread: Press the [E (1/8) EIGHTH] menu key.Enter the catalogued thread outside diameter in the tool data item ACT-φ.Press the FLOATING TAP menu key for selecting “synchronous/asynchronous” as the type of tapping in the tool data item TAP TYPE. Also. For TAP-DEP. . depends on the selected type of tool. B.Case of designation of threading other than the JIS standard threading (however. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. . The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. Development always takes place.7 PROGRAM CREATION TAPPING unit MAJOR-φ Tool sequence CHMF TAP-DEP Centering drill PITCH (Drill) (Drill) Drill (Chamfering cutter) (Chip vacuum) Tap M3P097 The tools in parentheses ( M3P098’ ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. this can be used for forced insertion). Drill 0. Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.05 ≤ Diameter of pre-hole drilling ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < Diameter of pre-hole drilling ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < Diameter of pre-hole drilling ≤ D10: Development of three tools Development is not executed in the following cases: Chamfering cutter Diameter of hole + (CHMF × 2) ≤ D2 – D4 CHMF = 0 Chip vacuum Tap Development does not take place if the chip removal is not required.TAP-DEP < CHMF . Note: In the following cases the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. 7-20 . If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. A maximum of three tools are developed depending on the diameter of the hole. stepped through hole boring and stepped non-through hole boring. non-through hole boring. Tool sequence BORING T1 unit DIA CHMF DEPTH Centering drill Drill (End mill) Boring (Boring) (Chamfering cutter) (Boring) M3P099 The tools in parentheses ( M3P100’ ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP CTR-D FR M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function.PROGRAM CREATION 7 6. 2 SNo. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development. Through hole boring unit (BORING T1) Select this unit for performing through-hole boring. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UNIT BORE T1 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL END MILL BOR BAR BOR BAR CHAMFER BOR BAR DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL NOM-φ No. A. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Boring unit (BORING) The boring has the four units as the through hole boring. Data setting UNo. 7-21 . For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UNIT BORE S1 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL END MILL BOR BAR BOR BAR CHAMFER BOR BAR DIA DEPTH CHMF BTM WAL PRE-DIA NOM-φ No.DEPTH < Depth of faced hole . 2 SNo. 7-22 . Data setting UNo. 7. Tool Centering drill Drill End mill Development patterns Development is always executed.0 < D8 Development of a maximum of three tools is executed depending on the wall roughness. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. Note: In the following cases the alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed. Development is not executed in the following case: DIA – 6. 6. Non-through hole boring unit (BORING S1) Select this unit for performing boring of non-through holes.7 PROGRAM CREATION Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Boring tool Wall roughness = 1.DIA ≤ 6.0 B. 4: Development of two tools Wall roughness = 5. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA " PRE-DEP " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP FR CTR-D M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. 2: Development of one tool Wall roughness = 3. 8. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. 9: Development of three tools Chamfering cutter Development is not executed in the following case: CHMF = 0 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses.DEPTH < CHMF . Development is always executed. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.Diameter of faced hole < DIA . . Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development. Development is always executed. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. a centering drill can be used for chamfering.0 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 BORING S1 unit DIA DEPTH CHMF Tool sequence Centering drill PRE-DIA Drill (End mill) Boring (Boring) (Chamfering cutter) (Boring) M3P101 The tools in parentheses ( M3P100’ ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. 8. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: .328558 + D12) . 9: Development of three tools Chamfering cutter Development does not take place in the following case: CHMF = 0 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses.0 < PRE-DIA DIA – PRE-DIA ≤ 6.PRE-DIA = 0 → Depth of hole < (A/3. Development is not executed if the following three conditions are fulfilled: End mill DIA – 6.328558 A: DIA – 6. 7.DIA ≤ 6.0) 7-23 .0 < D8) or A: D8 (in case of D8 ≤ DIA – 6. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Boring tool Wall roughness = 1. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.DEPTH < CHMF . Tool Centering drill Drill Development patterns Development is always executed.0 (in case of DIA – 6.PRE-DIA ≠ 0 → Depth of hole < (A – PRE-DIA)/3.0 < D8 10. 6. 4: Development of two tools Wall roughness = 5.DIA < PRE-DIA . 2: Development of one tool Wall roughness = 3.0 The development of a maximum of three tools is executed according to the wall roughness. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development.7 PROGRAM CREATION C. Stepped through hole boring unit (BORING T2) Select this unit for performing stepped through hole boring. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool sequence BORING T2 unit CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF DEPTH CHMF Centering drill DIA Drill End mill (End mill) Boring (Boring) Boring M3P102 (Boring) (Chamfering (Chamfering cutter) cutter) (Boring) (Boring) M3P103 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. 7-24 . Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. 2 SNo. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. Data setting UNo. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA " PRE-DEP " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP FR CTR-D M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 UNIT BORE T2 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL END MILL END MILL BOR BAR BOR BAR BOR BAR BOR BAR CHAMFER CHAMFER BOR BAR BOR BAR CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM WAL DIA DEPTH CHMF WAL NOM-φ No. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. Development of a maximum of two tools is executed depending on the diameter of the hole.0 ≤ 999.CB-DIA < DIA .PROGRAM CREATION 7 Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Wall roughness of hole = 1.DIA ≤ 6.0 7-25 . 8. 4: Development of two tools Wall roughness of large hole = 5. 8. 4: Development of two tools Boring tool Wall roughness of hole = 5. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. 7. 9: Development of three tools Wall roughness of large hole = 1. 6. Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: . edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.999: Development of two tools Development patterns The development of a maximum of three tools is executed depending on the wall roughness of the hole and depending on the wall roughness of the large hole. 2: Development of one tool Wall roughness of hole = 3. 2: Development of one tool Wall roughness of large hole = 3.DEPTH – CB-DEP < CHMF . 9: Development of three tools The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. End mill 0 < DIA – 6.CB-DEP < CHMF (CB) .(CB-DIA – DIA)/2 < CHMF .0 < D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA – 6. Development is always executed. Tool Centering drill Drill Development is always executed. 7. respectively. 6. 7-26 . For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA " PRE-DEP " RGH 90° DEPTH CTR-D " C-SP FR M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. Tool sequence BORING S2 unit CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF CHMF DEPTH Centering drill Drill End mill (End mill) Boring (Boring) PRE-DIA DIA Boring (Boring) (Chamfering cutter) (Chamfering cutter) (Boring) (Boring) M3P105 M3P104 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. Data setting UNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 UNIT BORE S2 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL END MILL END MILL BOR BAR BOR BAR BOR BAR BOR BAR CHAMFER CHAMFER BOR BAR BOR BAR CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM WAL PRE-DIA DIA DEPTH CHMF BTM WAL NOM-φ No. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter.7 PROGRAM CREATION D. Stepped non-through hole boring unit (BORING S2) Select this unit for performing stepped non-through boring. 2 SNo. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. 4: Development of two tools Boring tool Wall roughness of hole = 5.0 (in case of DIA – 6. 9: Development of three tools Development is not executed when the following two conditions are fulfilled: Chamfering cutter CHMF = 0 CHMF (CB) = 0 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Tool Centering drill Drill Development is always executed.CB-DIA < DIA . 2: Development of one tool Wall roughness of large hole = 3.CB-DEP < CHMF (CB) . 2: Development of one tool Wall roughness of hole = 3.DIA < PRE-DIA .0).(CB-DIA – DIA)/2 < CHMF .0 < PRE-DIA and (DIA – PRE-DIA) ≤ 6. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.0: Development of one tool D8 < DIA – 6. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining.DEPTH < CHMF .0 . 4: Development of two tools Wall roughness of large hole = 5. respectively. B: DEPTH – A/3. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.B≤0 B: DIA – 6. Development of a maximum of two tools is executed depending on the diameter of the hole.0 < D8.DIA ≤ 6. 6.0 ≤ 999.0) 7-27 . 8. B: D8 (in case of D8 ≤ DIA – 6.999: Development of two tools Development patterns The development of a maximum of three tools is executed depending on the wall roughness of the hole and depending on the wall roughness of the large hole.0 < D8) or A: D8 (in case of D8 ≤ DIA – 6. Wall roughness of hole = 1. 8.0 (in case of DIA – 6.(DEPTH – CB-DEP) < CHMF (CB) . 7.0 < D8).328558 – D12 (in case of CB-DEP = 0) or B: DEPTH – (A – PRE-DIA)/3. 9: Development of three tools Wall roughness of large hole = 1. 10. End mill 0 < DIA – 6. Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: . 7.DEPTH < CB-DEP .328558 (in case of PRE-DIA ≠ 0) A: DIA – 6. Development is always executed. 6. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. 2 SNo. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP " PRE-DIA " PRE-DEP " RGH 90° DEPTH C-SP FR CTR-D M M M DIA DEPTH BTM WAL PRE-DIA PRE-DEP CHMF WAL UNo. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development. Data setting UNIT BK-CBORE TOOL CTR-DR DRILL END MILL BOR BAR BOR BAR CHAMFER B-B BAR B-B BAR B-B BAR B-B BAR B-B BAR B-B BAR BOR BAR B-B BAR NOM-φ No. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. A. Back boring unit (BK-CBORE) Select this unit for performing back boring. 7-28 .7 PROGRAM CREATION 7. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool sequence BK-CBOR unit PRE-DIA CHMF PRE-DEP DEPTH DIA Centering drill Drill (End mill) Boring (Boring) (Chamfering cutter) Back boring M3P106 (Back boring) (Back boring) (Back boring) (Back boring) (Back boring) (Boring) (Back boring) M3P107 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case. Tool Centering drill Drill End mill Development is always executed. Back boring tool (Semi-finishing. 7. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.DIA < PRE-DIA . 8.PRE-DEP ≤ DIA/2 . 6.0 DIA – 1. finishing) Chamfering cutter Development is not executed in the following case: CHMF = 0 The development of a maximum of five tools is executed according to the value of N (See Note below. 4: Development of one tool (Semi-finishing) Wall roughness of hole = 5. 8. finishing) The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. 4 5. 4 5. a centering drill can be used for chamfering. 8.) DBBL DIA DIA – 1.5 Wall roughness of hole 1. 7. 4: Development of two tools (Roughing. 2: Development of one tool (Roughing) Boring tool Wall roughness of pre-hole = 3. 3. Development is not executed in the following case: PRE-DIA – 6. 9: Development of two tools (Semi-finishing. 8 DP PRE-DIA PRE-DIA – 1. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. 2. B. semifinishing. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Development is always executed.5 Wall roughness of pre-hole 1. 6. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. 6. Wall roughness of pre-hole = 1.PRE-DEP < CHMF . 7. semi-finishing) Wall roughness of pre-hole = 5.PRE-DEP < DEPTH . Development patterns Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: . 7.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter. 2 3. 9 7-29 .5<N The value N is determined by the roughness and the number of times of back boring.) N = 2: Development of two tools Back boring tool N = 3: Development of three tools N = 4: Development of four tools N = 5: Development of five tools The development of a maximum of two tools is executed depending on the wall roughness. 6. 9: Development of three tools (Roughing. 2: No development Wall roughness of hole = 3. N= (DBBL – DP) 6 (Decimal fractions are rounded off.0 < D8 Development of a maximum of three tools is executed depending on the wall roughness. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. finishing) Wall roughness of hole = 1. 2 SNo....circular tornado milling cycle A... a centering drill can be used for chamfering... Tool sequence CIRC MIL unit DIA DEPTH CHMF CHMF PRE-DIA M3P108 End mill (Chamfering cutter) (Chamfering cutter) M3P109 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case.circular milling cycle 1. TORNA.... DIA DEPTH CHMF BTM PRE-DIA CHMF PITCH1 " PITCH2 " M M M NOM-φ No...... one of the following three machining patterns is selected. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. 1 2 3 UNIT CIRC MIL TOOL END MILL CHAMFER CHAMFER TORNA...: 0. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.. Circular milling unit (CIRC MIL) Select this unit for performing drilling with the end mill.... Circular milling cycle Data setting UNo.....7 PROGRAM CREATION 8... " : Data are not necessary to be set here.. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6...... 7-30 . According to the set value in item TORNA.... Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter.. 1 UNIT CIRC MIL TOOL END MILL TORNA. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.DEPTH < CHMF . If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. Circular tornado milling cycle Data setting UNo. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP DEPTH C-SP FR M M M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.(DIA – PRE-DIA)/2 < CHMF (pre-hole) B. Tool End mill Development patterns Development is always executed. DIA DEPTH CHMF BTM PRE-DIA " CHMF " RGH PITCH1 PITCH2 NOM-φ No. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development.DIA < PRE-DIA . Development is not executed under the following two conditions: Chamfering cutter CHMF = 0 CHMF (pre-hole) = 0 Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: . 2 SNo. Tool sequence CIRC MIL unit DIA PITCH1 CHMF PITCH2 DEPTH D735P0063 End mill (Thread mill) D735P0064 7-31 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Counterbore-tapping unit (CBOR-TAP) Select this unit for machining a tapped hole with a counterbore (faced hole). edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.7 PROGRAM CREATION Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. " : Data are not necessary to be set here.” 7-32 . If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP " " " RGH 90° DEPTH CTR-D C-SP FR M M M NOMMAJOR-φ PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CB-DIA CB-DEP CHMF BTM CHP UNo.DIA < PRE-DIA . Remark: Any given value for tapping can be specified as an auto-set value by editing the required text file within the hard disk. 2 SNo.DEPTH < CHMF . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ $ " " " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. Note: The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum tool development. For details refer to “7-6-5 New tapping autosetting scheme. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6.(DIA – PRE-DIA)/2 < CHMF (pre-hole) 9. Tool End mill Development patterns Development is always executed. Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: . Data setting UNIT CBOR-TAP TOOL CTR-DR DRILL DRILL DRILL END MILL CHAMFER CHAMFER CHIP VAC TAP NOM-φ No. A. The development of a maximum of three tools is executed depending on the diameter of the hole. Drill 0. Note: The alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE is given in the following cases: . Tool Centering drill Development patterns Development is always executed. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.CB-DIA < MAJOR-φ .05 ≤ DIA ≤ D8: Development of one tool D8 < DIA ≤ D9: Development of two tools D9 < DIA ≤ D10: Development of three tools Development is not executed in the following cases: Chamfering cutter CHMF (faced hole) = 0 CHMF (threaded hole) = 0 Chip vacuum The development is not executed if the removal of chips is not performed. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. B. The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. Remark: Instead of the chamfering cutter.PROGRAM CREATION 7 CBOR-TAP unit CB-DIA Tool sequence CB-DEP CHMF CHMF TAP-DEP Centering drill PITCH MAJOR-φ Drill (Drill) (Drill) End mill M3P110 (Chamfering cutter) (Chamfering (Chip vacuum) cutter) Tap M3P111 The tools in parentheses ( ) are developed or not developed depending on the particular case.TAP-DEP < CHMF (threaded hole) 7-33 .(CB-DIA – MAJOR-φ)/2 < CHMF (threaded hole) . For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.PRE-DEP < CHMF (faced hole) . a centering drill can be used for chamfering. 2 SNo. For data setting in the tool sequence refer to Subsection 7-6-6. Tool data for chamfering with a centering drill is developed automatically for a hole diameter (DIA) smaller than or equal to the value of parameter D2 (nominal diameter of a centering drill). Drilling cycle is developed at RGH in the drilling tool sequence. After point-machining unit selection. 1 2 UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL CTR-DR NOM-φ $ $ No. Press the [HI SPD DRL. When the hole diameter is larger than the value of parameter D2 (nominal diameter of a centering drill). Before using this function. Note: 7-34 . even for a large hole diameter. DIA DEPTH CHMF UNo.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-6-4 Automatic tool development for cemented carbide drill Subsection 7-6-3 describes automatic tool development for drilling using high speed steel drills. irrespective of the hole depth. USE Automatic tool development for drilling with cemented carbide drills can be used for all the pointmachining units. thoroughly understand its usage. This function allows machining time and programming time to be reduced. Automatic tool development for cemented carbide drills will occur for the tool sequence: DRILLING RGH CBOR RGH BCB REAMING TAPPING BORING BK CBOR CIRC MIL CBOR TAP HI SPD. since mis-use causes tool damage. 2 SNo. UNo. In the following description this function is explained using a drill unit as an example. USE] menu key to make the menu function valid (reverse the display status of the menu item) before selecting a unit. 1 2 UNIT DRILLING TOOL DRILL CHAMFER NOM-φ $ $ No. Automatic tool development for cemented carbide drills is described below. " : Data are not necessary to be set here. The tool sequence represents the case of the maximum development of tools. the following menu is displayed. Only one drill data is developed automatically. chamfering cutter data is developed automatically. HOLE-φ $ $ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP $ " $ " $ " RGH DRIL 90° DEPTH $ CTR-D C-SP FR M M M $ : The data displayed here are automatically determined by automatic tool development function. DRL. HOLE-φ $ $ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP $ $ $ $ $ $ RGH DRIL " DEPTH $ $ C-SP FR M M M DIA DEPTH CHMF 1) 2) 3) Centering drill data for machining a center hole is not developed automatically. Pre-hole diameter (Setting unit: 1/10000 mm) This item denotes the auto-setting values for NOM-φ and HOLE-φ in the last drill tool sequence whose automatic tool development will be conducted for the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit. the new tapping auto-setting scheme is valid only when parameter D95 is set as follows: D95 bit 2 = 0: The text file is invalid and tapping for metric thread is subject to the conventional auto-setting scheme. 7-35 . (New tapping auto-setting scheme) The items corresponding to the new tapping auto-setting scheme are listed below. and the editing procedure are shown below. = 1: The text file is valid and tapping for unified thread is subject to auto-setting based on editing. Text data items . Tapping for metric thread/unified thread In the case of tapping for metric thread/unified thread.<M1> Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) PRE_DIA_2=9000 . The text file format.1-64UN> Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) PRE_DIA_2=18000.<M1.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-6-5 New tapping auto-setting scheme Any given value for tapping with the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit can be specified as an auto-set value by editing the required text file within the hard disk. A.2-56UN> Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) M M ← Pre-hole diameter ← Pre-hole diameter ← Pre-hole diameter ← Pre-hole diameter B.<No. $: New tapping auto-setting scheme applicable —: New tapping auto-setting scheme inapplicable Type of thread to be tapped Metric thread Unified thread Pipe thread (PT) Pipe thread (PF) Pipe thread (PS) Tapping/Counterbore-tapping unit MAJOR-φ — — $ $ $ PITCH — — $ $ $ TAP-DEP — — $ PRE-DIA $ $ $ $ $ PRE-DEP — — $ — $ — $ 1. the text data items.1> Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) M M [UN] PRE_DIA_1=15000.<No. Text file format [M] PRE_DIA_1=8000 . D95 bit 1 = 0: The text file is invalid and tapping for unified thread is subject to the conventional auto-setting scheme. = 1: The text file is valid and tapping for metric thread is subject to auto-setting based on editing. Editing procedure (1) Click the Start button and select “Programs” from the Start menu option.7 mm as the prehole diameter: (1) Open the text file “TapPrDia. particular data settings in parameter D8 to D10 display alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE during automatic development. [M] PRE_DIA_1=7000 .txt” using a commercially available editor. execute “Overwrite & Save.) Note 4: Entered prehole diameter value has its respective last two digits cut away. change the file name to “TapPrDia. (4) Edit the file seeing the above description of “Text file format” and “Text data items” and taking notice of each data unit.” (2) After copying “TapPrDia.” D. (5) After editing the file. Do not edit other items.txt”. For this item always enter “0” as the least two significant digits (that is. proceed as follows to auto-set 0. An example of editing is shown below. the particular combination of data settings in each item may display an asterisk (∗) to indicate that the amount of chamfering cannot be calculated.<M1.7 PROGRAM CREATION C.txt. (For paramter D8 to D10 refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List. Enter data within the following range: Item Pre-hole diameter Keyword PRE_DIA Input unit 1/10000 mm Minimum value 1000 Maximum value 9999000 Enter integral decimal numbers. Then click “Explorer. alarm 419 AUTO TAP PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed when auto-setting is executed. to ensure that the amount of chamfering will be calculated properly.1> M M Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) shown below and then edit data in the 7-36 .org” (an auto-setting model file for metric thread/unified thread tapping) within the “C:\nm64mdata” directory into this directory. In such a case.9”: [If parameter D44 is set to “0”] (Chamfering) = {(Tap outside diameter) + (Thread pitch) × 2 – (Prehole diameter)}/2 [If parameter D44 is set to “1” (M32 scheme)] (Chamfering) = {(Tap outside diameter) – (Prehole diameter)}/2 Note 3: Even when data within the above data range is entered. the last two digits).<M1> PRE_DIA_2=9000 . (2) Move the cursor to the masked item required units.” (6) Close “Explorer. Note 1: If data is not entered correctly. Note 2: Even within the above data range.” (3) Open “TapPrDia. enter data in each item so that the calculation results in the following calculation expressions range from “0” to “99. Example of editing For “M1 tapping”. Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) PRE_DEP_1=183100 .Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) ← ← ← ← ← Tap outside diameter Total threads Thread depth Pre-hole diameter Pre-hole depth ← ← ← Tap outside diameter Total threads Pre-hole diameter PRE_DIA_1=85000 .Diameter(1/10000mm) THREAD_1=280 M M [PS] . the new tapping auto-setting scheme is valid only when parameter D95 is set as follows: D95 bit 0 = 0: The text file is invalid and tapping for pipe thread is subject to the conventional auto-setting scheme. 2. A. The text file format. Tapping for pipe thread In the case of tapping for pipe thread.Diameter(1/10000mm) THREAD_1=280 DEPTH_1=155000 .PT 1/16 DIAMETER_1=77230 .Number of Thread(1/10Thread) .9 may be displayed as its auto-set value.Depth of Prehole(1/10000mm) M M [PF] .Number of Thread(1/10Thread) . Note 3: After text file editing. = 1: The text file is valid and tapping for pipe thread is subject to auto-setting based on editing. the new data is incorporated into the auto-set data immediately. Note 4: Even for inch specifications. auto-set data cannot be modified by merely changing the value of bit 1 or bit 2 in the D95 parameter.Diameter(1/10000mm) THREAD_1=280 DEPTH_1=156000 . and the editing procedure are shown below. the user itself needs to edit and manage the text file. a nominal drill diameter of 0. text file modifications may not be displayed as auto-settings intact. Example: Even if the value of PRE_DIA_1 is changed to 8600. assign data in units of 1/10000 mm to the text file. the text data items.PS1/8 DIAMETER_1=97280 .Depth of Prehole(1/10000mm) M M ← ← ← ← ← Tap outside diameter Total threads Thread depth Pre-hole diameter Pre-hole depth 7-37 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: Since the default settings of the text file data conform to the conventional scheme.PF 1/8 DIAMETER_1=97280 .Depth(1/10000mm) PRE_DIA_1=70000 .Depth(1/10000mm) .Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) PRE_DEP_1=184100 . Note 2: When modifying the metric thread/unified thread tapping auto-set data. Text file format [PT] . Note 5: Since auto-set data having an assigned decimal point and exceeding the minimum allowable number of digits cannot be displayed.Number of Thread(1/10Thread) PRE_DIA_1=88600 . 9”: 7-38 .” (3) Open “Pipescdt. . (PT.7 PROGRAM CREATION B.txt” using a commercially available editor. Text data items . (PT. enter data in each item so that the calculation results in the following calculation expressions range from “0” to “99. * For these items always enter “0” as the least significant digit (that is. change the file name to “Pipescdt.org” (an auto-setting file for pipe thread tapping) within the “C:\nm64mdata” directory into this directory. Note 2: Even within the above data range. and this value is used for auto-setting PITCH of the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit. the particular combination of data settings in each item may display an asterisk (∗) to indicate that the amount of chamfering cannot be calculated. alarm 419 AUTO TAP PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE will be displayed when auto-setting is executed.Total threads (Setting unit: 1/10 threads) This item refers to the total number of threads per inch of a tap. (PT. PF. Note 1: If data is not entered correctly. (PT and PS pipe threads) . Then click “Explorer. Editing procedure (1) Click the Start button and select “Programs” from the Start menu option. An example of editing is shown below. (4) Edit the file seeing the above description of “Text file format” and “Text data items” and taking notice of each data unit.Tap outside diameter (Setting unit: 1/10000 mm) This item denotes the auto-setting values for MAJOR-φ of the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit and HOLE-φ in the tool sequence for the tap. (PT and PS pipe threads) C. and PS pipe threads) . and PS pipe threads) .txt. PF. In such a case. Enter data within the following range: Item Tap outside diameter* Total threads Thread depth* Pre-hole diameter* Pre-hole depth* Keyword DIAMETER THREAD DEPTH PRE_DIA PRE_DEP Input unit 1/10000 mm 1/10 threads 1/10000 mm 1/10000 mm 1/10000 mm Minimum value 10 26 10 100 100 Maximum value 999990 2147483647 9999990 9999000 9900000 Enter integral decimal numbers.Thread depth (Setting unit: 1/10000 mm) This item denotes the auto-setting value for TAP-DEP of the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit. and PS pipe threads) This item also denotes the auto-setting value for ACT-φ of the tap displayed in the TOOL DATA display.Pre-hole diameter (Setting unit: 1/10000 mm) This item denotes the auto-setting values for NOM-φ and HOLE-φ in the last drill tool sequence whose automatic tool development will be conducted for the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit. PF. the last digit). to ensure that the amount of chamfering will be calculated properly.” (2) After copying “Pipescdt.Pre-hole depth (Setting unit: 1/10000 mm) This item denotes the auto-setting value for HOLE-DEP in the last drill tool sequence for which automatic tool development will be conducted for the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit. auto-set data cannot be modified by merely changing the value of bit 0 in the D95 parameter.PROGRAM CREATION 7 [If parameter D44 is set to “0”] (Chamfering) = {(Tap outside diameter) + (Thread pitch) × 2 – (Prehole diameter)}/2 [If parameter D44 is set to “1” (M32 scheme)] (Chamfering) = {(Tap outside diameter) – (Prehole diameter)}/2 Note 3: Even when data within the above data range is entered. Note 3: After text file editing.” (6) Close “Explorer.3 may be displayed as its auto-set value. [PT] . Note 4: Do not edit the text file during processing from tapping/counterbore-tapping program creation to “Tool diameter” registration (ACT-φ) in the TOOL DATA display mode. 11 mm as the thread depth. 7-39 . the new data is incorporated into the auto-set data immediately.77 mm as the tap outside diameter.PT 1/16 DIAMETER_1=77700 THREAD_1=270 DEPTH_1=110000 PRE_DIA_1=62500 PRE_DEP_1=170000 M M . Note 4: Entered prehole diameter and depth values have their respective last two digits cut away.Depth of Prehole(1/10000mm) shown below and then edit data in the Note 1: Since the default settings of the text file data conform to the conventional scheme.txt” and move the cursor to “PT1/16. and 17 mm as the prehole depth: (1) Open the text file “Pipescdt.25 mm as the prehole diameter. Example: Even if the value of PRE_DIA_1 is changed to 62500. Example of editing For “PT1/16”. Do not edit other items. text file modifications may not be displayed as auto-settings intact.Diameter(1/10000mm) . execute “Overwrite & Save.Diameter of Prehole(1/10000mm) . the user itself needs to edit and manage the text file. alarm 416 AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE may be displayed during automatic development of the tool data. 27 as the number of threads. Note 5: Since auto-set data having an assigned decimal point and exceeding the minimum allowable number of digits cannot be displayed.” D. the auto-set MAJOR-φ value of the tapping unit/counterbore-tapping unit in the program and the auto-set ACT-φ value of that tap in the TOOL DATA display mode will mismatch.Number of Thread(1/10Thread) . proceed as follows to auto-set 7. (5) After editing the file.Depth(1/10000mm) . 6. a nominal drill diameter of 6.” (2) Move the cursor to each masked item required units. Otherwise. Note 2: When modifying the pipe thread tapping auto-set data. Nominal diameter of tool: NOM-φ Used to specify the nominal diameter of the tool.9 mm) Note 1: For the end mill and the chamfering cutter. Note 2: The alarm 434 NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE is given if the tool entered has not been previously recorded in the TOOL FILE display. certain data must be set by means of menu keys or numeric keys on the basis of the tool used or the machining procedure. CENTER DRILL DRILL CHAMFER ENDMILL BACKSPOT REAMER CUTTER FACER TAP BORING BAR BACK BOR.BAR Note: The chip vacuum does not exist on the menu. $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ NOM-φ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ HOLE-φ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ " " $ $ $ " " $ $ $ $ $ " " $ $ " $ $ $ " $ " $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ " C-SP FR M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ " $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ M $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ CTR DR (CTR-D) (CHAMF) DRILL CHAMFER END MILL BCK FACE REAMER TAP BOR BAR B-B BAR CHIP VAC Reference item $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 13 $ : Setting possible. Setting range (0 to 999.) 2. if CHAMF is selected for DEPTH. there is no need to set data in PRE-DEP. their nominal diameter is entered by means of numeric keys.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-6-6 Tool sequence data of the point machining unit The tool sequence data are automatically developed by entering the machining unit. Note 4: Different data items must be set for CTR DR. Note 3: If [TAPPING CYCLE] menu item is selected for PRE-DIA. The tool designation can be changed by means of menu keys. 7-40 . List of tool sequence data Table 7-1 TOOL List of tool sequence data No. (It can only be selected in automatic tool development mode. Note 2: For setting of each data item refer to 1 to 13 below. " : Not necessary to be set here. Tool designation: TOOL Used to specify the name of the tool to be used for machining. 1. However. Note 1: CHIP VAC (chip vacuum) is an option. PROGRAM CREATION 7 3. Tool identification Select the identification symbol of tools of the same nominal diameter from the menu. A B C D E F G H HEAVY TOOL >>> In order to designate a heavy tool, first of all press the [HEAVY TOOL] menu key to reverse the menu display and then select the desired menu key in the menu thus displayed. 4. Priority number: No. Assign priority levels in the order of machining. The following menu is displayed. A press of a menu key displays the menu item in reverse mode, allowing a priority number to be assigned. DELAY PRIORITY PRI.No. PRI.No. CHANGE ASSIGN PRI.No. SUB PROG ALL ERAS PROC END (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) The function of menu item (a) to (e) is described below: Menu item (a) (b) Select to conduct subsequent-machining. Select to change the priority number for the tool within the particular process. If the cursor is present at a blank space, assign a new number in a usual manner. Entry of an existing priority number displays alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS. Select to assign a priority number to the tool to be used repeatedly in the particular process. Alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS will be displayed if the assigned priority number has already been set on any other unit line. Selection of this item displays message ALL ERASE (PROC:0, PROG:1)?. Setting 0 will erase the priority numbers preassigned to the tool to be used repeatedly in the process. Setting 1 will erase the priority numbers preassigned to the tool to be used repeatedly in the program. Select to terminate the process with the subprogram unit. Function (c) (d) (e) For details, refer to Chapter 8, “PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL.” 5. Diameter of machining hole: HOLE-φ Used to specify the diameter of the hole to be machined. The data for this article can be modified by means of numeric keys. Note: For the chamfering cutter or the centering cutter, this concerns a value equal to twice the distance from the centerline of the hole to an interference. Enter 999 if there is no interference. See the figure below. Charmfering if there is interference 20 Chamfering if there is no interference Hole-φ = 40 Hole-φ = 999 M3P112 Fig. 7-2 Specification of diameter of machining hole 7-41 7 PROGRAM CREATION 6. Depth of machining hole: HOLE-DEP Used to specify the depth of the hole to be machined. The data for this article can be modified by means of numeric keys. Note 1: For the chamfering cutter or the chamfering cycle of the centering drill, this article is specified as illustrated below. [1] [3] 20 [2] [1] Depth of machining hole = 0 [2] Depth of machining hole = 20 [3] Depth of machining hole = 0 M3P113 Fig. 7-3 Specification of depth of machining hole Note 2: For planetary tapping, the appropriate data for the selected type of tool must be set. Enter the data specified in the corresponding tool catalogue. Enter the catalogued cutting edge length in HOLE-DEP. Cutting edge length D735P0072 7. Diameter of pre-hole: PRE-DIA Used to specify the diameter of the pre-hole for the final hole to be machined. The data for this article can be modified by means of numeric keys. Note 1: In the case of boring, the boring cycle can be selected from the menu. [CYCLE 1] is selected at the time of automatic tool development. CYCLE 1 CYCLE 2 CYCLE 3 For details, refer to Subsection 4-6-7 “Tool path”, “8. Boring tool.” Note 2: For back boring, enter the diameter of the through hole. Note 3: In the case of tapping, the tapping cycle can be selected from the menu. [TAPPING CYCLE] is selected at the time of automatic tool development. TAPPING PECKING CYCLE CYCLE 2 PLANET CYCLE For details, refer to subsection 7-6-7 “Tool path”, “7. Tap.” 7-42 PROGRAM CREATION 7 8. Depth of the pre-hole: PRE-DEP Used to specify the depth of the pre-hole for the final hole to be machined. The data for this article can be modified by means of numeric keys. Note 1: Enter the depth of the through hole in the case of back facing or back boring for this article. Note 2: Enter the depth of the faced hole in the case of boring for this article. Consequently, preset data of 0 is displayed for through hole boring and non-through hole boring. Note 3: Enter the interference depth in the case of chamfering for this article. Note 4: For the end mill, the direction of cutting can be selected from the menu. [CCW CUT] is selected at the time of automatic tool development. CW CUT CCW CUT For the circular tornado cycle and precision rapid boring tornado cycle of the circular milling unit, the direction of cutting can be selected from the following menu: CW CUT CCW CUT For details, refer to Subsection 7-6-7 “Tool path”, “4. End mill.” Note 5: Data setting is not required for TAPPING CYCLE. Set “Cutting depth per peck” for PECKING CYCLE 2. The pecking cycle, however, will not occur if the item is left blank or zero is set. The value of the D50 parameter “Pre-hole machining feed” is set for PLANET CYCLE automatically. 9. Cutting surface roughness: RGH Enter the cutting surface roughness by means of numeric keys or menu keys. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Note 1: For the centering drill, the angle of tool tip can be selected from the menu. In automatic tool development mode, 90° is selected. 90o 118o 60o Note 2: For the drill, the drilling cycle can be selected from the menu. In automatic tool development mode, DRILLING CYCLE and PECKING CYCLE 1 or PECKING CYCLE 2 are determined automatically from the machining depth and the drilling diameter depending upon a parameter setting. These cycles can also be selected from the following menu. DRILLING PECKING PECKING PECKING AUTOPECK CYCLE CYCLE 1 CYCLE 2 CYCLE 3 CYCLE DECREME PECKING CYCLE 1 DECREME PECKING CYCLE 2 DECREME PECKING CYCLE 3 For details, refer to Subsection 7-6-7 “Tool path”, “2. Drill.” Note 3: Enter the duration of the stopping time for the tapping. In automatic tool development mode, FIX is selected. 7-43 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 4: For end mill (Tornado cycle) During automatic tool development, the system sets the same value as for the BTM item of the circular milling unit. If the BTM item value of the circular milling unit is 0, bottom finishing will not occur. Unless the BTM item value is 0, bottom finishing will occur. 10. Cutting depth: DEPTH Used to specify the cutting depth or the amount of chamfering at the time of the machining according to the type to tool: - Cutting depth on Z-axis per pass in the case of drill. First Z-axial cutting depth in the case of drilling (DECREME PECKING CYCLE). Data setting is not required in the case of drilling (AUTOPECK CYCLE). - Amount of chamfering in the case of chamfering cutter. - Cutting depth in the radial direction per pass in the case of end mill. - In the case of boring with a reamer, specify the return speed of the reamer (as feed per minute) by means of menu keys or numeric keys. In tool automatic development mode CUT G01 (cutting feed) is selected. Cutting feed speed is selected by parameter D18. CUT G01 RAPID G00 - Thread pitch in the case of tap. - Cutting depth in the radial direction in the case of boring bar and back boring tool. - In the case of the centering drill, the machining cycle can be selected from the menu. In the tool automatic development mode CTR-DRIL CYCLE (centering drilling cycle) is selected. For details refer to Subsection 7-6-7 “Tool path”, “1. Centering drill.” CTR-DRIL CHAMFER CYCLE CYCLE 11. Circumferential speed: C-SP To auto-set a circumferential speed (m/min) and feedrate (mm/rev), select the corresponding tool material type from the menu. The tool material types in the menu are the same as those which have been set on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display. To register new tool material types, refer to Part 3, Section 8-1, “CUTTING CONDITION W.-MAT./T.-MAT. Display,” of the Operating Manual for the machine. Example of menu display: HASS AUTO CARBIDE AUTO Data can also be set using the numeric keys. The tool data window can be displayed if the cursor is set to C-SP or FR. 7-44 PROGRAM CREATION 7 12. Feedrate: FR Used to specify the feedrate of the tool. Same as the circumferential speed, the entry of data is done by means of menu keys or numeric keys. Note: 13. M-code: M Set the required M-code(s) to be output immediately after mounting the tool onto the spindle in the ATC mode. A maximum of up to three M-codes may be entered. It is also possible, moreover, to select and enter a general M-code out of the menu. The value of the D51 parameter is set automatically for the planetary tapping cycle. 01 OPT. 03 SPNDL 04 SPNDL 05 SPNDL 07 MIST 08 FLOOD 09 OFF STOP FWD REV STOP COOLANT COOLANT COOLANT 50 AIR BLAST 51 THR COOLANT >>> 00 PROG 19 SPNDL 35 T-BRK STOP ORIENT DETECT >>> >>> 7-45 7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-6-7 1. Tool path of the point machining unit Centering drill The cycle of machining with a centering drill is available in the following three types. A Drilling cycle Chamfering cycle B Cycle 1 C Cycle 2 Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed Cutting feed D735P0130 Remark: Two types of chamfering cycles are provided: “Cycle 1”, which only moves the tool in the Z-axial direction during machining, and “Cycle 2”, which moves the tool in X- and Y-axial directions in addition to the Z-axial direction. Which of the two cycles is to be used for actual machining is automatically selected during operation. For details of the tool paths in the two cycles, see Items A to C below. 7-46 PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. Centering drilling cycle Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the intial point above center of hole to be machined Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] Movement to the R-point Pi Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz [3] Machining by cutting feed [5] Movement to the point R or to the initial point [5] R D41 Pz h h [4] Delayed stop at bottom of hole M3P114 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z entered in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Depth of the hole to be calculated by the data HOLE-φ and RGH (angle of tool tip) entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display Diameter of machining hole h= tan ( Note: 2 Angle of cutting tool tip 2 + Tool correction ) The time of delayed stop of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D3. 7-47 Note: 7-48 . The time of delayed stop of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D16.7 PROGRAM CREATION B. Cycle 1 of chamfering cycle Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed [1] Movement to the intial point above center of hole to be machined Pi [2] Movement to the R-point Case of return to the initial point Pi R D41 [3] Chamfering [5] Movement to the point R or to the initial point Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz Pz h [4] Delayed stop at bottom of hole h D735P0131 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Optimum distance to be automatically calculated by the data PRE-DIA and RGH in the tool sequence and also the data CHMF in the point machining unit. h: The optimum distance is automatically calculated by the data PRE-DIA and RGH of the tool sequence and also the data CHMF in the point machining unit. Note : 7-49 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. For the circular milling. clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. Cycle 3. End mill. .Case where the bit 7 of parameter D91 is 1. C. the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D42. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z entered in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following condition is fulfilled. refer to the paragraph dealing with 4. However. Cycle 2 of chamfering cycle Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole to be machined Pi [2] Movement to the R-point Case of return to the initial point Pi R [5] Case of return to the R-point R [3] Chamfering Pz h [4] Circular milling along the hole Movement to the Rpoint or to the initial point h D41 Pz D735P0132 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. F. DRILLING CYCLE B. Auto-pecking cycle of the cutting load detection type (AUTOPECK CYCLE) The cutting load torque of the drill is continually monitored during the auto-pecking cycle of the cutting load detection type. Very deep-hole drilling cycle for gradual depth reduction (DECREME. Drill The cycle of machining with drill is available in the following eight types. PECKING CYCLE 1) In this machining cycle. the cutting depth is decremented with respect to a high deep-hole drilling cycle each time the workpiece is cut. G. PECKING CYCLE 3) In this machining cycle. Deep-hole drilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 2) C. in parameter D46. Rapide feed Cutting feed D734P0012 Remark 1: See Items A to H for the tool paths in each cycle. High speed deep-hole drilling cycle for gradual depth reduction (DECREME. the cutting depth is decremented with respect to a normal deep-hole drilling cycle each time the workpiece is cut. Very deep-hole drilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 3) E. which prevents tool breakage and reduces machining time. the cutting depth is decremented with respect to a very deep-hole drilling cycle each time the workpiece is cut. PECKING CYCLE 2) In this machining cycle. Remark 2: Specify the decremental cutting depth in parameter D45. A. and the minimum cutting depth. Deep-hole drilling cycle for gradual depth reduction (DECREME. High speed deep-hole driilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 1) D. This pecking cycle will be performed only when required. H.7 PROGRAM CREATION 2. 7-50 . PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction hb: Feedrate override distance from the hole bottom to be determined by the data PRE-DIA to be set for the tool sequence f1: f2: Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate to be modified by the data PRE-DEP (feedrate updating rate) f2 = f1 × Feedrate updating rate 7-51 . h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP.Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. Drilling cycle Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the intial point above center of hole to be machined Pi [2] Movement to the R-point Case of return to the initial point Pi Case of return to the R-point R [3] Machining by first cutting feed f1 [6] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point R D41 Pz D41 Pz [6] h hb [4] Machining by second cutting feed f2 [5] h M3P116 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. However. clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41.Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. . . the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42. However. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction q: Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence hb: Feedrate override distance from the hole bottom to be determined by the data PRE-DIA to be set for the tool sequence f1: f2: Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate to be modified by the data PRE-DEP (feedrate updating rate) f2 = f1 × Feedrate updating rate 7-52 . Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled.Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42.7 PROGRAM CREATION B. h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. .Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. . Deep hole drilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 2) Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz Pi [7] D41 Pz q F13 [6] q F13 hb [9] [10] [11] [11] [3] [4] [5] [8] R h [1] Movement to the initial point above the center of hole to be machined [2] Movement to the R-point [3] Machining by first cutting feed f1 [4] Movement to the R-point [5] Movement to the position determined by F13 [6] Machining by first cutting feed f1 [7] Movement to the R-point [8] Movement to the position determined by F13 [9] Repetition of [5] to [7] to bottom of hole [10]Machining by second cutting feed f2 [11]Movement to the R-point or to the initial point M3P117 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit. Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction q: Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence hb: Feedrate override distance from the hole bottom to be determined by the data PRE-DIA to be set for the tool sequence f1: f2: Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate to be modified by the data PRE-DEP (feedrate updating rate) f2 = f1 × Feedrate updating rate Note: The feed speed on the paths [4] and [6] is 9999 mm/min or 999.9 inch/min for millimeter or inch specification respectively. clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP.Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. . the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42. However. High-speed hole drilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 1) Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] Pi R D41 Pz q F12 [5] [4] q F12 [7] [3] Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz [9] [9] h [6] [8] hb [1] Movement to the initial point [5] Machining to the position above center of hole determined by q [2] Movement to the R-point [6] Movement to the position [3] Machining by first cutting of F12 [7] Repetition of [5] and [6] feed f1 down to bottom of hole [4] Movement to the point F12 [8] Machining by second cutting feed f2 [9] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point M3P118 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. . 7-53 . D54 f1 = f2 × 100 Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Pecking retraction speed (= setting of parameter D57) where. if D54 = 0 or if D54 > 100. Very deep-hole drilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 3) Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed After machining Rapid feed Case of return to the initial point [1] Pi D41 R Pz q a q q q q f3 f2 f3 [4] [2] Dwell D56 D55 f2 [5] D55 f3 [6] [7] f2 [8] D55 f2 L f1 [3] Pi Case of return to the R-point R Pz [9] D41 h [10] D55 [11] [13] Dwell D56 f2 [12] [14] [1] Movement to the initial [6] Movement by D55 to [9] Movement by D55 to [12] Repetition of [7] point the retraction position the advanced position and [9] down to [2] Movement to the R-point at feedrate f3 bottom of hole from the previous [3] Machining of “a” at feed [7] Movement by q at machining end position[13] After movement rate f1 and movement by feedrate f2 [10] Movement by q at feed to bottom of q at feedrate f2 [8] After D53 times hole. a: q: f1: f2: f3: 7-54 . R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42.Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. Pi: R: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. then D54 = 100. . if D57 = 0. . However. Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data LENG COMP. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display) Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate (infeed rate) obtained by multiplying “f2” by the “reduction ratio of the starting speed of cutting” specified in parameter D54 where. then D57 = 1000. movement [11] Movement by D55 to D56 rotations retraction position at to the chip ejection the retraction position feed rate f3 position and wait for at feedrate f3 [5] Movement by q at D56 rotations feedrate f2 [14] Movement to the Rpoint or to the initial point D734P0013' The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. wait for rate f2 [4] Movement by D55 to the peckings.7 PROGRAM CREATION D.Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction Cutting area (= data LENG COMP. R after machining is always equaled to the (safety) clearance. ) 7-55 .+ 10 (D: Tool diameter) Note 1: During the “n”th cutting operation.PROGRAM CREATION 7 L: Chip ejection distance calculated from the data ACT-φ (tool diameter: D) and data LENG COMP. machining at feedrate “f1” will occur on the path [3] until (Clearance at R-point + Cutting area “a” ) is reached. then retraction through the D55-specified distance from that position will occur on the path [4]. During machining on the path [3]. Note 2: The feedrate on the path [8] is “G0 speed × D52/100”. retraction through the D55-specified distance does not occur. and the workpiece will be cut to the next cutting position (next cutting depth) on the path [5]. (If the input value of D52 is 0. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display D L = Data LENG COMP. if (q × n) < D55. if the first cutting depth of “q” is greater than or equal to (Clearance at R-point + Cutting area “a” ). then D52 = 100. 7 PROGRAM CREATION E. Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] After machining Rapid feed Case of return to the initial point Pi Pi Case of return to the R-point [7] [5] [8] F13 D41 Pz R [2] R D41 Pz [3] [4] P1 P2 [6] F13 [9] [11] h [1] Movement to the initial point [5] Movement to the position hb [10] of F13 above center of hole [6] Machining by first cutting [2] Movement to the R-point [8] Movement to the position of feed f1 [3] Machining by first cutting F13 [7] Movement to the R-point feed f1 occurs if the cutting load [9] Repetition of [5] to [7] to [4] Movement to the R-point bottom of hole exceeds its reference occurs if the cutting load [10] Machining by second cutting value exceeds its reference value feed f2 [11] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point D735P0073 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses.Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence P1. Auto-pecking cycle of the cutting load detection type (Option) (AUTOPECK CYCLE) The cutting load torque of the drill is continually monitored during the auto-pecking cycle of the cutting load detection type. .Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. . (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction hb: Feedrate override distance from the hole bottom to be determined by the data PRE-DIA to be set for the tool sequence f1: f2: Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate to be modified by the data PRE-DEP (feedrate updating rate) f2 = f1 × Feedrate updating rate 7-56 . clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. This pecking cycle will be performed only if the cutting load exceeds its reference value. h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. P2: The positions where autonomous pecking will occur if the cutting load exceeds its reference value R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. However. Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42. MONITOR display mode.Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction hb: Feedrate override distance from the hole bottom to be determined by the data PRE-DIA to be set for the tool sequence q1 : qi: Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence (first cutting depth) i-th cutting depth The i-th cutting depth qi is calculated by the value of the D45 parameter for drilling gradual reduction depth and of the D46 parameter for minimum drilling depth as follows. However. F. Gradual depth reduction cycle (DECREME PECKING CYCLE 2) Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed [1] Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz h After machining Pi R Pz q1 D41 [3] [4] F13 qi [6] F13 hb [1] Movement to the initial point [5] Movement to the position above the center of hole determined by F13 [2] Movement to the R-point [6] Machining by first cutting [3] Machining by first cutting feed f1 feed f1 [7] Movement to the R-point [4] Movement to the R-point [9] [10] [11] [5] [7] [8] [8] Movement to the position determined by F13 [9] Repetition of [5] and [7] to bottom of hole [10] Machining by second cutting feed f2 [11]Movement to the R-point or to the initial point D735P0074 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. 7-57 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note: Cutting load reference value (pecking threshold value) must be set using the DRILL MONITOR function of the MACHIN. Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. . . h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit.7 PROGRAM CREATION q1 1st cut D: Drilling depth q1: 1st cutting depth qi: i-th cutting depth qi = q1 – D45 × (i – 1) (qi ≥ D46) qi = D46 (qi < D46) D qi i-th cut D735P0075 f1: f2: Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate to be modified by the data PRE-DEP (feedrate updating rate) f2 = f1 × Feedrate updating rate G. Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence 7-58 . Rapid deep-hole machining cycle for gradual depth reduction (DECREME PECKING CYCLE 1) Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed After machining Rapid feed Case of return to the initial point Pi Case of return to the R-point [9] D41 Pz [1] Pi [2] R D41 Pz q1 [4] F12 [5] qi [6] F12 [8] [1] Movement to the initial point above [5] Machining up to the position determined by qi the center of hole [6] Movement to the position [2] Movement to the R-point determined by F12 [3] Machining by first cutting feed f1 [4] Movement to the position determined by F12 hb [7] Repetition of [5] and [6] to bottom of hole [8] Machining by second cutting feed f2 [7] [3] R h [9] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point D735P0076 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. q1 1st cut D: Drilling depth q1: 1st cutting depth qi: ith cutting depth qi = q1 – D45 × (i – 1) (qi ≥ D46) qi = D46 (qi < D46) D qi i-th cut D735P0075 hb: Feedrate override distance from the hole bottom to be determined by the data PRE-DIA to be set for the tool sequence f1: f2: Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Feedrate to be modified by the data PRE-DEP (feedrate updating rate) f2 = f1 × Feedrate updating rate Note: The feed speed on the paths [4] and [6] is 9999 mm/min or 999.Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction q1 : qi: Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence (first cutting depth) i-th cutting depth The i-th cutting depth q1 is calculated by the value of the D45 parameter for drilling gradual reduction depth and of the D46 parameter for minimum drilling depth as follows. 7-59 . clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. .Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. However.9 inch/min for milimeter or inch specification respectively. h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. .PROGRAM CREATION 7 R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42. Case where the respective tool sequence contains a centering drill (D1) or a drill (D42) as pre-machining tool. However. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display) a: 7-60 . Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data LENG COMP. wait for [4] Movement by D55 to the peckings. . R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1 or D42. Very deep-hole drilling cycle for gradual depth reduction (DECREME PECKING CYCLE 3) Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] After machining Rapid feed Case of return to the initial point [2] Pi Case of return to the R-point R Pz f2 [5] D55 f3 [6] [7] [8] f2 D55 f2[10] D55 f2 [12] [14] [9] D41 Pi D41 R Pz q1 a q2 q3 q4 q5 f2 f1 [3] D55 f3 [4] Dwell D56 L h f3 [11] [13] Dwell D56 [14] Movement to the Rpoint or to the initial point [1] Movement to the initial [6] Movement by D55 to [9] Movement by D55 to [12] Repetition of [7] point the retraction position the advanced position and [9] down to [2] Movement to the R-point at feedrate f3 from the previous bottom of hole [3] Machining of “a” at feed [7] Movement by q at machining end position [13] After movement rate f1 and movement by feedrate f2 [10] Movement by q at to bottom of q at feedrate f2 [8] After D53 times feedrate f2 hole. movement [11] Movement by D55 to D56 rotations retraction position at to the chip ejection the retraction position feedrate f3 position and wait for at feedrate f3 [5] Movement by q at D56 rotations feedrate f2 D734P0013' The bold codes represent the parameter addresses.Case where the bit 6 of parameter D91 is 1. . R after machining is always equaled to the (safety) clearance. Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction Cutting area (= data LENG COMP. Pi: R: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit.7 PROGRAM CREATION H. 04 inches).+ 10 (D: Tool diameter) f2: f3: L: Note 1: During the “n”th cutting operation. D54 f1 = f2 × 100 Feedrate (FR) to be set for the tool sequence Pecking retraction speed (= setting of parameter D57) where. then retraction through the D55-specified distance from that position will occur on the path [4]. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display D L = Data LENG COMP.PROGRAM CREATION 7 q1: Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence qi: i-th cutting depth The i-th cutting depth q1 is calculated by the value of the D45 parameter for drilling gradual reduction depth and of the D46 parameter for minimum drilling depth as follows. if (q × n) < D55. the minimum allowable cutting depth is 1 mm (or in inch units. Note 2: The feedrate on the path [8] is “G0 speed × D52/100”. During machining on the path [3]. 0. Note: If the setting of parameter D46 is 0 (zero). (If the input value of D52 is 0. Chip ejection distance calculated from the data ACT-φ (tool diameter: D) and data LENG COMP.) 7-61 . machining at feedrate “f1” will occur on the path [3] until (Clearance at R-point + Cutting area “a” ) is reached. if D57 = 0. if the first cutting depth of “q” is greater than or equal to (Clearance at R-point + Cutting area “a” ). and the workpiece will be cut to the next cutting position (next cutting depth) on the path [5]. q1 1st cut D: Drilling depth q1: 1st cutting depth qi: ith cutting depth qi = q1 – D45 × (i – 1) (qi ≥ D46) qi = D46 (qi < D46) D qi i-th cut D735P0075 f1: Feedrate (infeed rate) obtained by multiplying “f2” by the “reduction ratio of the starting speed of cutting” specified in parameter D54 where. then D52 = 100. retraction through the D55-specified distance does not occur. then D57 = 1000. then D54 = 100. if D54 = 0 or if D54 > 100. Cycle 1 B. A. 7-4 Cycle 1 and cycle 2 Feedrates that are automatically determined vary according to the machining cycle selected. The feedrate in cycle 1 is the feedrate calculated by multiplying the automatically determined feed rate for cycle 2 by the setting of the parameter D60 (%). Parameter D60: Automatic setting ratio of axial cutting feed rate during chamfering in the point machining The following shows the tool path of the chamfering cutter in each cycle. Cycle 2 NM210-00544 Fig. Chamfering cutter Chamfering is classified into two types: Chamfering performed by the tool which only moves on the Z-axis (Cycle 1) and chamfering performed by the tool which moves on the X-. The feed rate in cycle 1 is displayed yellow. The cycle used is selected automatically. Y -and Z-axes (Cycle 2). 7-62 .7 PROGRAM CREATION 3. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Optimum distance to be automatically calculated by the data HOLE-φ and HOLE-DEP in the tool sequence and also the data ANG on the TOOL FILE display The time of delayed stop of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D16. Note: 7-63 . Cycle 1 Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi [2] Movement to the point R Case of return to the initial point Pi Case of return to the point R R D41 Pz h [4] Delayed stop at bottom of hole [5] Movement to the point R or to the initial point R D41 Pz h [3] Chamfering [5] M3P119 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses.PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. Cycle 3. h: The optimum distance is automatically calculated by the data HOLE-φ and HOLE-DEP of the tool sequence and also the data ANG on the TOOL FILE display. .Case where the bit 7 of parameter D91 is 1. End mill. refer to the paragraph dealing with 4. Note 1: The time of delayed stop of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D16.7 PROGRAM CREATION B. C. Cycle 2 Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole to be machined Pi [2] Movement to the point R Case of return to the point R R [5] [3] Chamfering Pz h [4] Circle milling along the hole Movement to the point R or to the initial point [5] D41 Case of return to the initial point Pi R Pz h M3P120 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. However. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z entered in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following condition is fulfilled. the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D42. 7-64 . clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. Note 2: For the circular milling. . A......Diameter of machining hole = Tool diameter (Cycle 1) . For units other than those mentioned above .“Diameter of machining hole > Tool diameter” and “Diameter of pre-hole > (Tool diameter + Safety clearance)” (Cycle 2) ..PROGRAM CREATION 7 4... For RGH CBOR and CBOR-TAP units .“Diameter of machining hole > Nominal diameter” and “Diameter of pre-hole > (Tool diameter + Safety clearance)” (Cycle 2) ... End mill According to the set value in item TORNA. TORNA.... Cycle 2 C...... 1....circular milling cycle 1 ..... Cycle 1 B.. the pre-hole diameter and the nominal diameter entered in the tool sequence..“Diameter of machining hole > Nominal diameter” and “Diameter of pre-hole ≤ (Tool diameter + Safety clearance)” (Cycle 3) 2. the appropriate cycle is automatically selected. 7-5 Circular milling cycles 1....: 0 .circular tornado milling cycle For tool path of each machining pattern refer to the relevant description below. 2 and 3 The following shows the tool path of the end mill in each cycle.... At the time of operation. 7-65 . <In case of circular milling cycle> End milling is divided into the following three types according to the machining hole diameter. Cycle 3 NM210-00545 Fig.. one of the following two machining patterns is selected.Diameter of machining hole = Nominal diameter (Cycle 1) .“Diameter of machining hole > Tool diameter” and “Diameter of pre-hole ≤ (Tool diameter + Safety clearance)” (Cycle 3) Note: The safety clearance is determined by the parameter D23. Cycle 1 Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of machining hole Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] Movement to the point R Case of return to the point R Pi R D41 Pz [3] Machining to bottom of hole Movement to the point [5] R or to the initial point R [5] D41 Pz h h [4] Delayed stop at bottom of hole M3P121 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses.7 PROGRAM CREATION A. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Depth of machining hole (HOLE-DEP) to be entered in the tool sequence The time of delayed stop of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D19. Note: 7-66 . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: hf: q: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Optimum distance to be automatically calculated by the data HOLE-φ and HOLE-DEP in the tool sequence and also the data ANG on the TOOL FILE display Bottom finishing allowance to be determined by the data RGH entered in the tool sequence and also by the parameter D21 Cutting depth on Z per pass to be determined by: h – hf h – hf ( Whole of )+1 cmx (cmx = Data DEPTH entered in TOOL FILE display) Note: For the circular milling.PROGRAM CREATION 7 B. see Cycle 3 below. Cycle 2 Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of machining hole Case of return to the initial point Pi Pi [2] Movement to the R-point R D41 Pz q Circular milling (Repetition of circular milling to bottom of the hole) [5] Movement to the point R or to the initial point [3] Movement to the machining position Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz q h q [4] [5] h hf Circular milling M3P122 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. 7-67 . Cycle 3 Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of machining hole Case of return to the initial point Pi Pi [2] Movement to the R-point R D41 Pz q [3] Movement to the machining position Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz q h q [4] Circular milling (Repetition of circular milling to bottom of the hole) [5] [5] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point h hf Circular milling M3P123 Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: hf: q: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Optimum distance to be automatically calculated by the data HOLE-φ and HOLE-DEP in the tool sequence and also the data ANG on the TOOL FILE display Bottom finishing allowance to be determined by the data RGH entered in the tool sequence and also by the parameter D21 Cutting depth on Z per pass to be determined by: h – hf h – hf ( Whole of )+1 cmx (cmx = Data DEPTH entered in TOOL FILE display) Note: The feed speed on the tool paths [3] and [4] is equaled to the parameter E17. if bit 0 of parameter D92 is set at 1. 7-68 .7 PROGRAM CREATION C. In the Cycle 3.The cutting direction (CW or CCW) can be designated in the program.A Circular milling . Start Cutting (Hole dia.) depth < 2 No Yes Circular milling . 7-69 . 7-7 Circular milling-A . Cutting feed End mill [3] [1] [2] Cutting depth Pre-hole diameter Machining hole diameter M3P125 Fig.The movement is done in the order [1]→[2]→[3].PROGRAM CREATION 7 Circular milling Circular milling is automatically selected according to the diameter of the machining hole. Circular milling-A The movement of circular milling-A is as shown below. . the diameter of the pre-hole and the cutting depth entered in the tool sequence of the program. – Pre-hole dia. 7-6 Circular milling Note: 1.The movement of [1] starts with the end point of the preceding circular milling-A.B Diameter of pre-hole after machining = Diameter of pre-hole + (2 × amount of cutting depth) End M3P124 Fig. the pre-hole diameter (data entered in tool sequence) is equal to the tool diameter (data entered in the TOOL DATA display). . The movement is done in the order [1]→[2]→[3]→[4]→[5]. 7-8 Circular milling-B . 7-70 .Case of shortening (rapid access) in chamfering is shown above .The cutting direction (CW or CCW) can be designated in the program. the movement of [2] and [5] is done by the following shortened (rapid access) method. Rapid feed Cutting feed [3] End mill [4] [1] [2] [5] [6] Cutting depth Diameter of pre-hole Diameter of machining hole M3P127 Fig.7 PROGRAM CREATION 2. 7-9 Circular milling-B (case of shortening in chamfering) .The cutting direction is set to the left. Circular milling-B The movement of circular milling-B is as shown below.The movement is done in the order [1]→[2]→[3]→[4]→[5]→[6].The movement of [1] starts with the end point of the preceding circular milling-A. Cutting feed End mill [5] [4] [2] [1] [3] Cutting depth Pre-hole diameter Machining hole diameter M3P126 Fig. . when bit 4 (bit 5 in the case of chamfering) of parameter D91 is 1. . Note: However. . PITCH 1 to be entered in the CIRC MIL unit. [4] Helical milling (repetition of herical milling to bottom of the hole) Pi Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz [5] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point h q h q q Helical milling D735P0066 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. 7-71 . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: q: s: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Optimum distance to be automatically calculated by the data HOLE-φ and HOLE-DEP in the tool sequence and also the data ANG on the TOOL FILE display PITCH 2 to be entered in the CIRC MIL unit.PROGRAM CREATION 7 <In case of circular tornado milling cycle> D735P0065 Machining After machining Rapid feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of machining hole Cutting feed Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] Movement to the R-point R D41 Pz s s [3] After movement to the machining position helical milling is performed. 2. 7-10. The bottom of the hole does not undergo arc interpolation.7 PROGRAM CREATION Circular milling 1. 7-11. the tool moves to the center of the hole by returning through a quarter pitch in the axial direction and then moves in rapid feed rate to its initial point or to point R in the axial direction. Next. 7-11 Circular helical processing (without bottom finishing) After helical interpolation down to the bottom of the hole. the tool moves to the center of the hole and then moves in the rapid feed rate to its initial point or to point R in the axial direction. 7-72 . Without bottom finishing The operation of the machine when it is not programmed to perform bottom finishing operations is shown in the Fig. 7-10 Circular helical processing (with bottom finishing) After helical interpolation down to the bottom of the hole. Rapid feed Cutting feed Returning through a quarter pitch in the axial direction D735P0068 Fig. Rapid feed Cutting feed D735P0067 Fig. one entire circumference of arc interpolation occurs. With bottom finishing The operation of the machine when it is programmed to perform bottom finishing operations is shown in Fig. Pi: Pz1: Pz2: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z entered in the common unit Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence Position at a distance of hs from Pz1 R1. Note 2: Feed speed on the tool path [3] and [9] is set by the parameter D5. is always determined by D41. Note 3: The rotation of the spindle to the right is performed by M03 entered in the tool sequence.” R1-position after machining. h: hs: Depth of hole (HOLE-DEP) to be entered in tool sequence Distance equal to the sum of the depth of pre-hole entered in the tool sequence and the tool data COMP. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display Note 1: The time of delayed stop of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D40. R2: Safety clearance above the points Pz1. Pz2 respectively (parameter D41) Note: As for R1 (in Step [2]). 7-73 . whilst the rotation to the left is performed by M04. the setting of parameter D1 becomes valid in case Bit 1 of parameter D92 is set to “1.PROGRAM CREATION 7 5. however. Back facing tool Before machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above the center of hole Pi Machining After machining Cutting feed Cutting feed The cutting edge is in the retracted state Initial point [2] Movement to the R-point 1 R-point 1 D41 Machining surface Z hs h [3] Movement to the R-point 2 R1 [6] Delayed stop at bottom of hole [9] Movement to the initial point Pz1 Pz2 Clearance R-point 2 [4] Rotation of the spindle to the right by M03 [5] Machining to h [7] Movement to the Rpoint 2 [8] Rotation of the spindle to the left by M04 R2 M3P128 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. When [CUT G01] menu key is pressed . . ...... h: Distance equal to the sum of the depth of hole (HOLE-DEP) entered in the tool sequence and the data COMP... Rapid feed When the value is entered in the article DEPTH .......7 PROGRAM CREATION 6................ Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled.... the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1......Case where the bit 2 of parameter D92 is 1......Case where the respective tool sequence contains a chamfering cutter as premachining tool.. However................ Reamer Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi [2] Movement to the R-point R D41 Pz h [3] Boring with reamer Return to the initial point Pi [5] Movement to the initial point R [4] Movement to the R-point Pz M3P129 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display The feed speed of the tool path [4] is determined as follows by the data DEPTH in the tool sequence.. Parameter D18 When [RAPID G00] menu key is pressed ... Value entered (/min) Note: 7-74 ....... clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41...... PROGRAM CREATION 7 7. Tap The cycle of machining with tap is available in the following three types. A. TAPPING CYCLE B. PECKING CYCLE 2 Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed Cutting feed C. PLANET CYCLE Rapid feed Cutting feed Rapid feed Cutting feed Case without movement for chip evacuation Case with movement for chip evacuation D735P0081 See Items A to C for the tool paths in each cycle. 7-75 7 PROGRAM CREATION A. Tapping cycle (TAPPING CYCLE) Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi [2] Movement to the R-point R Execution of M03 after delayed stop [7] Pi [8] Movement to the initial point [8] Movement to the R-point R D31 [3] Movement to the position ha D41 Pz h D41 [6] Movement to the position D31 with rotation of spindle to the left by M04 Pz h ha [4] Execution of M04 after delayed stop [5] M3P130 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1. However, clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. - Case where the bit 3 of parameter D92 is 1. - Case where the respective tool sequence contains a chamfering cutter as premachining tool. h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction ha: Distance to be determined by (A – D32) × Pt A ............. D30 when using metric and unified screws, D43 when using pipe screws Pt ............ Pitch entered in the machining unit Note 1: The entry of 1 in the bit 0 to 2 of parameter D91 causes the following delayed stop. Bit 0 ................. Delayed stop before execution of M04 at bottom of hole [4] Bit 1 ................. Delayed stop after execution of M04 at bottom of hole [5] Bit 2 ................. Delayed stop before execution of M03 after return [7] Moreover, the delayed stop is entered in the article RGH in the tool sequence. If FIX is selected, it will be determined by the parameter D22. Note 2: When M04 is entered in the tool sequence, inversed tapping will be executed. 7-76 PROGRAM CREATION 7 B. Deep hole drilling cycle (PECKING CYCLE 2) Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] After machining Cutting feed Case of return to the initial point [2] Pi R Pz q h q [1] Movement to the initial point above the center of [5] Machining to the cutting ha hole to be machined depth per peck from [2] Movement to the R-point machining surface [3] Machining to the cutting [6] Movement to the R-point [7] Repetition of [5] to [6] depth per peck by M04 after delayed stop to the position ha [4] Movement to the R-point by M04 after delayed stop D41 [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Pi Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz [8] h [8] Movement to the R-point by M04 after delayed stop M3P117 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit. Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Note: When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the clearance R before machining will be equaled to the parameter D1. However, clearance R after machining is always equaled to the parameter D41. - Case where the bit 3 of parameter D92 is 1. - Case where the respective tool sequence contains a chamfering cutter as premachining tool. h: Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence and also the data COMP. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display h = Depth of machining hole + Tool correction ha: Distance to be determined by (A – D32) × Pt A ............. D30 when using metric and unified screws, D43 when using pipe screws Pt ............ Pitch entered in the machining unit q: Cutting depth (DEPTH) to be set for the tool sequence Note 1: The entry of 1 in the bit 0 to 2 of parameter D91 causes the following delayed stop. Bit 0 ................. Delayed stop before execution of M04 at bottom of hole [4] Bit 1 ................. Delayed stop after execution of M04 at bottom of hole [5] Bit 2 ................. Delayed stop before execution of M03 after return [7] Moreover, the delayed stop is entered in the article RGH in the tool sequence. If FIX is selected, it will be determined by the parameter D22. Note 2: When M04 is entered in the tool sequence, inversed tapping will be executed. 7-77 7 PROGRAM CREATION C. Planetary tapping (PLANET CYCLE) The planetary tapping cycle allows three types of machining (pre-hole machining, chamfering, and female threading) with one tool. A machining pattern is selected by the parameter D92. - Set either 0 or 1 in the bit 6. 0 1 D82 = 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit 6 No movement for chip evacuation before threading Movement for chip evacuation before threading D735P0084 7-78 PROGRAM CREATION 7 Case without movement for chip evacuation Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed Case of return to the initial point Pi [2] R Pi Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz D41 Pz [3] [8] h [4] [7] [6] [9] h [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole [2] Movement to the R-point [3] Machining of (Hole depth – chamfering stroke) [5] [4] Slow machining down [6] Approach by G03-based to hole bottom for helical cutting in the Z-axial chamfering direction [5] Relief in the Z-axial [7] G03-based threading direction [8] Return to hole center [9] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point D735P0082 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence Note 1: The inversed tapping cannot be executed. Note 2: The feed rate for chamfering on tool path [4] is calculated as follows: Chamfering feed = Pre-hole machining feed × Chamfering feed override (parameter D48)/100 Note 3: The amount of return from hole bottom on tool path [5] is calculated as follows: Amount of return = Tapping pitch × Number of thread (parameter D49)/10 Note 4: The tool diameter in the tool data is modified for tapping diameter correction (fineadjustment). Note 5: The depth of the section tapped by the actual machining becomes smaller than that of the thread set in the program. 7-79 7 PROGRAM CREATION Case with movement for chip evacuation Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Pi [2] R Case of return to the initial point Pi Case of return to the R-point R D41 Pz After machining Rapid feed D41 Pz [3] [5] [6] [9] h [8] [4] [7] [10] h [5] Movement to the R[1] Movement to the initial point point for chip above center of hole evacuation [2] Movement to the R-point [6] Movement to the [3] Machining of (Hole depth – tapping start position chamfering stroke) [4] Slow machining down to hole bottom for chamfering [7] Approach by G03-based helical cutting in the Zaxial direction [8] G03-based threading [9] Return to hole center [10] Movement to the R-point or to the initial point D735P0085 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) Hole depth to be calculated by the data HOLE-DEP entered in the tool sequence Note 1: The inversed tapping cannot be executed. Note 2: The feed rate for chamfering on tool path [4] is calculated as follows: Chamfering feed = Pre-hole machining feed × Chamfering feed override (parameter D48)/100 Note 3: The distance from hole bottom to the tapping start position on tool path [6] is calculated as follows: Distance from hole bottom to the tapping start position = Tapping pitch × Number of thread (parameter D49)/10 Note 4: The tool diameter in the tool data is modified for tapping diameter correction (fineadjustment). Note 5: The depth of the section tapped by the actual machining becomes smaller than that of the thread set in the program. 7-80 PROGRAM CREATION 7 8. Boring tool The path of the boring tool is classified in 9 types on the basis of the contents of the program, as shown in the figure below. In order to simplify the description, three pattern cycles are described: Cycle 1—Roughness 0, Cycle 2—Roughness 1, and Cycle 3—Roughness 2 to 9. Table 7-2 Tool path of the boring tool Run-off on Z-axis Yes/No Delayed stop Yes/No A Run-off distance Cycle 1 2 3 Roughness 0 No No M19 D25 B Run-off distance No Yes Roughness 1 M19 D24 D25 D24 D24 C Run-off distance Yes Yes Roughness 2-9 D28 M19 D25 D26 D28 D28 D24 D26 D24 Rapid feed Cutting feed D24 D26 M3P131 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. In the following, M19, D24, D25, D26 and D28 shown on the figure above, are explained. M19: M-code to stop the spindle in the pre-determined position (Orientation of spindle) D24: Parameter to determine delayed stop time. The machining is done in excess of the delayed stop time which serves to improve the precision of the hole machining. 7-81 Workpiece to be machined Tool Oriented position Run-off distance of XY plane M3P132 Fig. Cycle 2—Roughness 1. three pattern cycles are described: Cycle 1—Roughness 0. This is used for the finish machining because any damage to the machining surface can be prevented at the time of the return of the tool. and Cycle 3—Roughness 2 to 9. In order to simplify the description. The feed speed is reduced to 70% of the programmed value. which allows to improve the machining precision.7 PROGRAM CREATION D25: Parameter to determine the run-off distance on the X-Y plane. D28: Parameter to determine the finishing allowance at the bottom of the hole. The spindle is oriented at the bottom of the hole. “General precautions concerning the path of the boring tool” is also given at the end of the description of cycles. 7-12 Run-off distance on the X-Y plane D26: Parameter to determine the run-off distance on the Z-axis. 7-82 . The feed speed is reduced to 70% of the programmed value. The tool moves to the initial point or to point R after clearance of the machining surface. which allows to improve the machining precision. (tool correction) in the TOOL DATA display Note 1: Direction of run-off distance on the XY plane (bit 3 and bit 4 of parameter I14) Note 2: When M04 is entered in the tool sequence. B. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of machining surfce to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance on Z-axis (parameter D41) Distance equal to the sum of the depth of hole (HOLE-DEP) entered in the tool sequence and the data COMP. Note: 7-83 . the spindle rotates to the right. Cycle 1 with roughness 0 Machining After machining Movement to the point of approach and execution of M03 (Rotation of the spindle to the right) Pi R [5] Movement to the initial point or to the R-point Stop of the spindle by M19 (Oriented stop of spindle) and movement to the position specified by parameter D25. Pz [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi R Pz [2] Movement to the R-point D41 M03 D25 [6] [6] [3] Machining to bottom of hole h M19 [5] Rapid feed Cutting feed D25 M3P133 [4] The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z entered in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of machining surfce to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance on Z-axis (parameter D41) Distance equal to the sum of the depth of hole (HOLE-DEP) entered in the tool sequence and the data COMP. (tool correction) in the TOOL DATA display The delayed stop time of the feed on Z-axis at the bottom of the hole is set by the parameter D24.PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. Cycle 2 with roughness 1 Machining After machining [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi R Pz [2] Movement to the R-point D41 [3] Machining to bottom of hole [4] Delayed stop Pi R Pz [5] h Movement to the initial point or to the R-point [5] Rapid feed Cutting feed M3P134 D24 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. 7-84 . (tool correction) in the TOOL DATA display Note 1: The feed speed [4] and [5] is 70% on the programmed value. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of machining surfce to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance on Z-axis (parameter D41) Distance equal to the sum of the depth of hole (HOLE-DEP) entered in the tool sequence and the data COMP. Cycle 3 with roughness 2 to 9 Machining After machining Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi [2] Movement to the R-point R Clearance Pz [3] Machining to the position specified by parameter D28 [4] Movement to the R-point Movement to the position specified by parameter D26 [6] [7] Movement to the initial point Pi R Pz h D28 Delayed stop D24 [5] D26 Machining to bottom of hole M3P135 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Note 3: The delayed stop time of the feed on Z-axis at bottom of hole is set by the parameter D24.7 PROGRAM CREATION C. Note 2: The feed speed [6] is set by the parameter D18. ...) entered in the tool sequence and the data COMP. The direction of movement [4] and [10] is opposite to that of [2]......... Back boring tool Before machining Machining After machining [1] Pi R M19 Movement to the initial point above center of hole........ then execution of M19 Movement of ds............ R2: h: hs: ds: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in common unit Z coordinate of machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence Safety clearance on Z-axis (parameter D41) Distance equal to the sum of the depth of hole (HOLE-DEP.... Note 2: The delayed stop time of the feed on Z-axis is set by the parameter D40. [4] then execution of M03 ds M03 D41 R2 D41 [5] Machining to bottom of hole Movement of ds Rapid feed Cutting feed M3P136 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. then execution of M19 ds Movement to the position D26. (tool correction) on the TOOL DATA display Depth of pre-hole (PRE-DEP) to be entered in the tool sequence Run-off distance on the XY plane determined by d1 – d 2 2 + D33 d1 .... respectively.. Movement on the XY plane entered in the parameter Note 1: The direction of movement [2] and [7] are determined by the data set in bit 3 and bit 4 of parameter I14.. then execution of M03 [10] Pi M03 R Movement of ds [2] Delayed stop Pz [3] hs h [6] [7] D26 hs Movement to the initial point [9] D41 Pz D26 [8] Movement of ds............. 7-85 ....... Pi: Pz: R...PROGRAM CREATION 7 9.... Diameter of hole (HOLE-φ) entered in the tool sequence d2 . Diameter of pre-hole (PRE-DEP) entered in the tool sequence D33 ... ) entered in the tool sequence and the data COMP.7 PROGRAM CREATION General precautions concerning the path of the boring tool Stepped hole boring and non-stepped hole boring differ in the path of the tool to the machining starting point. 7-86 . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z entered in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: h: Safety clearance on Z-axis (parameter D41) Distance equal to the sum of the depth of hole (HOLE-DEP. Case of non-stepping boring Case of stepped boring [1] [1] Movement to the initial point Z above center of hole Initial point [2] Movement to the R-point [2] Movement to the clearance position and hs R D41 hs h h Machining [3] D41 Pz Pi R-point Machining surface [3] Machining Rapid feed Cutting feed M3P137 The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. (tool correction) in the TOOL DATA display hs: Depth of pre-hole (PRE-DEP) to be entered in the tool sequence Note: Cutting start point is moved from point R to a distance specified in hs (depth of prehole). Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pz: Z coordinate of the machining surface to be entered in the shape sequence R: Safety clearance above the point Pz (parameter D41) The delayed stop time of the feed on Z-axis is set by the parameter D29.PROGRAM CREATION 7 10. Chip vacuuming tool (option) Movement 1 Movement 2 [1] Movement to the initial point above center of hole Pi [2] Movement to the point R R [3] Delayed stop D41 Pz [4] Movement to the initial point Return to the initial point Pi R Pz Rapid feed The bold codes represent the parameter addresses. Note: 7-87 . 2. CHORD M3P139 The setting of each shape refer to A to G of Item 3. POINT B.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-6-8 Shape sequence of the point machining unit Once the entering of the data of the machining unit and of the tool sequence is completed. 1. 7-88 . Types of point machining shape As shown below 7 types of the point machining shapes are available. A. Common data (Z and R) The shape sequence of the point machining has the following common data: Z and R. CIRCLE F. ARC G. GRID E. LINE C. SQUARE D. FIG 1 PTN Z A X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N P Q R B The following shows the setting of common data Z and R. the shape sequence is entered. Workpiece zero point Machining surface Machining surface (–)10 (+)10 Machining surface Z=0 Z = –10 Z = 10 M3P140 Fig. then movement to the position of the hole to be drilled next. Return to point R. [1] [6] [2] [5] Initial point [3] [4] Workpiece clamping device Initial point [3] [4] [2] [1] Point R [5] Workpiece clamping device Hole to be drilled (1) Hole to be drilled (2) Hole to be drilled (1) Hole to be drilled (2) Rapid feed Cutting feed M3P141 7-89 . Return to initial point. Z (Z coordinate of the machining surface) Coordinate Z of the machining surface is understood to mean the distance on the Z-axis from the workpiece zero point to the machining surface. R (return level) After machining. 7-13 Coordinate Z of the machining surface B.PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. two types of return are possible. then movement to the position of the hole to be drilled next. The relation between the machining surface and the article Z is as shown below. taking the drawing below as an example. 7-14 Drawing for entry of shape sequence data 7-90 . Entry of shape sequence data The following explains the data entry method of the point machining shape sequence for each type of shape. 400 200 2 –φ8 CHORD 4 –φ8 ARC 20 45° R50 R50 45° 30° R50 45° 4 –φ8 CIRCLE 20 30 300 120 100 50 40 100 50 40 60° 5 –φ9 LINE 100 50 φ8 POINT 50 100 300 60° 15° 120 60° 15° 12 –φ8 GRID 120 10 –φ8 SQUARE Z coordinate of the machining surface = 0 M3P142 Fig.7 PROGRAM CREATION 3. .. the following menu will be displayed............... then on X-axis ............................ Specify the Y coordinate of the first hole to be drilled............................... Specify the X coordinate of the first hole to be drilled........................ R Initial point ................................ Specify the position to which the tool returns after machining............................................... Only positioning without machining ......... Example of setting 0 5 5 INPUT 0 0 INPUT INPUT Simultaneous movement on X........... POINT Start point 50 φ8 POINT Workpiece zero point 50 M3P143 (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished................ (b) Data setting FIG 1 PTN PT Z 0..... Movement on X-axis.......... INPUT 7-91 ......................................... then on Y-axis ..... Y 50........................................ X 50....... 0 1 2 INPUT P INPUT INPUT Specify if the machining at the start point is executed or not................................................................ AN1 ! AN2 ! T1 ! T2 ! F ! !: Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface................. Q Actual execution of machining................................................... POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [POINT] menu key....... Y P=1 P=0 P=2 X Actual position of tool M3P144 Hole to be drilled M ! N ! P 0 Q 0 R 0 Data are not necessary to be set here.... Movement on Y-axis..................and Y-axes ...................PROGRAM CREATION 7 A.................. Specify the tool path.... 0 1 0 1 INPUT INPUT INPUT Point R...... ...... CW direction: θ’1 = –300° (to the right) (–) .. POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [LINE] menu key... Specify the angle θ1 formed by the line of holes to be drilled and the X-axis..... (b) FIG 2 PTN LIN Data setting Z 0...................... Specify the X coordinate of the first hole to be drilled..................... l2 : Total distance between the first hole to be drilled and last hole ............. the following menu will be displayed. 6 0 INPUT X-axis θ’1 (CW) M3P146 – 3 0 0 INPUT Specify the spacing between holes to be drilled or the total distance between the first hole to be drilled and the last hole.... T1 l1 : Spacing between holes ............ Example of setting Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface....... Specify the Y coordinate of the first hole to be drilled................................ 3 1 0 2 INPUT 0 INPUT 7-92 .....7 PROGRAM CREATION B.. LINE 30 120 Line of holes to be drilled 60° 100 Start point 5−φ9 LINE Workpiece zero point 50 M3P145 (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished.... Straight line of holes to be drilled 0 5 1 INPUT 0 0 INPUT 0 INPUT There are two types of θ1 θ1 (CCW) AN1 CCW direction: θ1 = 60° (to the left) (+) ..... X 50................. Y 100.. AN1 60 AN2 ! T1 30......... T2 ! F 0 !: M 5 N ! P ! Q 0 R 0 Data are not necessary to be set here..... ........... Point R.............................. 7-93 .................. concern the spacing or the total distance.. the following menu will be displayed...................................................................................... SQUARE 100 50 Machining order 120 40 60° 15° 50 Start point 100 10-φ8 SQUARE M3P148 Workpiece zero point (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished................................ INPUT 1 5 INPUT M Specify the number of holes to be drilled ....................... 0 1 INPUT INPUT C... INPUT Actual executionof the machining ........................................................................................................................................................................... Total distance ...PROGRAM CREATION 7 Cursor position Description Specify whether the data entered in T1......................... R Initial point .... Q 0 INPUT ← Start point Only positioningwithout machining ..... Example of setting F 0 Spacing .................................................. Specify whether the machining at the start point is executed or not......... 1 INPUT ← Start point M3P147 Specify the position to which the tool returns after machining...... POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [SQUARE] menu key. ..................... Specify whether the data entered in T1 and T2 concern the specing or the total length.. Line of holes to be drilled firstly AN1 Example of setting 0 1 5 INPUT 0 0 0 INPUT INPUT There are two types of θ1 CCW direction: θ1 = 15° (to the left) (+) ........ .. ....... 5 1 0 0 INPUT 0 INPUT 4 1 0 2 INPUT T2 t2 : Total length of the line of holes to be drilled lastly.................................................. X 100............... Specify the angle θ1 formed by the line of holes to be drilled firstly and the X-axis...... T2 40...................... (Designate l1 or l2................................... Total length . Line of holes to be drilled lastly θ2 (CCW) AN2 AN2 There are two types of θ2 CCW direction: θ2 = 60° (to the left) (+) ........... F Spacing ...................... l2 : Total length of the line of holes to be drilled firtly............ AN1 1 – 5 3 θ1 (CCW) X-axis INPUT θ’1 (CW) M3P149 4 5 INPUT Specify the angle θ2 formed by two lines of holes to be drilled................................ T1 l1 : Spacing between holes of the line of holes to be drilled firtly......... (Designate the spacing if it is specified in T1 or the total length if it is specified therein).... Specify the Y coordinate of the first hole to be drilled.............7 PROGRAM CREATION (b) Data setting FIG 3 PTN SQR Z 0........................... Y 50................................................... Specify the X coordinate of the first hole to be drilled........... T1 50................... t1 : Spacing between holes of the line of holes to be drilled lastly....) Spacify the spacing between holes or the total length of the line of holes to be drilled lastly............................... 6 0 INPUT θ’2 (CW) Line of holes to be drilled firstly M3P150 – 3 0 0 INPUT Specify the spacing between holes or the total length of the lines of holes to be drilled firstly.... AN2 60.... AN1 15............... CW direction: θ’1 = –345° (to the right) (–) ................................... CW direction: θ’2 = –300° (to the right) (–) ........ F 0 M 3 N 4 P 0 Q 0 R 0 Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface........... 0 INPUT 0 1 INPUT INPUT 7-94 ........................... ......................................................... 0 INPUT Start point Q Only positioning without machining ............... 1 Specify if the machining at the start point is executed or not........................... 3 INPUT 3 holes M3P151 Specify the number of holes on the line of holes to be drilled lastly. Actual execution of the machining ................................................................PROGRAM CREATION 7 Cursor position Description Specify the number of holes on the line of holes to be drilled firstly................ N 4 holes M3P152 ...................... Point R .. 0 1 INPUT INPUT 7-95 ............................. Machining Machining P Machining at the four corners .......................................................................................... Example of setting M .................................. 4 INPUT Specify if the machining at the four corners is executed or not...................................... 0 INPUT No machining No machining M3P153 No machining at the four corners ...... R Initial point ................................ 1 INPUT Start point M3P154 Specify the position to which the tool returns after the machining................................ .... the following menu will be displayed. Specify the X coordinate of the first hole to be drilled.7 PROGRAM CREATION D.. CW direction: θ’1 = –345° (to the right) (–) ............. X 100. Line of holes to be drilled firstly Example of setting 0 1 5 INPUT 0 0 0 INPUT INPUT There are two types of θ1 CCW direction: θ1 = 15° (to the left) (+).. Y 50... AN1 θ1 (CCW) X-axis θ’1 (CW) M3P156 1 5 INPUT – 3 4 5 INPUT 7-96 ........... (b) Data setting FIG 4 PTN GRD Z 0... F 0 M 3 N 4 P 0 Q 0 R 0 Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface........ T2 40.... T1 50. GRID 100 50 Start point 60° 40 120 15° 50 12?8 φ GRID 300 M3P155 Workpiece zero point (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished.... POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [GRID] menu key. AN2 60. AN1 15........... Specify the Y coordinate of the first hole to be drilled.... Specify the angle θ1 formed by the line of holes to be drilled firstly and the X-axis........ ... 4 INPUT Specify if the machining at the four corners is executed or not.................................................. CW direction: θ’2 = –300° (to the right) (–) ............ Total length ..................................................................................................... Specify the number of holes on the line of holes to be drilled firstly...) Specify the spacing between holes or the total length of the line of holes to be drilled lastly.. (Designate l1 or l2.................... Machining Machining P No machining No machining M3P160 No machining at the four corners .............................................................................. l2 : Total length of the line of holes to be drilled firstly. 6 – 0 3 INPUT θ’2 (CW) Line of holes to be drilled firstly AN1 M3P157 0 0 INPUT Specify the spacing between holes or the total length of the lines of holes to be drilled firstly.... ..... Example of setting Line of holes to be drilled lastly AN2 AN2 There are two types of θ2 θ2 (CCW) CCW direction: θ2 = 60° (to the left) (+) ......................) Specify the number of holes on the line of holes to be drilled firstly............... 3 INPUT M3P158 3 holes Specify the number of holes on the line of holes to be drilled lastly........................ (Designate the spacing if it is specified in T1 or the total length if it is specified therein...................... 5 1 0 0 INPUT 0 INPUT T2 t1 Spacing between holes of the line of holes to be drilled lastly...... ................................. .................PROGRAM CREATION 7 Cursor position Description Specify the angle θ2 formed by two lines of holes to be drilled................. 0 1 INPUT INPUT M ...... N 4 holes M3P159 . Machining at the four corners ............................. T1 l1 : Spacing between holes of the line of holes to be drilled firstly.................................... t2: Total length of the line of holes to be drilled lastly.......... 4 1 0 2 INPUT 0 INPUT F Spacing .................................................. 0 INPUT 1 INPUT 7-97 ................................. ............. ..............................7 PROGRAM CREATION Cursor position Description Specify if the machining at the start point is executed or not.......................................... Point R ...... Example of setting Actual execution of the machining ........... 0 1 INPUT INPUT E............... POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [CIRCLE] menu key................. CIRCLE Start point 45° R50 300 4 –φ8 CIRCLE Workpiece zero point 400 M3P162 (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished........................... the following menu will be displayed....................... 7-98 .............................. R Initial point ...... 0 INPUT Start point Q Only positioning without machining ...................................... 1 INPUT Start point M3P161 Specify the position to which the tool returns after the machining................................ ..... 5 4 0 1 0 INPUT INPUT R Initial point .............................. 7-99 ....... 300.......... ARC 4–φ8 ARC R50 Start point 45° 30° 300 Workpiece zero point 200 M3P164 (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished.. Specify the number of holes to be machined................... Specify the X coordinate of the center of the circle... X Y AN1 45. T2 ! F ! M 4 N ! P ! Q ! 400..................... the following menu will be displayed......... POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [ARC] menu key... Specify the angle θ1 formed by the start point and the X-axis...PROGRAM CREATION 7 R 0 (b) Data setting FIG 5 PTN CIR Z 0.................. Spacify the position to which the tool returns after the machining..................... Point .. Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the circle. INPUT INPUT F.................... Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface.... AN2 ! T1 50............................................................ AN1 4 5 INPUT θ’1 (CW) – 3 1 5 INPUT M3P162 T1 M Specify the radius of the circle................ CW direction: θ’1 = –315° (to the right) (–) ................... !: Data are not necessary to be set here......... First hole to be machined (Start point) θ1 (CCW) X-axis Example of setting 0 4 3 INPUT 0 0 0 0 INPUT INPUT There are two types of θ1 CCW direction: θ1 = 45° (to the left) (+).................... .............................. X Y AN1 30. AN2 45 T1 50.................................. 3 0 AN1 INPUT θ’1 (CW) M3P165 – 3 3 0 INPUT Specify the angle of pitch between two adjacent holes or the angle between the first hole and the last hole............................................. θ’2: Total angle between the first hole and the last hole θ’2 = 135o .................. First hole to be machined θ1 (CCW) Example of setting 0 2 3 INPUT 0 0 0 0 INPUT INPUT There are two types of θ1 CCW direction: θ1 = 30° (to the left) (+).............. 0 1 INPUT INPUT ←Start point M3P167 Specify the position to which tool returns after machining........ CW direction: θ’1 = –330° (to the right) (–) ....... Only positioning without machining ................ Specify the machining at the starting point is executed or not: 5 0 INPUT 0 1 4 INPUT INPUT INPUT ←Start point Q Actual execution of the machining ............................ Initial point .... F Angle of pitch ... Total angle ......................................... Specify the X coordinate of the center of the arc.......... Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface....................................................................... T2 ! F 0 M 4 N ! P ! Q 0 R 0 200................. 4 5 INPUT X-axis M3P166 1 3 5 INPUT (Designate θ2 or θ’2) T1 Specify the radius of the arc Specify whether the data entered in AN2 concern the angle of pitch or the total angle.... First hole to be machined AN2 θ’2 θ2 θ2 : Angle of pitch between two adjadent holes θ2 = 45o ............... 300............................ R Point R . !: Data are not necessary to be set here...................................................................................7 PROGRAM CREATION (b) Data setting FIG 6 PTN ARC Z 0.................... Specify the angle θ1 formed by the start point and the X-axis........................ 0 1 INPUT INPUT 7-100 .................................... M Specify the number of holes to be machined................................. Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the arc.................. . the following menu will be displayed..... POINT LINE SQUARE GRID CIRCLE ARC CHORD SHAPE END CHECK Press the [CHORD] menu key. F ! M ! N ! P 0 Q ! R 0 !: Data are not necessary to be set here. Specify the X coordinate of the center of the circle. AN1 45....PROGRAM CREATION 7 G... θ1 (CCW) X-axis 4 5 INPUT – 3 1 5 INPUT θ’1 (CW) M3P169 T1 Specify the radius of the circle.. X 50....... Bisectrix of the chord Example of setting 0 5 3 INPUT 0 0 INPUT 0 INPUT ↓ AN1 There are two types of θ1 CCW direction: θ1 = 45° (to the left) (+) . Specify the Y coordinate of the center of the circle. Specify the angle θ1 formed by the start point and the X-axis...... T2 40... (b) Data setting FIG 7 PTN CRD Z 0. 5 0 INPUT 7-101 .. AN2 ! T1 50.. CW direction: θ’1 = –315° (to the right) (–) ................... Y 300..................... CHORD 2-φ8 20 20 R50 45° 300 Workpiece zero point 50 M3P168 (a) Menu selection When the setting for the tool sequence has been finished. Cursor position Z X Y Description Specify the Z coordinate of the machining surface. 7 PROGRAM CREATION Cursor position Description Specify the total length for the machining of the holes on both sides of the bisectrix or 1/2 of the total length for the machining on a single side of the bisectrix.。 Example of setting T2 4 Total length .......................................................................................................... 1/2 of total length ................................................................................................. Specify the position of the hole to be machined. 0 0 INPUT 2 INPUT Right Left Right P Machining of the right side of the chord ....... Machining on both sides of the chord ........... 0 INPUT 1 INPUT Left M3P170 Machining of the left side of the chord .......... 2 INPUT Specify the position to which to tool returns after machining. R Initial point .......................................................................................................... Point R ................................................................................................................ 0 1 INPUT INPUT 7-102 PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-7 Line Machining Units Line machining units are used to enter a contour machining method and the data relating to a form to be machined. The unit includes two sequences: One is the tool sequence, subject to which data are entered in relation to the operational details of tool and the other the shape sequence, subject to which data are entered in relation to the machining dimensions specified on drawing. 7-7-1 Types of line machining units As shown below 9 types of line machining units are available: 1. Central linear machining 2. Right-hand linear machining 3. Left-hand linear machining 4. Outside linear machining 5. Inside linear machining 6. Right-hand chamfering 7. Left-hand chamfering 8. Outside chamfering 9. Inside chamfering M3P171 Fig. 7-15 Types of line machining units 7-103 7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-7-2 Procedure for selecting line machining unit (1) Press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu keys) to display the following menu. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK (2) Presse the [LINE MACH-ING] menu key. ! The following menu is displayed. LINE CTR LINE RGT LINE LFT LINE OUT LINE IN CHMF RGT CHMF LFT CHMF OUT CHMF IN (3) Press the appropriate menu key of the desired machining unit. 7-104 PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-7-3 1. Unit data, automatic tool development and tool path of the line machining unit Central linear machining unit (LINE CTR) This unit should be selected to carry out machining so that the tool has its center move on the line of a form. A. Data setting DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z FIN-R " NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE " " " ZFD DEP-Z WID-R " " ": Data are not necessary to be set here. C-SP FR M M M START END UNo. 1 SNo. R1 F2 UNIT LINE CTR TOOL END MILL END MILL Remark 1: In this unit, end mills are automatically developed. Nevertheless, they may be switched over to either face mill or ball end mill. Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting, refer to Subsection 7-7-4. LINE CTR unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point DEPTH Roughing SRV-Z ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... FIN-Z End mill (for roughing) Finishing Shape sequence entered SRV-R M3P172 M3P173 End mill (for finishing) RGH: A roughness code should be selected out of the menu. FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically entered once a roughness code has been selected. 7-105 7 PROGRAM CREATION B. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining, edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. In the tool sequence, a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed, based on SRV-Z and on FIN-Z. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1, F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0: Development of one tool: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-106 PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Tool path X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the approach point Rapid feed Cutting feed Pa E2 [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] Machining along the form Workpiece E2 Fs Shape sequence entered Fe Pe [6] Movement to the escape point after completion of machining Workpiece X M3P174 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 [3] Movement to the machining face Pc Pa Pc [5] [4] Movement to the Machining cutting start point along the form E9 [7] Movement to the initial point Pe Workpiece [6] Movement to the eacape point after completion of machining X M3P175 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X, APRCH-Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be determined automatically 7-107 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X, -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key, the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. In this case, the coordinate value of the cutting start point will be entered in these articles. X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the cutting start point X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the cutting start point Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece [2] Movement to the position E9 Note 2 Fs Pc (Pa) [4] Machining along the form [3] Movement to the machining face Workpiece Pc [4] Machining along the form (Pa) X E9 Workpiece X M3P176 Note 2: See Subsection 7-7-6, “Precautions in line machining.” Note 3: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. D. Start point (START) and End point (END) Excessive cutting that may occur during approach or retraction can be prevented by specifying wall attributes for the line machining start and end points. The term “walls” are defined as the surfaces perpendicular to the shape at both the start point and the end point. Wall attributes can be specified for the following 5 units. LINE CTR LINE RGT LINE LFT CHMF RGT CHMT LFT <When OPEN is set for START and END> X-Z-axis [1] Movement to the approach point [7] [6] Movement to the initial point Depth Rapid feed Cutting feed [2] Movement to E9 E9 [8] Z X [3] Movement to machining surface [5] Movement to SRV-A the escape point [9] [10] D740PA044 [4] Movement to cutting start point 7-108 Y [5] Movement to the initial point [6] Rapid feed Cutting feed [2] Movement to E9 E9 [4] Z Depth [3] X [7] [3]. [8] Movement to the escape point D740PA046 X-Y-axis Rapid feed Cutting feed Y E30 [1][2][3][6][7] X [4][5][8] E30 D740PA047 7-109 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 X-Y-axis Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the approach point [2] Movement to E9 [3] Movement to machining surface E2 E2 Y [4] Movement to cutting start point [5] Movement to the escape point [6] Movement to the initial point D740PA045 X <When CLOSED is set for START and END> X-Z-axis [1] Movement to the cutting start point X. [7] Movement to cutting start point [8] SRV-A [4]. . Nevertheless.. Data setting DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z FIN-R START END INTER-R CHMF UNo... Remark 4: For the tool sequence data setting. ... ...... A.. .. SRV-Z FIN-Z Finishing FIN-R SRV-R D740PA081 D740PA064 Chamfering End mill End mill cutter (for roughing) (for finishing) RGH: A roughness code should be selected out of the menu.. .. R1 F2 UNIT LINE RGT TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No.... LINE RGT unit Workpiece zero point Shape sequence entered CHMF Roughing DEPTH Tool sequence . Right-hand linear machining unit (LINE RGT) This unit should be selected to carry out machining so that the tool will move on the right side of a form... FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a roughness code has been selected. Central linear machining unit (LINE CTR).” Remark 3: In this unit... refer to “6. 1 SNo. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT).... ..... For details.7 PROGRAM CREATION 2. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ! ! ZFD DEP-Z ! WID-R ! ! C-SP FR M M M !: Data are not necessary to be set here.... refer to Subsection 7-7-4.. refer to “1. they may be switched over to face mill or ball end mill. ..... 7-110 ..... FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is also automatically established once a roughness code has been selected.” Remark 2: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF... Remark 1: For data setting in START and END... end mills are automatically developed..... F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Chamfering Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z or SRV-R ≤ FIN-R: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools CHMF≠ 0: Development of chamfering cutter 7-111 . Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1. FIN-R and CHMF. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. In the tool sequence. SRV-R.PROGRAM CREATION 7 B. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. a maximum of up to three tools are automatically developed though dependent upon the data SRV-Z. FIN-Z. Tool path X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the approach point Pa Rapid feed Cutting feed Shape sequence entered E2 Fs sr tr Fe E2 [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] Machining along the form Pe [6] Movement to the escape point X M3P178 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Pi Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece [3] Movement to the machining face Pa [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] Machining along the form E9 Pe [6] Movement to the escape point X M3P179 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be automatically established tr: sr: Radial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-R in the machining unit Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in the machining unit 7-112 . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X.7 PROGRAM CREATION C. 1 SNo. In this case. refer to “6. the coordinate value of the cutting start point will be entered in these articles. end mills are automatically developed. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT). Central linear machining unit (LINE CTR). 7-113 . Remark 4: For the tool sequence data setting.” Remark 3: In this unit. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. R1 F2 Data setting DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z FIN-R START END INTER-R CHMF UNIT LINE LFT TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No.” Remark 2: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF. 3. X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the cutting start point X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the cutting start point Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 Fs Pc (Pa) [3] Movement to the machining face [4] Machining along the form X E9 Pc [4] Workpiece (Pa) Machining along the form X M3P180 Note 2: See Subsection 7-7-6 “Precautions in line machining.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. A. For details. Nevertheless. UNo.” Note 3: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. Remark 1: For data setting in START and END. refer to “1. refer to Subsection 7-7-4. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE " " ZFD DEP-Z " WID-R " " C-SP FR M M M ": Data are not necessary to be set here. they may be switched over to face mill or ball end mill. Left-hand linear machining unit (LINE LFT) This unit should be selected to carry out machining so that the tool will move on the left side of a form. SRV-R.. FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a roughness code has been selected.. B. ..... FIN-Z... FIN-R and CHMF.... If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. .7 PROGRAM CREATION LINE LFT unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Shape sequence entered CHMF Roughing Finishing DEPTH SRV-Z FIN-Z .. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1.. Chamfering End mill End mill cutter (for roughing) (for finishing) SRV-R FIN-R D740PA082 D740PA064 RGH: A roughness code should be selected out of the menu.... ....... Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit... a maximum of up to three tools are automatically developed though dependent upon the data SRV-Z. FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is also automatically established once a roughness code has been selected. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. In the tool sequence... F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Chamfering Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z or SRV-R ≤ FIN-R: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools CHMF≠ 0: Development of chamfering cutter 7-114 ... Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Tool path X-Y-axis Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Movement to the cutting start point Pa [4] Pc [5] Machining along the form [6] Movement to the escape point Pe Fs [1] Movement to the approach point E2 sr tr Workpiece Fe E2 Shape sequence entered X M3P182 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the Pi Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point [3] Movement to the machining face Pa [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] Machining along the form Workpiece E9 Pe [6] Movement to the eacape point X M3P183 Rapid feed Cutting feed The bold codes represent parameter addresses.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be automatically established tr: sr: Radial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-R in the machining unit Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in the machining unit 7-115 . 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. Outside linear machining unit (LINE OUT) This unit should be selected to carry out machining so that the tool will move to make a turnaround outside a form. Nevertheless.” Note 3: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the cutting start point X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the cutting start point Rapid feed Cutting feed Note 2 Pc (Pa) Workpiece Machining along the form X [4] [2] Movement to the position E9 Fs [3] Movement to the machining face E9 Workpiece [4] Pc (Pa) Machining along the form X M3P184 Note 2: See Subsection 7-7-6. 4. A. R1 F2 Data setting DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF UNIT LINE OUT TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT). Remark 3: For the tool sequence data setting.” Remark 2: In this unit. refer to “6. they may be switched over to face mill or ball end mill. Remark 1: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF. For details. 1 SNo. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. In this case. “Precautions in line machining. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z " WID-R " " C-SP FR M M M ": Data are not necessary to be set here. the coordinate value of the cutting start point will be entered in these articles. 7-116 . refer to Subsection 7-7-4. end mills are automatically developed. UNo. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. . FIN-Z.. a maximum of up to three tools are automatically developed though dependent upon the data SRV-Z..... . . .. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.PROGRAM CREATION 7 LINE OUT unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Shape sequence entered CHMF Roughing DEPTH SRV-Z ..... ... ...... F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Chamfering Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z or SRV-R ≤ FIN-R: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools CHMF≠ 0: Development of chamfering cutter 7-117 .. FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is also automatically established once a roughness code has been selected. FIN-R and CHMF. B.... Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1.. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining............ Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. FIN-Z Finishing FIN-R SRV-R Chamfering End mill End mill cutter (for roughing) (for finishing) D740PA083 D740PA064 RGH: A roughness code should be selected out of the menu.... . SRV-R... In the tool sequence.... FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a roughness code has been selected.. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining....... Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established 7-118 . Tool path X-Y-axis Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the approach point Note 1 Pa [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] [6] Movement to the escape point Pe X Workpiece Machining along the form M3P186 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point [3] Movement to the machining face Pa [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] Pe Machining along the form E9 [6] Movement to the escape point Workpiece X M3P187 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.7 PROGRAM CREATION C. PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: Detail description of tool path near approach point and escape point When the cutting begins near the convex form .In case of finishing Y Y Workpiece [4] Movement to the cutting start point E2 Workpiece E2 sr sr Pc [5] Machining along the form <Pc side> X [6] Movement to the escape point <Pe side> Pe X M3P189 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Tr: Radial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-R in the machining unit sr: Radial finishing allowance determined by the data FIN-R in the machining unit 7-119 .In case of roughing Y Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point E2 Workpiece Workpiece E2 sr tr tr sr Pc [5] Machining along the form <Pc side> X [6] Movement to the escape point <Pe side> Pe X M3P188 . tr: Radial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-R in the machining unit sr: Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in the machining unit Note 2: See Subsection 7-7-6.In case of roughing Y Workpiece sr E2 Pc [5] Machining along the form [4] Movement to the cutting start point tr E2 [6] Movement to the escape point Pe E1 E21 E1 X M3P190 . “Precautions in line machining.7 PROGRAM CREATION When cutting begins near the non-convex form .” Note 3: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. 7-120 .In case of finishing Y sr Workpiece tr E2 [5] Pc Machining along the form [6] Movement to the escape point Pe E2 [4] Movement to the cutting start point E1 E21 E1 X M3P191 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. a cutting start point and a cutting method vary as follows: * The description below is entirely given. -Y . with the cutting direction taken CCW (counterclockwise).Form having a convex point: Y Fs Pc X M3P192 Cutting is started from the convex point nearest the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence. 7-121 .Form having no convex point: Y Fs Pc X M3P193 Cutting is started from the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 4: According to the position of the approach point entered in the tool sequence and to a machining shape entered in the shape sequence. . When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. 7-122 . the coordinates of the cutting start point will be entered automatically. -Y .If there is a convex point near the approach point: Y Pa Pc X M3P195 Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pa: Approach point to be determined using the numeric keys When ? is displayed by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key.7 PROGRAM CREATION When the data is entered in the articles APRCH-X.If there is not any convex point near the approach point: Y Pa Pc X M3P194 . 7-123 . Nevertheless.. ..PROGRAM CREATION 7 5.. . APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R ! ! C-SP FR M M M DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF UNo.... For details.. Inside linear machining unit (LINE IN) This unit should be selected to carry out machining so that the tool will make a turn-around inside of a form.... Data setting UNIT LINE IN TOOL END MILL END MILL ! NOM-φ No.. end mills are automatically developed.. 1 SNo.....” Remark 2: In this unit... LINE IN unit Workpiece zero point Roughing Finishing SRV-Z FIN-Z CHMF DEPTH Tool sequence . see Subsection 7-7-4..... FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a roughness code has been selected. Remark 3: For the tool sequence data setting. refer to “6... Remark 1: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF. Shape sequence entered SRV-R FIN-R D740PA084 Chamfering End mill End mill cutter (for roughing) (for finishing) D740PA064 RGH: A roughness code should be selected out of the menu.. A. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT). R1 F2 !: Data are not necessary to be set here.. they may be switched over to face mill or ball end mill... FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is also automatically established once a roughness code has been selected. . If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. a maximum of up to three tools are automatically developed though dependent upon the data SRV-Z.7 PROGRAM CREATION B. FIN-Z. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. FIN-R and CHMF. F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Chamfering Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z or SRV-R ≤ FIN-R: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools CHMF≠ 0: Development of chamfering cutter 7-124 . SRV-R. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. In the tool sequence. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatcially established 7-125 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Tool path X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the approach point Pa Workpiece Rapid feed Cutting feed Movement to the [4] cutting start point Pc Machining along the form [5] Pe [6] Movement to the escape point Note 2 X M3P197 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Pi Note 3 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point E9 [3] Movement to the machining face Pc Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece Pa Pe Workpiece [6] Movement to the [4] Movement to the [5] Machining cutting start point along the form escape point X M3P198 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. In case of finishing Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point [5] Machining along the form Pc sr Y [6] Movement to the escape point sr Pe E2 Workpiece Workpiece E2 <Pc side> X <Pe side> X M3P200 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. tr: Radial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-R in the machining unit sr: Radial finishing allowance determined by the data FIN-R in the machining unit 7-126 .7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axial feed) in the tool sequence.In case of roughing Y [4] Movement to the cutting startpoint [5] Machining along the form Pc sr tr tr sr Y [6] Movement to the escape point Pe E2 Workpiece Workpiece E2 <Pc side> X <Pe side> X M3P199 . Note 2: Detail description of tool path near approach point and escape point When the cutting begins near the convex form . PROGRAM CREATION 7 When the cutting begins near the non-convex form .In case of finishing Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point E1 E21 E1 Pc Machining along the form [5] Movement to the escape point [6] Pe E2 tr sr Workpiece E2 X M3P202 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.In case of roughing Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point E1 E21 E1 Pc Machining along the form [5] Movement to the escape point [6] Pe E2 tr sr Workpiece E2 X M3P201 .” 7-127 . “Precautions in line machining. tr: Radial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-R in the machining unit sr: Radial finishing allowance determined by the data FIN-R in the machining unit Note 3: See Subsection 7-7-6. When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. a cutting start point and a cutting method vary as follows: * The description below is entirely given. 7-128 .Form having no convex point: Y Pc Fs X M3P204 Cutting is started from the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence.7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 4: According to the position of the approach point entered in the tool sequence and to a machining shape entered in the shape sequence. -Y . .Form having a convex point: Y Pc Fs X M3P203 Cutting is started from the convex point nearest the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence. with the cutting direction taken CCW (counterclockwise). If there is a convex point near the approach point: Y Pa Pc X M3P205 . -Y . the coordinates of the cutting start point will be entered automatically. When ? is displayed by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key.PROGRAM CREATION 7 When the data is entered in the articles APRCH-X. 7-129 .If there is not any convex point near the approach point: Y Pc Pa Fs X M3P206 Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pa: Approach point to be determined using the numeric keys. 7 PROGRAM CREATION 6. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT) This unit should be selected to carry out chamfering so that a tool will move on the right side of a form. A. Data setting UNIT CHMF RGT TOOL CHAMFER NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE " ZFD DEP-Z " WID-R " ": Data are not necessary to be set here. C-SP FR M M M DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R CHMF START END UNo. 1 SNo. 1 Remark 1: For data setting in START and END, refer to “1. Central linear machining unit (LINE CTR).” Remark 2: In this unit, chamfering cutter is automatically developed. Instead of the chamfering cutter, a centering drill can be used. Remark 3: For the tool sequence data setting, refer to Subsection 7-7-4. Note: If a centering drill is used, a nose angle of 90 degrees is set for machining. CHMF RGT unit Tool sequence Shape sequence entered Workpiece zero point INTER-R DEPTH INTER-Z CHMF M3P207 Chamfering cutter M3P208 B. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining, edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. 7-130 PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Tool path X-Y-axis Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the approach point [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pa Fs Pc Workpiece Fe Pe [6] Movement to the escape point X M3P209 fr [5] Machining along the form X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point [3] Movement to the machining face Pa Pc [4] Movement to the cutting start point Machining along the form [5] Workpiece Pe [6] Movement to the escape point X M3P210 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X, -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be automatically established fr: Optimum distance to be automatically established, from the data entered in the PROGRAM and TOOL FILE displays 7-131 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X and -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key, the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. In this case, a coordinate of the cutting start point is entered automatically in the articles. X-Y-axis Y X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the cutting start point Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the cutting start point Workpiece Fs [3] Movement to the machining face Pc [4] Machining along the form X Pc [4] Machining along the form Workpiece X [2] Movement to the position E9 M3P211 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Note 2: See Subsection 7-7-6, “Precautions in line machining.” Note 3: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. 7-132 PROGRAM CREATION 7 D. Corner rounding Although the processed surface is flat in normal chamfering, rounding processes corners into smooth curved surfaces. To perform corner rounding, press the [CORNER R] menu key for the CHMF item and, when the menu display is reversed, specify the chamfer amount. When corner rounding is set, the symbol R is prefixed to the chamfer amount. In the case of normal chamfering, however, nothing is affixed. Corner rounding is available with the following units: - Line machining units: LINE RGT, LINE LFT, LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF RGT, CHMF LFT, CHMF OUT, CHMF IN - Face mahining unit: POCKET Note: To perform corner rounding, you need to set a tool for corner rounding on the TOOL FILE display. For details, refer to “7-2-2 Data registration” in Part 3 of the Operating Manual for the machine. CHMF RGT unit Workpiece zero point Tool sequence Shape sequence entered INTER-R CHMF DEPTH INTER-Z Cutter for coner rounding D740PA065 D740PA068 Remark: The machining points and path of corner rounding are same as those of normal chamfering. 7-133 7 PROGRAM CREATION 7. Left-hand chamfering unit (CHMF LFT) This unit should be selected to carry out chamfering so that a tool will move on the left side of a form. A. Data setting UNIT CHMF LFT TOOL CHAMFER NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE " ZFD DEP-Z " WID-R " C-SP FR M M M DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R CHMF START END UNo. 1 SNo. 1 ": Data are not necessary to be set here. Remark 1: For data setting in START and END, refer to “1. Central linear machining unit (LINE CTR).” Remark 2: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF. For details, refer to “6. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT).” Remark 3: In this unit, chamfering cutter is automatically developed. Instead of the chamfering cutter, a centering drill can be used. Remark 4: For the tool sequence data setting, refer to Subsection 7-7-4. Note: If a centering drill is used, a nose angle of 90 degrees is set for machining. CHMT LFT unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Shape sequence entered DEPTH INTER-R INTER-Z CHMF Chamfering cutter M3P212 M3P208 B. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining, edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. 7-134 PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Tool path X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the approach point Rapid feed Cutting feed Pa fr Pc Pe Fs Workpiece Fe X M3P213 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi Note 2 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point [3] Movement to the Machining along the form machining face Pa Pc [5] [4] Movement to the cutting start point Workpiece E9 Pe [6] Movement to the escape point X M3P214 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X, -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be automatically established fr: Optimum distance to be automatically established, from the data entered in the PROGRAM and TOOL FILE displays 7-135 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X and -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key, the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. In this case, a coordinate of the cutting start point is entered automatically in the articles. X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the cutting start point X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the cutting start point Rapid feed Cutting feed [2] Movement to the position E9 Pc [4] Fs [3] Movement to the machining face Workpiece X Machining along the form Pc [4] Machining along the form Workpiece X M3P215 Note 2: See Subsection 7-7-6, “Precautions in line machining.” Note 3: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. 7-136 A. Note: If a centering drill is used. refer to “6.PROGRAM CREATION 7 8. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z " WID-R " C-SP FR M M M ": Data are not necessary to be set here. 1 UNIT CHMF OUT TOOL CHAMFER NOM-φ No. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. Outside chamfering unit (CHMF OUT) This unit should be selected to carry out chamfering so that a tool will move on the outside of a form.” Remark 2: In this unit. a nose angle of 90 degrees is set for machining. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. Data setting DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R CHMF UNo. For details. chamfering tools are automatically developed. refer to Subsection 7-7-4. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. Remark 1: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF. 7-137 . Remark 3: For tool sequence data setting. 1 SNo. CHMF OUT unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Shape sequence entered INTER-R DEPTH INTER-Z CHMF M3P216 Chamfering cutter M3P208 B. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. a centering drill can be used. Instead of the chamfering cutter. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT). Tool path X-Y-axis Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] Movement to the approach point Note 2 Pa [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc [5] Pe [6] Movement to the escape point Workpiece Machining along the form X M3P217 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Pi Note 3 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the initial point [3] Movement to the machining face Pa [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc Rapid feed Cutting feed [6] Movement to the escape point E9 Pe [5] Workpiece Machining along the form X M3P218 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.7 PROGRAM CREATION C. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established 7-138 . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Note 2: Detail description of tool path near approach point and escape point When the cutting begins near the convex form Y Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point fr Pc [5] Machining along the form fr [6] Movement to the escape point <Pe side> X X M3P219 Pe <Pc side> When the cutting begins near the non-convex form Y Workpiece fr Pc [5] Machining along the form [6] Movement to the escape point Pe [4] Movement to the cutting start point E1 E21 E1 X M3P220 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. fr: An optimum distance is automatically obtained from the data entered in the PROGRAM and TOOL FILE displays Note 3: See Subsection 7-7-6. “Precautions in line machining.” 7-139 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 4: According to the position of the approach point entered in the tool sequence and to a machining form entered in the shape sequence. 7-140 . When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. .Form having a convex point: Y Fs Pc X M3P221 Cutting is started from the convex point nearest the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence. with the cutting direction taken CCW (counterclockwise). a cutting start point and a cutting method vary as follows: * The description below is entirely given.Form having no convex point: Y Fs Pc X M3P222 Cutting is started form the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence. -Y . -Y .If there is not any convex point near the approach point.If there is a convex point near the approach point. Y Pa Pc X M3P223 . Y Pa Pc X M3P224 Pa: Approach point to be determined using the numeric keys If ? is displayed by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence 7-141 . the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered automatically.PROGRAM CREATION 7 When the data is entered in the articles APRCH-X. 1 SNo. Remark 3: For sequence data setting. Note: If a centering drill is used. Instead of the chamfering cutter. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z " WID-R " C-SP FR M M M DEPTH INTER-Z INTER-R CHMF UNo. Right-hand chamfering unit (CHMF RGT). Remark 1: Corner rounding can be specified in CHMF. 1 ": Data are not necessary to be set here. a nose angle of 90 degrees is set for machining.” Remark 2: In this unit. For details. chamfering cutter is automatically developed. A. a centering drill can be used.7 PROGRAM CREATION 9. Inside chamfering unit (CHMF IN) This unit should be selected to carry out chamfering so that a tool will make a turn-around inside of a form. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. refer to Subsection 7-7-4. Data setting UNIT CHMF IN TOOL CHAMFER NOM-φ No. CHMF IN unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point INTER-R DEPTH Shape sequence entered INTER-Z CHMF Chamfering cutter M3P225 M3P208 B. refer to “6. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. 7-142 . -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established 7-143 . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Tool path X-Y-axis Y [1] Movement to the approach point Workpiece Rapid feed Cutting feed [4] Pa [5] Movement to the cutting start point Pc Pe [6] Movement to the escape point Machining along the form Note 2 X M3P226 X-Z-axis Z [1] Movement to the approach point Pi Note 3 [2] Movement to the position E9 [7] Movement to the inital point Rapid feed Cutting feed E9 [3] Movement to the machining face Pa Pc Workpiece Pe Workpiece [4] Movement to [5] Machining [6] Movement to the cutting along the escape start point the form point X M3P227 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. 7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. “Precautions in line machining. Note 2: Detail description of tool path near approach point and escape point When the cutting begins near the convex form Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point Y Pc Machining along [5] the form Movement to the [6] escape point Pe fr fr <Pc side> X <Pe side> X M3P228 When the cutting begins near the non-convex form Y [4] Movement to the cutting start point Pc Machining along the form [5] Movement to the escape point [6] Pe E1 E21 E1 fr Workpiece X M3P229 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.” 7-144 . fr: An optimum distance is automatically obtained from the data entered in the PROGRAM and TOOL FILE displays Note 3: See Subsection 7-7-6. PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 4: According to the position of the approach point entered in the tool sequence and to a machining form entered in the shape sequence.Form having no convex point: Y Fs X M3P231 Cutting is started form the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence. When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. with the cutting direction taken CCW (counterclockwise). a cutting start point and a cutting method vary as follows: * The description below is entirely given.Form having a convex point: Y Pc Fs X M3P230 Cutting is started from the convex point nearest the start point (Fs) entered in the shape sequence. . 7-145 . -Y . 7 PROGRAM CREATION When the data is entered in the articles APRCH-X. Y Pc Pa Fs X M3P233 Pa: Approach point to be determined using the numeric keys When ? is displayed by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered automatically.If there is a convex point near the approach point. Y Pa Pc X M3P232 .If there is not any convex point near the approach point. -Y . Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence 7-146 . A nominal diameter is the data to identify by diameter those tools which are of identical type (having an identical name). Then select a code from the menu to identify those tools which have an identical nominal diameter. outside and inside chamfering units. 3. R1 F2 TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No. Tool designation: TOOL The name of a tool can be changed by the use of menu keys. 2. a chamfering cutter and a centering drill are selectable. For setting of each data item refer to 1 to 10 below. select a heavy tool identification code. left-hand linear. 1. 7-147 . A B C D E F G H HEAVY TOOL >>> To slowly change a heavy tool in the ATC mode. right-hand linear. face mill or ball end mill is selectable. outside linear and inside linear machining units.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-7-4 Tool sequence data of the line machining unit For line machining tool sequence data only a tool name is automatically selected once a machining unit has been entered. Nominal diameter of tool: NOM-φ Approximate diameter of a tool is entered. Tool sequence data SNo. ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL CUTTER ENDMILL CENTER DRILL In the central linear. either end mill. With the [HEAVY TOOL] menu key pressed. In the right-hand. Other data should be entered by use of menu keys or numeric keys according to a form of the workpiece to be machined or to the procedure for machining. left-hand. Tool identification code A code should be selected out of the menu to identify those tools which are of identical type (having and identical name) and have an identical nominal diameter. the display will change over to the menu for heavy tool identification code. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R " C-SP FR M M M " " ↑ 1 ↑ 2 ↑ 3 ↑ 4 ↑ 5 ↑ 5 ↑ 6 ↑ 7 ↑ 8 ": ↑ 9 ↑ 9 ↑ 10 ↑ 10 ↑ 10 Not necessary to be set here. ? will automatically change over to the coordinates of a cutting start point. Setting 0 will erase the priority numbers preassigned to the tool to be used repeatedly in the process. Setting 1 will erase the priority numbers preassigned to the tool to be used repeatedly in the program. allowing a priority number to be assigned. Select to assign a priority number to the tool to be used repeatedly in the particular process.No. assign a new number in a usual manner. The following menu is displayed. (Refer to tool path by each unit. PROG:1)?. Y coordinates of the position at which a tool is to cut in axially. DELAY PRIORITY PRI. Select to change the priority number for the tool within the particular process. CHANGE ASSIGN PRI. A press of a menu key displays the menu item in reverse mode.) 6. PRI.No. Selection of this item displays message ALL ERASE (PROC:0. With the [AUTO SET] menu key selected.No. Select to terminate the process with the subprogram unit. If the cursor is present at a blank space. After the tool path check is performed. Function (c) (d) (e) 5.7 PROGRAM CREATION 4. Alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS will be displayed if the assigned priority number has already been set on any other unit line. Entry of an existing priority number displays alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS. Priority number: No. Assign priority levels in the order of machining. Coordinates X and Y of the approach point: APRCH-X. Machining method: TYPE Use menu keys to select the direction in which machining (turning) is performed in the outside and inside linear machining and outside and inside chamfering units. ? is displayed. APRCH-Y Enter an X. SUB PROG ALL ERAS PROC END (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) The function of menu item (a) to (e) is described below: Menu item (a) (b) Select to conduct subsequent-machining. CW CUT CCW CUT CW CCW [CW CUT] [CCW CUT] M3P234 7-148 . FR A spindle speed and a cutting feedrate are entered. G00 G01 Feedrate Rapid feed Parameter E17 may be used to determine: E17 Feed × 10 Feed × α Workpiece Numeric value (α) M3P235 8. moreover. Cutting conditions (circumferential speed. either the data SRV-Z entered in the machining unit or the maximum cutting stroke registered on the TOOL FILE display.”) 9. see Input procedure in Subsection 7-8-7. With [AUTO SET] menu key selected. (For calculation formula. optimum cutting conditions are calculated and entered. Z-axis feedrate: ZFD Enter the feedrate in Z-axis direction. A maximum of up to three M-codes may be entered. With the [AUTO SET] menu key selected. see Subsection 7-7-6. (Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List. a maximum axial cutting stroke in one cycle is entered.) 10.) 7-7-5 Shape sequence of the line machining unit The data setting articles of shape sequence for the line machining units are the same as those for the face machining units. moreover. feed): C-SP. (A circumferential speed is given in meters per minute and a cutting feedrate in millimeters per revolution. both in the machining unit. “Precautions in line machining. For the shape sequence data setting. to select rapid feed (G00) or cutting feed (G01) by the use of menu keys. It is also possible. CUT G01 RAPID G00 ZFD Initial point Determine this rate. M-codes: M Set the required M-code(s) to be output immediately after mounting the tool onto the spindle in the ATC mode. It is also possible. 7-149 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 7. An actual axial cutting stroke is arithmetically obtained from the data DEP-Z. SRV-Z and FIN-Z. Cutting stroke-Z: DEP-Z In roughing. to select and enter a general M-code out of the menu. a smaller value is entered. based on the materials of both workpiece and tool and on the cutting depth. [Basic tool path] Rapid feed Cutting feed Parameter E9 [1] cuz [2] Initial point Z [3] cuz [4] tz [5] cuz [6] Finishing surface sz M3P236 Fig.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-7-6 1.Type of routing through approach points . The tool path is determined by the parameter E95 which relates with three factors. Precautions in line machining Tool path during rough-machining with Z-axial removal allowance (SRV-Z) > cutting depthZ (DEP-Z) Cutting is performed at several pass. B and C below.Cutting start position along the Z-axis . 7-16 Basic tool path cuz: Cutting depth in the Z-axis per pass Calculation of cuz: cuz = tz – sz n tz – sz cz n= tz: sz: cz: n: Z-axial cutting allowance SRV-Z to be entered in the machining unit Z-axial finishing allowance FIN-Z to be entered in the machining unit Z-axial cutting depth DEP-Z to be entered in the tool sequence Number of passes in the Z-axis direction (Integer obtained by rounding up the decimal fraction) 7-150 .Type of escape along the Z-axis after machining For each factor refer to A. but not all of these factors may be available for the certain machining unit: . Type of routing via approach point Select one of the following two types: (1) Routing via approach point each time (2) Routing via approach point only in the first pass [3] [1] [6] [4] Escape point [4] [2] [2] [5] [5] Escape point [1] [3] [6] Approach point Cutting start point Approach point Cutting start point M3P238 7-151 . Cutting start position along the Z-axis Select one of the following two types: (1) Rapid feed to the position E9 above the machining surface (2) Cutting start position fixed First cutting Second cutting First cutting Second cutting E9 E9 cuz cuz E9 cuz cuz M3P237 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. B. (2) 1: Routing via approach points each time -.(2) 1: Rapid feed to the position E9 above the machining surface -. the starting position of cutting feed is determined by the setting of parameter E7 (instead of E9) from the second cutting when the following conditions are satisfied: . 7-152 .Bit 6 of parameter E95 is set to “1”. Note 2: The tool path shown at basic tool path above is selected automatically for machining units that are not subject to the selection of the parameter E95. and . LFT.(1) Note 1: Both A and B can be used for all line-machining units.(2) 1: No escape along the Z-axis -. whereas C can only be used for inside linear and outside linear machining units. For B: bit 2 = 0: Routing via approach points only in the first pass -.7 PROGRAM CREATION C.(1) * As for pattern (1). RGT. OUT or IN.(1) For C: bit 3 = 0: Return to the initial point -. Type of escape along the Z-axis after machining Select one of the following two types: (1) No Z-axis relief [1] [1] (2) Return to the initial point [4] cuz cuz cuz [2] [3] [2] cuz [3] [4] [5] Cutting start point Escape point Cutting start point Escape point M3P239 Tool path setting parameter Parameter E95 For A: bit 4 = 0: Cutting start position fixed -.The unit concerned is LINE CTR. will become equal to parameter E5 if the following three states occur at the same time: . Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit ct: tz: Z-axial cutting depth DET-Z to be entered in the tool sequence Z-axial cutting allowance SRV-Z to be entered in a machining unit sz: Z-axial finishing allowance FIN-Z to be entered in a machining unit Note 1: The starting allowance of axial cutting. will become equal to parameter E7 if the following three states occur at the same time: . . specified by parameter E9. Detail tool path of a Z-axial cut-in .The machining unit is either outside linear or inside linear machining.Finishing Z Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi Workpiece E9 sz Finishing surface X M3P241 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.A pre-machining tool is included in that tool sequence.A pre-machining tool is included in that tool sequence. . left-hand linear.The machining unit is either central linear.Roughing Z Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi Workpiece E9 ct sz tz Finishing surface X M3P240 . Note 2: The starting allowance of cutting in radial direction. 7-153 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 2.Bit 7 of parameter E95 is set to 1. specified by parameter E2.Bit 6 of parameter E95 is set to 1. outside linear or inside linear machining. right-hand linear. . . Inside corner angle θ is equal to or less than the value entered in E25 (with θ ≤ E25) θ θ θ M3P243 7-154 . 1. C) are satisfied: A. 7-7-7 Automatic corner override In line and face machining. however.7 PROGRAM CREATION 3. the feedrate is automatically overriden. Operating conditions θ Automatically overridden P2 a SRV-R P1 M3P242 Cutting an inside corner will increase a cutting allowance by area a while moving the tool from P1 to P2 in the illustration. cutting an inside corner will require a larger allowance to be cut. the approach point will not be located on the same cutting start point and the tool path will also be modified. Other precaution on tool path If shape data. This override. tool data or parameter are modified after the automatic determination of X and Y coordinates of approach point (displayed in yellow). In this span. will be valid only when all of the following requirements (A. The automatic corner override is to automatically override a feedrate at the allowance increased portions to reduce the cutting load. resulting in an increased load of cutting. B. the automatic corner override function is invalid. the load varies scarcely. inside linear machining. left-hand linear machining. pocket milling. A radial cutting allowance is equal to or less than the value entered E24 (SRV-R ≤ tool diameter × E24/100) When SRV-R is small. 7-155 . SRV-R M3P245 2. A radial cutting allowance is equal to or less than the value entered in E23 (SRV-R ≤ tool diameter × E23/100) The load scarcely varies when SRV-R is near to the tool diameter. Valid machining The corner override is valid in roughing for each of the right-hand linear machining. 3. outside linear machining. With the parameter set at 0. SRV-R M3P244 C.PROGRAM CREATION 7 B. Override rate An override rate on the programmed cutting feedrate should be entered in the parameter E22. pocket milling-mountain and pocket milling-valley. end milling-step. 7 7-8 PROGRAM CREATION Face Machining Units Face machining units are used to enter the data relating to the procedures for machining an area and to the form to be machined. one is the tool sequence in which tool-operation-associated data are entered and the other shape sequence in which the data relating to machining dimensions specified on drawing are entered. Pocket milling 5. Face milling 2. End milling-step 4. Pocket milling-valley 7. Available in each unit are two sequences. End milling-top 3. 7-8-1 Types of face machining units As shown below 7 types of face machining units are available: 1. Pocket milling-mountain 6. 7-17 Types of face machining unit 7-156 . End milling-slot M3P246 Fig. STEP POCKET PCKT MT PCKT VLY SLOT FACE MIL TOP EMIL (3) Press the appropriate menu key of the desired machining unit. ! The following menu is displayed.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-8-2 Procedure for selecting face machining unit (1) Press the menu selector key (key located to the right of the menu keys) to display the following menu. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK (2) Presse the [FACE MACH-ING] menu key. 7-157 . ... face mills are automatically developed........... Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1...... A.. B........ If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining.... Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting. Data setting UNIT FCE MILl TOOL FCE MILL FCE MILL NOM-φ No. FCE MILL unit Tool sequence Shape sequence entered Workpiece zero point Finishing Roughing DEPTH SRV-Z .. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.. based on SRV-Z and on FIN-Z.. FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected.. .... a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed.... The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.. .... Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit... see Subsection 7-8-4.. . In the tool sequence.. F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-158 ... FIN-Z Face mill (for roughing) Face mill (for finishing) M3P247 M3P248 BTM: A bottom roughness code is selected out of the menu....... Unit data. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD " " " ": Data are not necessary to be set here.. 1 SNo. R1 F2 Remark 1: In this unit... .................7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-8-3 1......... DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M M DEPTH SRV-Z BTM FIN-Z UNo.... automatic tool development and tool path of the face machining unit Face milling unit (FACE MIL) This unit is selected to machine a workpiece flatly on the surface by the use of a face milling tool. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. Upon completion of machining. Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. Tool path When [X BI-DIR] is selected for the article TYPE in the tool sequence Y E12 Workpiece Rapid feed Cutting feed Pe [1] E12 Pa [4] cur Pc E12 X Z [1] Pi Note 2 [2] [3] [5] E9 Pe Pc Pa Workpiece cur X M3P249 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. 7-159 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting start point and carries out machining. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the face to be machined. [8] Upon completion of machining. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point and to a subsequent cutting start point. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. [5]. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9.7 PROGRAM CREATION When [X UNI-DIR] is selected for the article TYPE in the tool sequence Y E12 Rapid feed Cutting feed Pe [1] cur Pa [4] cur Pc E12 [1] [6] Note 2 [2] [3] [4] X M3P250 [7] E9 Pa Pc Workpiece [5][8] Pe Pi E12 X Z The bold codes represent parameter addresses. 7-160 . The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting start point and carries out machining. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. [6] and [7] Upon completion of machining in one direction. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the face to be machined. The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting start point and carries out machining. 7-161 . The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the face to be machined. Upon completion of machining. E9 Pc Workpiece Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence fo: Form-offsetting clearance fo = tool diameter × E15 10 <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point.PROGRAM CREATION 7 When [X BI-DIR SHORT] is selected for the article TYPE in the tool sequence Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece Pe E12 [1] cur [4] Pc Pa cur fo E12 X Z [1] Pi Note 2 [2] [5] [3] Pa Pe [4] X M3P251 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. 7-162 . -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence fo: Form-offsetting clearance fo = tool diameter × E15 10 <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. E9 Workpiece Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Upon completion of machining. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting start point and carries out machining. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the face to be machined. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point.7 PROGRAM CREATION When [X BI-DIR ARCSHORT] is selected for the article TYPE in the tool sequence Y E12 Workpiece Rapid feed Cutting feed Pe [1] cur [4] Pc Pa cur E12 Z [1] fo X Pi [2] [5] [3] Pa Note 2 Pe [4] Pc X D735P0083 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit ct: tz: Z-axial cutting stroke to be determined by the data DEP-Z in the tool sequence Z-axial cutting allowance to be determined by the data SRV-Z in a machining unit sz: Z-axial finishing allowance FIN-Z in a machining unit 7-163 .Roughing Z [1] Pi [2] Workpiece E9 [3] ct tz sz Finishing surface X Rapid feed Cutting feed M3P252 .Finishing Z [1] Pi [2] Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece [3] E9 Finishing surface sz X M3P253 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. In this case.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. the coordinate of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. Note 2: Detail of the Z-axial tool path. (See Subsection 7-8-5. “Precautions in face machining.”) . the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. . ..... .... End mill (for roughing) End mill (for finishing) FIN-Z BTM: A bottom roughness code is selected out of the menu.... see Subsection 7-8-4... In the tool sequence....... End milling-top unit (TOP EMIL) This unit is selected to machine a workpiece flatly on the machine by the use of an end mill. .. A.... Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit............ a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed. based on SRV-Z and on FIN-Z. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.. FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected....... TOP EMIL unit Tool sequence Shape sequence entered Workpiece zero point Finishing Roughing DEPTH SRV-Z ........ APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M M DEPTH SRV-Z BTM FIN-Z UNo......... .. B.. Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting... Data setting UNIT TOP EMIL TOOL END MILL END MILL " ": Data are not necessary to be set here.......7 PROGRAM CREATION 2.. end mills are automatically developed...... If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining... edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool.. 1 SNo..... Machining R1 (Roughing) F2 (Finishing) R1. R1 F2 Remark 1: In this unit.. NOM-φ No.... F2 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-164 ... ) The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting start point and carries out machining. The tool moves to the face to be machined. Pa: Pc: Pe: Pi: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. (The feedrate is dependent upon the data ZFD in the tool sequence.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. Tool path When [X BI-DIR] is selected for the article TYPE in the tool sequence Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece Pe [1] Pa [4] Pc Note 3 X Z [1] Pi Note 2 [2] E9 [3] Pa Pc Pe X M3P256 Workpiece [5] The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Upon completion of machining. -Y in the tool sequence Cutting start point to be automatically established Escape point to be automatically established Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. 7-165 . the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z to be entered in the common unit <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. (The feedrate is dependent upon ZFD in the tool sequence. The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. [5]. In this case. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5 “Precautions in face machining. [8] [9] The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the face to be machined and starts machining. it moves at a rapid feedrate to the subsequent cutting start point specified by the parameter E9 above the next cutting start point.7 PROGRAM CREATION When [X UNI-DIR] is selected for the article TYPE in the tool sequence Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Workpiece Pe [1] Pa [4] [6] Pc Note 3 X Z [1] [6] [7] [5] [9] E9 [8] Workpiece X M3P257 Pi [2] [3] Note 2 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Note 1: When ? is displayed in the articles APRCH-X. Then. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed.) The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting start point and carries out machining.” 7-166 . [6] and [7] Upon completion of machining in one direction. Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. The tool moves to the face to be machined. Upon completion of machining. PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 3: Detail description of tool path Y fo Cutting feed td [4] Pc cur fo Workpiece fo + rs fo X M3P258 td: Diameter of a tool fo: Form offset clearance dependent upon both td and parameter E13 fo = td × E13 10 rs: Form offset amount rectangular to the cutting direction rs = td 20 cur: Radial cutting depth per cycle. obtainable as follows: cur = lv n lv = lm (*) – 2 × (fo + rs) lv n= cr cr: n: Radial cutting depth (WID-R) to be entered in the tool sequence Number of radial cutting pass (an integer with fractions below the decimal point rounded up) Form lm (*) cur Cutting direction M3P259 7-167 . .. . .. a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed.... The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining....... In the tool sequence.... .. see Subsection 7-8-4... Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.. Data setting UNIT STEP TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No.. ... Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1.... FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected. 1 SNo. STEP unit Tool sequence Shape sequence entered Workpiece zero point Finishing Roughing FIN-R DEPTH SRV-Z . with a relief left behind......... . end mills are automatically developed... .... .... R1 F2 Remark 1: In this unit...... FIN-Z and FIN-R........... A... ... F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-168 .7 PROGRAM CREATION 3... End mill (for roughing) End mill (for finishing) FIN-Z M3P260 M3P255 BTM: WAL: A buttom roughness code is selected out of the menu. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining.. based on SRV-Z. A wall roughness code is selected out of the menu..... .... .... APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP " " " ": Data are not necessary to be set here... . Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting... edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. .. B.. .......... End milling-step unit (STEP) This unit is selected to machine a workpiece flatly on the surface by the use of an end mill... . .... FR M M M DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R UNo.... Wall Relief M3P261 7-169 . Machining sequence End milling-step is performed in the following order. FIN-R Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence R1. this machining is not performed.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. this machining is not performed. Finishing Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. Roughing Relief FIN-Z SRV-Z Bottom Relief Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. With FIN-Z = 0. With SRV-Z = FIN-Z. With FIN-R = 0. this machining is not performed. 0 1 E91 = 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit 0 Machining is performed from inside to outside.7 PROGRAM CREATION D. the tool moves inwards along an outside form. 7-170 . a machining pattern is selected by the parameter E91.Either 0 or 1 in the related bit accordingly. Machining pattern For roughing or bottom finishing. . For details of parameters refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List. Machining is performed from outside to inside. the rest is machined. the tool moves inwards along an inside form. bit 7 NM310-00546 In case of machining from the outside. bit 1 Cutting direction reversing type: Fixed cutting direction type: With the cutting direction reserved inside and outside are machined. Machining is performed in an identical direction while turning along an inside form. To machine from the outside. After that. Pa. Tool path Roughing or bottom finishing Y [6][10] [7] [11] cur [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed Note 3 [15] [9] [5] [13] [14] [4] [8][12] Pa = Pc X Z [1] Pe E2 sr Pi [2] Note 2 E9 [3] Pa = Pc X M3P262 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. -Y to be entered in the tool sequence and cutting start point (In the illustration above.) Escape point automatically established Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in a machining unit Pe: Pi: cur: sr: 7-171 . the cutting start point is the approach point.PROGRAM CREATION 7 E. Pc: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Bottom finishing is performed. In this case.) Wall finishing The tool is machining through a tool path identical with that for finishing in the LINE OUT unit.) [4] . 7-172 . with 0 < FIN-Z. the cutting feedrate is multiplied by the number entered in the parameter E16. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5. The tool moves to the face to be machined. -Y. (The feedrate is dependent upon the data ZFD in the tool sequence. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles.) The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. Finishing Finishing is performed. with 0 < FIN-R. (See Note 1. <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point (Cutting start point). based on the entered data FIN-Z and FIN-R. “Precautions in face machining.” Note 3: When a tool moves over a tool path distant by the value entered in the parameter E2 from a machining form. F. Wall finishing is performed.7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 1: When ? is displayed on the article APRCH-X. the tool is postioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed.[15] The tool machines along an inside form while turning around a workpiece on the circumference. by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. ([6] and [10] and [4]. [8] and [2] have some portions pass through an identical path. 7-173 .and wall-finishing When both bottom and wall are finished in finishing. the cutting feedrate is multiplied by the number entered in the parameter E16. -Y.PROGRAM CREATION 7 To perform both bottom. the tool is postioned directly at the cutting start point and operations [2] and [3] are performed. -Y in the tool sequence will be the approach point in bottom finishing. Note 2: When a tool moves over a tool path distant by the value entered in the parameter E2 from a machining form. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate from the bottom-finishing escape point to the wall-finishing cutting start point as illustrated below. Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Wall finishing [7] Pc2 Pe2 [3] [6] [1] Bottom finishing Pe1 X Z Pi [3] [2] [4] [8] [5] Pe1 Pc2 Pe2 X M3P263 Pe1: Escape point in bottom finishing Pc2: Cutting start point in wall finishing Pe2: Escape point in wall finishing Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Note 1: When ? is displayed on the article APRCH-X. In this case. the point determined by the data APRCH-X. moreover. by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. To transfer from bottom finishing to wall finishing. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. A wall roughness code is selected out of the menu......... . . end mills and a chamfering cutter are automatically developed.. Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting.. 7-174 ...... Data setting UNIT POCKET TOOL END MILL END MILL CHAMFER ! ! ! ! ! ! ! DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R ! NOM-φ No... ........ Remark 3: If a centering drill is used.. Pocket milling unit (POCKET) This unit is selected to carry out milling of a pocket form by the use of an end mill...... FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is automatically established....... 1 SNo. .. .. .... a centering drill can be used for chamfering........... FIN-Z: Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected.. Remark 1: In this unit....... ... Instead of the chamfering cutter...... see Subsection 7-8-4... A....... once a wall roughness code has been selected.... APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M M INTER-R CHMF UNo.. a nose angle of 90 degrees is set for machining.... DEPTH Shape sequence entered FIN-Z M3P264 End mill (for roughing) Chamfering End mill cutter (for finishing) D740PA064 BTM: WAL: A bottom roughness code is selected out of the menu... POCKET unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Roughing Finishing Chamfering FIN-R SRV-Z ...7 PROGRAM CREATION 4........ R1 F2 3 !: Data are not necessary to be set here... ....... FIN-Z.PROGRAM CREATION 7 B. a maximum of up to three tools are automatically developed. F1 (Roughing/Finishing) (Chamfering) Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools CHMF ≠ 0: Development of chamfering cutter C. Machining sequence Pocket milling is performed in the following order. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1. this machining is not performed. With SRV-Z = FIN-Z. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. 7-175 . this machining is not performed. M3P265 Wall Chamfering Machining is performed with the chamfering cutter or centering drill in the tool sequence. With CHMF = 0. With FIN-R = 0. In the tool sequence. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. FIN-R Roughing SRV-Z FIN-Z Bottom Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. Finishing Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. FIN-R and CHMF. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. based on SRV-Z. Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence R1. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. With FIN-Z = 0. this machining is not performed. this machining is not performed. M3P266 7-176 . .Either 0 or 1 is entered in the related bit accordingly 0 1 E92 = 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit 0 Machining is performed from inside to outside.7 PROGRAM CREATION D. a machining pattern is selected by the parameter E92. Machining pattern For roughing or bottom finishing. Machining is performed from outside to inside. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. “Precautions in face machining. Tool path Machining from outside (roughing or bottom finishing) Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] cur cur [7] [6] [5] Pc sr [4] Pa X [1] Z Pi [2] [8] [3] Pe Pa Note 2 E9 X M3P267 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. In this case. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5.” 7-177 . -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence sr: Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data in the machining unit Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X.PROGRAM CREATION 7 E. Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed. ) The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting starting point. Upon completion of machining. [6] and [7] The tool machines on an around by around basis inwards. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. (See Note 1. Machining from inside (roughing or bottom finishing) Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] cur cur Pa [4] [5] Pc [6] [7] Pe Sr X Z [1] Pi [2] [8] Note 2 Pe [3] Pa E9 X M3P268 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.7 PROGRAM CREATION <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] [8] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. (The feedrate is dependent upon the data ZFD in the tool sequence. Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. The tool moves to the face to be machined. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence sr: Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data in the machining unit 7-178 . [5].) The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. ) The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. [6] and [7] The tool machines on an around by around basis outwards. F. . (See Note 1. “Precautions in face machining. (The feedrate is dependent upon the data ZFD in the tool sequence. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed.Bottom finishing is performed.) The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting starting point. In this case.” <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. . the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5. with 0 < FIN-R. with 0 < FIN-Z. Finishing Finishing is performed. based on the entered values of FIN-Z and FIN-R. [5]. 7-179 . The tool moves to the face to be machined. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. Wall finishing The tool is machining through a tool path identical with that for finishing in the LINE IN unit.Wall finishing is performed. [8] Upon completion of machining. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate from the bottom-finishing escape point to the wall-finishing cutting start point as illustrated below. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Bottom finishing Pe1 Wall finishing [7] [6] [3] [1] Pc2 X Z Pi [3] [2] Pe1 [4] [5] Pc2 X M3P269 Pe1: Escape point in bottom finishing Pc2: Cutting start point in wall finishing Pi: Note: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. moreover. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. 7-180 .and wall-finishing When both bottom and wall are finished in finishing. the point determined by the data APRCH-X. In this case. To transfer from bottom finishing to wall finishing. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed.7 PROGRAM CREATION To perform both bottom. -Y of the tool sequence will be the approach point in bottom finishing. 7-181 . LINE LFT. rounding processes corners into smooth curved surfaces. LINE OUT. however. CHMF RGT. the symbol R is prefixed to the chamfer amount. refer to “7-2-2 Data registration” in Part 3 of the Operating Manual for the machine. specify the chamfer amount.Face mahining unit: POCKET Note: To perform corner rounding. LINE IN.Line machining units: LINE RGT. CHMF OUT. press the [CORNER R] menu key for the CHMF item and. CHMF IN . nothing is affixed. Corner rounding is available with the following units: . you need to set a tool for corner rounding on the TOOL FILE display. when the menu display is reversed. CHMF LFT. Corner rounding POCKET unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Shape sequence entered INTER-R FIN-R CHMF DEPTH SRV-Z FIN-Z Roughing Finishing Cutter for corner rounding D740PA066 D740PA068 Although the processed surface is flat in normal chamfering. For details. Remark: The machining points and path of corner rounding are same as those of normal chamfering. To perform corner rounding. In the case of normal chamfering. When corner rounding is set.PROGRAM CREATION 7 G. .. DEPTH Shape sequence entered FIN-Z M3P270 End mill (for roughing) End mill (for finishing) M3P255 BTM: WAL: A buttom roughness code is selected out of the menu........ . FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected........ ..... Data setting UNIT PCKT MT TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining. . A wall roughness code is selected out of the menu.. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1.. B.. . WID-R C-SP FR M M M DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R UNo.7 PROGRAM CREATION 5.... .... .. based on SRV-Z. .. .... The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining...... . FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is automatically established. .. PCKT MT unit Workpiece zero point FIN-R Finishing Roughing Tool sequence SRV-Z ... edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool... Pocket milling-mountain unit (PCKT MT) This unit is selected to carry out milling of a pocket form with relief left behind by the use of an end mill. .... .. ... . . ..... R1 F2 Remark 1: In this unit. . see Subsection 7-8-4. . FIN-Z and FIN-R..... end mills are automatically developed..... once a wall roughness code has been selected. .. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z " " " ": Data are not necessary to be set here.... .. a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed.... .... . .. A. 1 SNo.. In the tool sequence. .... ... Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit.. . F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-182 .. .. Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting. ...... ... this machining is not performed. Bottom Relief Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Finishing Relief Inner wall Relief M3P271 7-183 . Machining sequence Pocket milling is performed in the following order. With SRV-Z = FIN-Z. FIN-R Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence R1. this machining is not performed. With FIN-Z = 0. Roughing Relief SRV-Z FIN-Z Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. this machining is not performed. With FIN-R = 0. .7 PROGRAM CREATION D. M3P272 7-184 . bit 1 Cutting direction reversing type: With the cutting direction reversed. Fixed cutting direction type: Machining is performed in an identical direction along an inside form. 0 E93 = 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit 0 1 Machining is performed from inside to outside. the rest is machined. inside and outside are machined. Machining is performed from outside to inside. After that. Machining pattern For roughing or bottom finishing.Enter 0 or 1 in the related bit accordingly. a machining pattern is selected by the parameter E93. Tool path Machining from outside (roughing or bottom finishing) .PROGRAM CREATION 7 E. 7-185 .Machining along outer and inner walls: Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] [7] [8][11] Y [10] [12] [4] [9] [6] [5] Pa cur sr X Z [1] Pi Note 2 [2] E9 [3] Pa X M3P273 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. -Y in the tool sequence Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence sr: Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in a machining unit Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. “Precautions in face machining. In this case.7 PROGRAM CREATION . the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed.Machining the rest: Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [13] [14] Pe [12] [11] X Z Pi [15] Pe X M3P274 Pa: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key.” 7-186 . 7-187 . [12]. [5] and [6] The tool machines along the outside form.) The tool moves at a cutting feedrate to the cutting starting point. the tool moves along the same path as that in [6]. once it has interfered with the inside form. the tool machines along the inside form. To machine along the inside form. the tool moves along the same path as that in [8]. [10] Because of the path reversed. (See Note 1. [13] and [14] [15] The rest is machined inwards on an around by around basis. Once it has got out of the inside form. [7] [8] [9] Once it has interfered with the inside form. the tool machines along the inside form. [11] To machine the rest.PROGRAM CREATION 7 <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point. (The feedrate is dependent upon the data ZFD in the tool sequence. The tool moves to the face to be machined. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. Upon completion of machining. the tool moves along the outside form.) The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. 7 PROGRAM CREATION Machining from inside (roughing or bottom finishing) Y [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed [9] [6] [10] [4] [5] [7] [8] Pa [11] Pc Pe cur [12] [13] sr X Z [2] P Note 2 [2] [14] E9 [3] Pa = Pc Pe X M3P275 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pc: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. Pa. the cutting start point is the approach point.) Escape point to be automatically established Pe: 7-188 . (In the illustration above. -Y to be entered in the tool sequence and cutting start point. Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. outer wall and inner wall are finished in this order (outer wall finishing → inner wall finishing). irrespective of setting for parameter E93 bit 0. 7-189 .Bottom finishing is performed. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate from the escape point to the cutting start point as illustrated below. Finishing Finishing is performed.Outer and inner walls are finished. the point determined by the data APRCH-X. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5.PROGRAM CREATION 7 <Route on which tool is to move> In [7] and [8]. with 0 < FIN-Z. To transfer from bottom finishing to wall finishing or from outer wall finishing to inner wall finishing. -Y of the tool sequence will be the approach point in bottom finishing. F. “Precautions in face machining. .and wall-finishing When both bottom and wall are finished in finishing. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed. . To perform wall-finishing When wall-finishing is performed in finishing. with 0 < FIN-R. based on the entered data FIN-Z and FIN-R. In this case.” Outer wall finishing The tool is machining through a tool path identical with that for finishing in the LINE IN unit. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. Inner wall finishing The tool is machining through a tool path identical with that for finishing in the LINE OUT unit. and [5] and [10]. To perform both bottom. moreover. the tool moves reversely on an identical path. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles.7 PROGRAM CREATION Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [11] Inner wall finishing [1] Pe1 [3] [6] Pe3 Pc3 Pe2 Pc2 Bottom finsihing Outer finishing X Z [8] [3] Pi [12] [9] [7] [4] [2] [11] Pe3 Pc3 Pe2 Pc2 [5] Pe1 X M3P276 Pe1: Escape point in bottom finishing Pc2: Cutting start point in outer wall finishing Pe2: Escape point in outer wall finishing Pc3: Cutting start point in inner wall finishing Pe3: Escape point in inner wall finishing Pi: Note: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed. 7-190 . In this case. see Subsection 7-8-4..... PCKT VLY unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point Roughing FIN-R Finishing SRV-Z . edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. 1 SNo. DEPTH End mill (for roughing) End mill (for finishing) M3P255 Shape sequence entered FIN-Z M3P277 BTM: WAL: A buttom roughness code is selected out of the menu... A wall roughness code is selected out of the menu. Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit. a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed.. DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M M DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R UNo.. Data setting UNIT PCKT VLY TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No. . FIN-Z and FIN-R. ....... A. once a wall roughness code has been selected. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP " " " ": Data are not necessary to be set here. end mills are automatically developed.. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1.... . F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z: Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-191 . based on SRV-Z.. .. Pocket milling-valley unit (PCKT VLY) This unit is selected to carry out pocket milling-valley by the use of an end mill. .... FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected... .PROGRAM CREATION 7 6.. Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting. B. The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining. ... FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is automatically established... R1 F2 Remark 1: In this unit. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining.. In the tool sequence.. M3P278 D. . With SRV-Z = FIN-Z. With FIN-Z = 0. a machining pattern is selected by the parameter E94. this machining is not performed.Enter 0 or 1 in the related bit accordingly. this machining is not performed. 0 E94 = 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit 0 1 Machining is performed from inside to outside. bit 1 Cutting direction reversing type: With the cutting direction reversed. FIN-R Roughing Hollow FIN-Z SRV-Z Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence R1. Machining pattern For roughing or bottom finishing. Bottom Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. Machining sequence Pocket milling-valley is performed in the following order. the rest is machined.7 PROGRAM CREATION C. Hollow Finishing Wall Hollow Machining is performed with the end mill developed in the tool sequence F1. inside and outside are machined. Fixed cutting direction type: Machining is performed in an identical direction along an inside form. With FIN-R = 0. After that. M3P279 7-192 . this machining is not performed. Machining is performed from outside to inside. the cutting start point is the approach point.PROGRAM CREATION 7 E.) Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in a machining unit 7-193 . Tool path Machining from inside (roughing or bottom finishing) . -Y in the tool sequence and cutting start point (In the illustration above. Pc: Pi: cur: sr: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X.Machining along an outer wall after expanding a valley along an inside form: Y [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed [7] [5] [11] [10] [8] cur Pa = Pc [4] [6] [9] [12] sr X Z [1] Pi [2] E9 [3] Note 2 Pa = Pc X M3P280 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Pa. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. “Precautions in face machining. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5.7 PROGRAM CREATION .” 7-194 .Machining the rest: Y Rapid feed Cutting feed [13] [14] [11] [12] Pe cur X Z Pi [15] Pe X M3P281 Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit cur: Radial cutting depth to be determined by the data WID-R in the tool sequence sr: Radial finishing allowance to be determined by the data FIN-R in a machining unit Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X. In this case. [12]. Once it has got out of the outside form.) The tool moves to the cutting position in a workpiece. the tool machines along the outside form. the tool moves along the same path as that in [8]. [11] To machine the rest. [5] and [6] The tool expands a hole along the valley form.) The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9. [10] Once it has interfered with the outside form. [7] [8] [9] Once it has interfered with the wall of an outside form. [15] Upon completion of machining. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. (The feedrate is dependent upon the data ZFD in the tool sequence. To machine along the outside form. The tool moves to the face to be machined.PROGRAM CREATION 7 <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point (cutting start point). 7-195 . (See Note 1. the tool machines along the outside form. [13] and [14] The rest is machined outwards on an around by around basis. the tool moves along the same path as that in [6]. the tool expands the hole along the valley form. (In the illustration above.” Outer wall finishing The tool is machining through a tool path identical with that for finishing in the LINE IN unit. Note 1: When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X.) Escape point to be automatically established Tool path [8] and [10] is the same as that of [5] and [7] respectively. Pc: Pe: Approach point to be determined by the data APRCH-X. 7-196 . -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. -Y in the tool sequence. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed.7 PROGRAM CREATION Machining from outside (roughing or bottom finishing) Rapid feed Cutting feed [1] [6] [9] [7][10] Y [12] [13] [11] [5] [4] [8] Pa = Pc X Z [1] Pi Note 2 [2] [14] E9 Pa = Pc [3] X M3P282 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. Note 2: See Subsection 7-8-5. the cutting start point is the approach point. “Precautions in face machining. In this case. Pa. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. Wall finsihing is performed. the point determined by the data APRCH-X.PROGRAM CREATION 7 F. In this case. the coordinates of cutting start point will be entered in these articles. To transfer from bottom finishing to wall finishing. Y Rapid feed Cutting feed Wall finishing Bottom finishing [1] [3] [7] Pc2 [6] Pe1 X Z [3] Pi [8] [4] [2] Pe2 Pc2 Pe1 [5] X M3P283 Pe1: Escape point in bottom finishing Pc2: Cutting start point in wall finishing Pe2: Escape point in wall finishing Pi: Note: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit When ? is displayed in the article APRCH-X.and wall-finishing When both bottom and wall are finished in finishing. To perform both bottom. -Y by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key. moreover. with 0 < FIN-R. Bottom finishing is performed. 7-197 . -Y of the tool sequence will be the approach point in bottom finishing. the tool moves at a rapid feedrate from the bottom-finishing escape point to the wall-finishing cutting start point as illustrated below. with 0 < FIN-Z. Finishing Finishing is performed. based on the entered data FIN-Z and FIN-R. the tool is positioned directly at the cutting start point and operation [2] and [3] are performed. .... DEPTH FIN-Z SLOT-WID M3P284 End mill (for roughing) End mill (for finishing) M3P255 BTM: WAL: A buttom roughness code is selected out of the menu. End milling-slot unit (SLOT) This unit is selected to carry out slot machining by the use of an end mill. If the data developed are inappropriate for the machining..... Automatic tool development The tools are automatically developed according to different patterns on the basis of the data entered in the unit... based on SRV-Z....... . The machining is executed on the basis of the tool sequence data and the unit data are not used for the machining.. edit by modifying the data or deleting the tool. In the tool sequence..... ..........7 PROGRAM CREATION 7....... FIN-R: A radial finishing allowance is automatically established........ Remark 2: For the tool sequence data setting.... see Subsection 7-8-4.. Machining R1 (Roughing) F1 (Finishing) R1....... SLOT unit Tool sequence Workpiece zero point FIN-R Shape sequence entered Roughing Finishing SRV-Z ........... once a wall roughness code has been selected. .. ..... 1 SNo... R1 F2 UNIT SLOT TOOL END MILL END MILL NOM-φ No...... . SLOT-WID..... .. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP " " DEP-Z " WID-R C-SP FR " " M M M ": Data are not necessary to be set here. FIN-Z and FIN-R. A wall roughness code is selected out of the menu. . FIN-Z: A Z-axial finishing allowance is automatically established once a bottom roughness code has been selected. Remark 1: In this unit..... A...... end mills are automatically developed.. F1 (Roughing/Finishing) Pattern FIN-Z = 0 and FIN-R = 0: Development of one tool SRV-Z ≤ FIN-Z or SLOT-WID ≤ (2 × FIN-R): Development of one tool Other than those specified above: Development of two tools 7-198 ...... a maximum of up to two tools are automatically developed. Data setting DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R UNo. B..... . Tool path With tool radius + FIN-R < Y Fe [1] SLOT-WID 2 < tool diameter + FIN-R sr Fs Pc Pe Note 3 Z [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed X Note 1 [2] [4] [3] Pi E9 Pc Pe X M3P285 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. “Precautions in face machining. 7-199 . Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit sr: Radial finishing allowance (FIN-R) to be entered in a machining unit Note 1: See Subsection 7-8-5.” Note 2: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Finishing Y E21 [5] [1] wd Fs Pc Pe X M3P287 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. The tool moves to the face to be machined and starts machining. Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be automatically established wd: Slot width (SLOT-WID) to be entered in a machining unit sr: Radial finishing allowance (FIN-R) to be entered in a machining unit <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point (cutting start point). 7-200 . the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point.Roughing Y E21 [5] sr [1] wd Fs Pc Pe X M3P286 . The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9.7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 3: Detail of tool path near approach point and escape point . Upon completion of machining. 7-201 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 With tool radius + FIN-R = Y [1] SLOT-WID 2 Note 3 td Fe Pc Fs sr Rapid feed Cutting feed X Pe Z [1] Pi Note 1 [2] [4] E9 [3] Pc Pe X M3P288 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.” Note 2: The feedrate on tool path [3] is dependent upon the data ZFD (Z-axis feed) in the tool sequence. “Precautions in face machining. Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Fe: End point of form to be entered in the shape sequence Pe: Escape point to be automatically established Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit td: Tool diameter to be registered in the TOOL DATA display sr: Radial finishing allowance (FIN-R) to be entered in a machining unit Note 1: See Subsection 7-8-5. The tool moves to the face to be machined and starts machining. Pc: Cutting start point to be automatically established Fs: Start point of form to be entered in the shape sequence wd: Slot width (SLOT-WID) to be entered in a machining unit sr: Radial finishing allowance (FIN-R) to be entered in a machining unit <Route on which tool is to move> [1] [2] [3] [4] The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to approach point (cutting start point). The tool moves at a rapid feedrate to the position entered by the parameter E9.Finishing Y [1] wd Fs Pc X M3P290 The bold codes represent parameter addresses.7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 3: Detail of tool path near approach point . 7-202 . the tool moves at a rapid feedrate to initial point. Upon completion of machining.Roughing Y sr [1] wd Fs Pc X M3P289 . Tool sequence data SNo. In other units. 2. Other data should be entered by use of menu keys or numeric keys according to a form of the workpiece to be machined or to the procedure for machining. [CHAMFER CUTTER] or [CENTER DRILL] can be selected. A nominal diameter is the data to identify by diameter those tools which are of identical type (having an identical name). 7-203 . Tool designation: TOOL The name of a tool can be selected by the use of menu keys. select a heavy tool identification code. either [ENDMILL or [BALL ENDMILL] is selectable. 1. In the pocket milling unit [ENDMILL]. Nominal tool diameter: NOM-φ An approximate tool diameter is entered. either one of [ENDMILL]. For setting of each data item refer to 1 to 13 below. 3. A B C D E F G H HEAVY TOOL >>> To slowly change a heavy tool in the ATC mode. R1 F2 TOOL END MILL END MILL ↑ NOM-φ No. Then select a code from the menu to identify those tools which have an identical nominal diameter. ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL CUTTER ENDMILL CENTER DRILL In the face milling unit. Press the [HEAVY TOOL] menu key to change the menu to one for heavy tool identification code. [BALL ENDMILL].PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-8-4 Tool sequence data of the face machining unit In the tool sequence a tool name only is automatically selected once a machining unit has been entered. Tool identification code A code should be selected out of the menu to identify those tools which are of identical type (having an identical name) and have an identical nominal diameter. [FACEMILL] and [BALL ENDMILL] is selectable. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP " " ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ " ↑ 10 ↑ 11 ↑ 12 FR M M M 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 ↑ 12 ↑ 13 ↑ 13 ↑ 13 ": Not necessary to be set here. The following menu is displayed. Select to terminate the process with the subprogram unit. refer to Chapter 8. assign a new number in a usual manner. ? is displayed. Entry of an existing priority number displays alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS. DELAY PRIORITY PRI. Check the tool path and ? will automatically change over to the coordinates of a cutting start point. Setting 0 will erase the priority numbers preassigned to the tool to be used repeatedly in the process. Assign priority levels in the order of machining. PROG:1)?. APRCH-Y Enter an X.No. Select to change the priority number for the tool within the particular process. Alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS will be displayed if the assigned priority number has already been set on any other unit line. With [AUTO SET] selected. A press of a menu key displays the menu item in reverse mode. Y coordinates of the position at which a tool is to cut in axially.No. Setting 1 will erase the priority numbers preassigned to the tool to be used repeatedly in the program. Coordinates X and Y of the approach point: APRCH-X.7 PROGRAM CREATION 4. Select to assign a priority number to the tool to be used repeatedly in the particular process. PRI.) 7-204 . Function (c) (d) (e) For details. If the cursor is present at a blank space. allowing a priority number to be assigned. Selection of this item displays message ALL ERASE (PROC:0.No. “PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL. (Refer to tool path by each unit. Priority number: No. CHANGE ASSIGN PRI.” 5. SUB PROG ALL ERAS PROC END (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) The function of menu item (a) to (e) is described below: Menu item (a) (b) Select to conduct subsequent-machining. Machining method: TYPE Machining method differs according to the units as follows. A. X BI-DIR Y BI-DIR X Y X BI-DIR Y BI-DIR X BI-DIR Y BI-DIR UNI-DIR UNI-DIR SHORT SHORT ARCSHORT ARCSHORT Bidirectional cut Unidirectional cut Bidirectional short cut Bidirectional arc short cut M3P291 Fig. Face milling unit A tool path pattern is selected out of three: BI-DIRECT. 7-18 Tool path patterns 7-205 .. UNI-DIRECT. In each pattern.. it is possible to select whether machining is performed in parallel with the X-axis or the Y-axis.PROGRAM CREATION 7 6. BI-DIRECT SHORT and BI-DIRECT ARCSHORT. moreover. End milling-top unit A tool path pattern is selectable out of BI-DIRECT. X BI-DIR Y BI-DIR X Y UNI-DIR UNI-DIR Unidirectional cut Bidirectional cut M3P292 C. moreover. In each pattern.7 PROGRAM CREATION B. CW CUT CCW CUT [CW CUT] [CCW CUT] CW CCW M3P293 7-206 . it is possible to select whether machining is performed in parallel with the X-axis or with the Y-axis. Other units A machining (turning) direction is selected by the use of menu keys. or UNI-DIRECT. TYPE Select the type of operation during axial cutting. Z-axis feedrate: ZFD The radial feedrate should be entered in a multiple of feedrate.” Note 1: This item can be specified. PCKT MT PCKT VLY and SLOT. PK-DEP Specify the first cutting depth for pecking operation. when [CUT G01] is selected for ZFD. SRV-Z and FIN-Z in the machining unit. “Precautions in face machining. POCKET. With [AUTO SET] menu key pressed. STANDARD TAPER HELICAL PECKING For details see Subsection 7-8-5. (For calculation formula. when [PECKING] is selected for TYPE in 8. either the data SRV-Z entered in the machining unit or the maximum cutting depth registered on the TOOL FILE display. Cutting stroke-Z: DEP-Z In roughing. 10. Numeric value (α) Workpiece Feed × Feed × α E17 10 M3P294 8. Note: This item can be specified. Note 2: This item is available only for the following five units: STEP. CUT G01 RAPID G00 ZFD G00 Initial point G01 Feedrate Rapid feed Parameter E17 may be used to determine: Determine this rate. a smaller value is entered. It is also possible.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7. to select rapid feed (G00) or cutting feed (G01) by the use of menu keys. 9. see Subsection 7-8-5. An actual axial cutting depth is arithmetically obtained from the data DEP-Z. “Precautions in face machining.”) 7-207 . a maximum axial cutting stroke in one pass is entered. based on the materials of both workpiece and tool and on the cutitng depth.7 PROGRAM CREATION 11. PCKT MT and PCKT VLY 12. With the [AUTO SET] menu key selected. Cutting conditions (circumferential speed. TOP EMIL and STEP E14 WID-R = Norminal tool diameter × 10 : POCKET. the data WID-R is automatically calculated and determined by the parameter E10 or E14 and nominal tool diameter. optimum cutting conditions are automatically calculated and entered. FR A spindle speed and a cutting feedrate are entered.) 13.) 7-208 . It is also possible. E10 WID-R = Norminal tool diameter × 10 : FCE MILL. moreover. M-codes: M Enter an M-code which will be output immediately after mounting the tool onto the spindle in the ATC mode. With [AUTO SET] menu key selected. A maximum of up to three codes may be entered. feedrate): C-SP. to select and enter a general M-code out of the menu. (A circumferential speed is given in meters per minute and a feedrate in millimeters per revolution. Radial cutting depth: WID-R A maximum cutting depth per pass is entered in roughing or bottom finishing. (See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List. Type of routing through approach point For each factors refer to A and B below. but these factors may not be all available in certain machining unit: . [Basic tool path] Initial point Z Rapid feed Cutting feed E9 [1] [3] [5] sz cuz cuz cuz Workpiece [2] [4] [6] Finishing surface The bold code represents a parameter address. The tool path is determined by the parameter related to the following two factors. M3P295 tz Fig. 7-19 Basic tool path cuz: Z-axial cutting depth per pass Calculation of cuz: tz – sz cuz = n tz – sz n = cz tz: Z-axial machining allowance SRV-Z to be entered in the machining unit sz: Z-axial finishing allowance FIN-Z to be entered in the machining unit cz: Z-axial cutting depth DEP-Z to be entered in the tool sequence n: Number of passes in the Z-axis direction (Integer obtained by rounding up the decimal fraction) 7-209 .Cutting start position along the Z-axis . Precautions in face machining Tool path during rough-machining in the case of “Z-axial machining allowance (SRV-Z) > Z-axial cutting depth (DEP-Z)” Cutting is performed at several passes.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-8-5 1. 7 PROGRAM CREATION A. Setting the type of routing via approach point Select one of the following two types: (1) Routing via approach point in all passes [3] [1] [6] (2) Routing via approach point only in the first pass [1 ] [3] [6] [4] [2] [5] Escape point Escape point [2 ] Approach point [4] Approach point Cutting start point [5] Cutting start point M3P238 7-210 . Setting the cutting start position along the Z-axis Select one of the following two types: (1) Rapid feed to the position E9 above the machining surface First cutting (2) Cutting start point fixed First cutting Second cutting Second cutting E9 E9 cuz E9 cuz cuz cuz M3P237 B. For B: bit 2 of parameter E95 = 0: 1: Routing via approach point only in the first pass.Bit 1 of E96 (for SLOT unit) or bit 2 of the other parameters concerned is set to “1”.PROGRAM CREATION 7 <Tool path setting parameters> Parameter related to the tool path setting in each face machining unit is shown below. 2. Detail tool path of a Z-axial cutting . PCKT VLY or SLOT. PCKT MT.) For A: bit 4 of each parameter = 0: 1: Cutting start point fixed.Roughing ([STANDARD] is selected) Z Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi [2] [1] E9 [3] tz Finishing surface sz X M3P296 7-211 . the starting position of cutting feed is determined by the setting of parameter E7 (instead of E9) from the second cutting when the following conditions are satisfied: . and . (2) Rapid feed to the position E9 above the machining surface. POCKET. (1) Note 1: B can only be used in the end milling-slot (SLOT) unit. (1) * As for pattern (1).The unit concerned is TOP EMIL. (2) Routing via approach point in all passes. End milling-top unit (TOP EMIL): E97 End milling-step unit (STEP): E91 Pocket milling unit (POCKET): E92 Pocket milling-mountain unit (PCKT MT): E93 Pocket milling-valley unit (PCKT VLT): E94 End milling-slot unit (SLOT): E96 (The bold codes represent user parameter addresses. STEP. Note 2: The tool path shown at basic tool path above is selected automatically for face machining unit that is not assigned by these parameters. end milling-slot) Z [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi [2] [3] E9 sz X M3P298 The bold codes represent parameter addresses. pocket millingvalley) Z [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi [2] E9 [3] sz tz Finishing surface X M3P297 .Roughing ([PECKING] is selected) Z [1] Rapid feed Cutting feed Pi [2] PK-DEP E37 Clearance tｚ [3] Finishing surface X D740PA053 sｚ . pocket milling. Pi: Initial point to be determined by the data INITIAL-Z in the common unit tz: Z-axial machining allowance (SRV-Z) to be entered in a machining unit sz: Z-axial finishing allowance (FIN-Z) to be entered in a machining unit 7-212 .Finishing (End milling-top.Bottom finishing (End milling-step.7 PROGRAM CREATION . pocket milling-mountain. bit 3 . bit 2 E94. bit 3 E94.A pre-machining tool is included in that tool sequence. 7-213 . bit 2 E92. Note 2: The starting allowance of cutting in radial direction. specified by parameter E2. bit 3 E92. bit 1 . Unit End milling-step Pocket milling Parameter E91.The designated parameter for the intended unit is set to 1.The designaed parameter for the intended unit is set to 1. specified by parameter E9. bit 2 Unit Pocket milling-mountain Pocket milling-valley End milling-slot Parameter E93. Unit End milling-top End milling-step Pocket milling Parameter E97. will become equal to parameter E7 if the following two states occur at the same time: .A pre-machining tool is included in that tool sequence.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 1: The starting allowance of axial cutting. will become equal to parameter E5 if the following two states occur at the same time: . bit 2 E91. bit 2 E96. bit 3 Unit Pocket milling-mountain Pocket milling-valley Parameter E93. 7 PROGRAM CREATION 3. Tool paths in tapered approach scheme and helical approach scheme .Tapered approach scheme (machining pattern: inside → outside. approach point: automatically determined) Tapering start point Machining start point Shape sequence Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching distance D740PA055 7-214 .Tapered approach scheme (machining pattern: outside → inside. approach point: automatically determined) Shape sequence Tapering start point Machining start point Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching distance D740PA054 . approach point: manually determined) Shape sequence Tapering start point APRCH-1.Tapered approach scheme (machining pattern: outside → inside. approach point: manually determined) Machining start point Shape sequence Tapering start point APRCH-X.Tapered approach scheme (machining pattern: inside → outside. E34 Approaching distance = Nominal diameter of tool × 10 7-215 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 . as described below. APRCH-Y Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching distance D740PA057 Note 1: The approaching distance in a tapered approach scheme is automatically determined by a parameter. APRCH-2 Machining start point Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching distance D740PA056 . Inside to outside: Direction of the tangent to the line that connects the machining start point to the next machining point .If an approach point is set manually Direction of the tangent to the line that connects the approach point to the machining start point Note 4: If the approaching distance is so long that it interferes with the shape sequence or the tool path. θ Z-axial cutting depth Approaching distance D740PA067 Note 3: An approaching direction is automatically determined. . as described below. the alarm 705 APPROACH POINT ERROR is issued. . θ will be approximately 0.7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 2: The approaching gradient in a tapered approach scheme can be changed with the parameter E35.If an approach point is set automatically Outside to inside: Direction of the line that equally divides the angle formed by the two sides of the shape that sandwich the machining start point.Helical approach scheme (machining pattern: outside → inside. Z-axial cutting depth = Approaching distance × E35 100 If E35 = 1.57°. approach point: automatically determined) Helical turning circle Machining start point Shape sequence Helical cutting start point Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching radius D740PA058 7-216 . Helical approach scheme (machining pattern: inside → outside.PROGRAM CREATION 7 . approach point: automatically determined) Machining start point Shape sequence Helical turning circle Helical cutting start point Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching radius D740PA059 .Helical approach scheme (machining pattern: outside → inside. approach point: manually determined) Helical turning circle Machining start point Shape sequence APRCH-X APRCH-Y Helical cutting start point Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching radius D740PA060 7-217 . as described blow. Z-axial cutting depth = Approaching radius × E33 100 If E33 = 1.57°. Note 4: The rotational direction of the helical turning circle that the tool approaches is automatically determined. θ Z-axial cutting depth Approaching radius D740PA067 Note 3: The helical turning circle computed is tangent to the path that connects the approach point to the machining start point. .Inside to outside: Opposite to the rotational direction specified as TYPE of tool sequence data 7-218 . as described below. E32 Approaching radius = Nominal diameter of tool × 10 Note 2: The approaching gradient in a helical approach scheme can be changed with the parameter E33.Outside to inside: Rotational direction specified as TYPE of tool sequence data . approach point: manually determined) Machining start point Shape sequence Helical turning circle APRCH-X APRCH-Y Helical cutting start point Axial finishing allowance Axial clearance + SRV-Z Approaching radius D740PA061 Note 1: The approaching radius in a helical approach scheme is automatically determined by a parameter.Helical approach scheme (machining pattern: inside → outside. θ will be approximately 0.7 PROGRAM CREATION . if will result in an alarm. the cutting start point will not be located on the same approach point and the tool path will be also modified. machining is automatically carried out. tool data or parameters are modified after the automatic determination of the data APRCH-X. however. When machining is performed in the cutting direction reverse mode or when a concave form is pocket milled. Other precautions 1. a portion remains uncut.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Note 5: If the approach circle is so large that it interferes with the shape sequence or the tool path. In excess of 32. Up to a maximum of 32 portions so remaining uncut. Pocket milling Remaining uncut (2 locations) Pocket milling-valley Remaining uncut (2 locations) Machinable NM210-00547 7-219 . the alarm 705 APPROACH POINT ERROR is issued. -Y in the tool sequence (displayed in yellow). 4. Machinable 2. If shape data. . the feedrate is automatically reduced in the first pass. 1. In the first pass. however. etc. Therefore the cutting load in such a case is bigger than that applied in the next pass. First pass DEP-R Tool diameter Pc Automatically overridden in the first pass Ordinary cutting feedrate in the second pass M3P300 7-220 . To make the cutting load equal in all passes. etc. the cutting width is equal to the tool diameter. the cutting width inside the machining form is determined by the data WIDR in the tool sequence.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-8-6 Override in case of the overall width cutting In the pocket milling. Pa: Approach point Pc: Cutting start point Pa Pc Automatically overridden M3P299 B. To move from the approach point to the cutting start point: Illustration below is an example of the pocket milling unit. Operating conditions The overall width cutting override is valid in pocket milling on the following four cases on which the cutting width equals the tool diameter: A. With the parameter set to 0. M3P302 2. To move to the next cutting start point 2nd pass 1st pass Automatically overridden M3P301 D. pocket milling-valley and end milling-step units. The feedrate is overridden in the first pass where machining is performed along an inside form. the overall width cutting override is invalid. 7-221 . pocket milling-mountain. Override rate An override on the programmed cutting feedrate is determined by the parameter E18. Machining available The overall width override is valid in roughing for pocket milling.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. First pass after the inversion of the tool path Illustration below is an example of the pocket milling-mountain unit. 3. 7-222 .CHMF RGT. CHMF IN Machining to one defined shape Machining with at least two defined shapes FCE MILL. machining form can be divided into the following two types: Table 7-3 Closed form and open form Closed form Fixed form Arbitrary form Open form Arbitrary form Line machining LINE OUT. The fixed forms belong to closed type. Fixed form SQUARE CIRCLE Arbitrary form ARBITRY M3P303 The arbitrary forms can be divided into two types shown below. Definitions of forms In line machining and face machining units one of the following three patterns can be selected. TOP EMIL. 1. POCKET STEP. Closed form and open form Depending on the machining units. LINE IN. LINE LFT.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-8-7 Definitions of forms in line machining and face machining units After the data in the machining unit and the tool sequence have been entered. PCKT VLY LINE CTR. A. CHMF LFT Face machining SLOT M3P304 A fixed shape is not provided for the SLOT unit. CHMF OUT. LINE RGT. enter the data related to the machining form and dimensions in the shape sequence. PCKT MT. Machining units related to the open form Machining unit Tool path Before machining → After machining LINE CTR LINE RGT Line machining LINE LFT CHMF RGT CHMF LFT Face machining SLOT M3P305 7-223 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 B. Line machining Machining unit Tool path Before machining → After machining LINE OUT LINE IN CHMF OUT CHMF IN M3P306 7-224 .7 PROGRAM CREATION C. Machining units related to the closed form . Face machining Machining unit Tool path Before machining → After machining FCE MILLL One shape defined TOP EMIL POCKET STEP Two shapes defined PCKT MT PCKT VLY M3P307 7-225 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 . M3P309 7-226 . take the following precautions: 1. do not fail to establish coordinates X. 40) 100° X 20 100 Workpiece zero point FIG 1 2 3 ４ 5 PTN LINE LINE LINE LINE CCW 175. 40. Y 20. 165. 3. Y Center (165.7 PROGRAM CREATION 2. pocket milling-mountain and pocket milling-valley. it is necessary to use [STARTING POINT] menu key without fail at the head of the inside form. are required. first. 150. 15. for which two forms. R/th I J P CNR 100. 2. 20. 200. Y of its start and end points. 40. LINE STARTING → POINT The zone encircled is displayed in blue. After pressing the [STARTING POINT] menu key. 40) 200 X 100. 80. [CW ARC] or [CCW ARC] menu key. though the machining form could be drawn. P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 20. (Entering the inside form first would lead to a tool path alarm. inside and outside. J of the center of an arc should be entered in the workpiece coordinates system. 4. always define the outside form. 200. In end milling-step. 155. 120. select an arbitrary form with [LINE]. ◆ ◆ CN2 ◆ CN3 ◆ CN4 ◆ M3P308 When both outside and inside forms are arbitrarily defined. For an open form. Coordinates X.) Example: Outside form Inside form Y 120 20 X 50 φ30 100 Workpiece zero point 50 200 FIG 1 2 PTN SQR CIR P1X/CX 100. Outside form start point Inside form start point (175. it is impossible to select the corner (C or R) of its start or end point. Y of the start and end points and coordinates I. To define an arbitrary form. 70. In an open form. 40. For open form: The start point has a meaning as a point. For closed form: The start point has a meaning as a linefrom an end point to the start point. Y) differs between an open form and a closed one. Y) has a meaning as a point. J.) Closed form Y Start point (X. Y) X 60 25 50 Workpiece zero point 120 P1 End point The start point (X. X 25. Example: FIG 1 2 3 PTN LINE LINE LINE Y 50. I. P and CNR are ignored. 25.PROGRAM CREATION 7 5. 60. M3P310 7-227 . 120. R/th I J P CNR The form in this program is indicated on a display as follows: Open form Y Start point (X. Y) 60 X 25 End point 50 Workpiece zero point 120 The start point (X. The meaning of a start point (X. (Data R/th. 120. Y) has a meaning as a line from an end point to the start point. ............. (b) Data setting in shape sequence SQUARE (see figure above) FIG 1 PTN SQR P1X/CX x1 P1Y/CY y1 P3X/R x3 P3Y y3 CN1 C1 (R1) CN2 C2 (R2) CN3 C3 (R3) CN4 C4 (R4) Cursor position P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y Description Enter the X coordinate of start point (x1)....... Enter the Y coordinate of diagonal point (y3)........... Entry of shape sequence data The following explains the data entry method of the line/face machining sequence for each type of fixed/arbitrary form...... Select a machining form at corner 1.......... SQUARE Corner 2 C2 Diagonal point P3 C3 (R3) C4 Corner 3 (R2) y3 Y y1 C1 Corner 1 (R1) (R4) Corner 4 Start point P1 X x1 Workpiece zero point x3 M3P311 (a) Menu selection After setting tool sequence data of the line/face machining unit.... 7-228 ....... Enter the Y coordinate of start point (y1)........ PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>? SQUARE CIRCLE ARBITRY SHAPE END XY PLANE CHECK Press the [SQUARE] menu key........ CN2 CN3 CN4 Enter the same data as those for corner 1... Corner R CN1 C-chamfering: Press the [CORNER CHAMFER] menu key and enter a numeric value.. Enter the X coordinate of diagonal point (x3). Fixed form 1.....7 PROGRAM CREATION 3. Corner C Pressing the [CORNER CHAMFER] menu key makes the menu display reverse and entering a numeric value will cause that menu display status to become normal.. the following menu will be displayed.......... R-machining: Enter the numeric value directly... Corner chamfering distance (C) or corner radius of a circular arc (R)....... A.. CN3 0. RGH 1 TYPE CW P3Y 300. INTER-R 99. No. CN4 R20.A P1X/CX 200. NOM-φ 10.046 CHMF 0. FR 0. BTM 1 TYPE ZFD CW P3Y 300. PK-DEP WID-Z 5. C-SP 15 CN4 C20. SRV-R 5.A P1X/CX 200. CN1 0 CN2 R20. WID-R " CN3 0. APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 500. 1 SNo. WID-R 5. DEP-Z 5. C-SP FR M M M NOM-φ No. ZFD G01 CN1 0. SRV-Z 5. APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 500. R1 FIG 1 UNIT LINE OUT TOOL END MILL PTN SQR DEPTH 5. " FIN-R 0. SRV-Z 5. ← Shape sequence data 7-229 . ? P1Y/CY 100. R1 FIG 1 UNIT POCKET TOOL END MILL PTN SQR DEPTH 5. M M M ← Shape sequence data Example 2: A workpiece machined in a line machining unit (POCKET) R20 300 Y 100 X 200 Workpiece zero point 500 R20 M3P313 UNo. FIN-R 0. CN2 C20. G01 WAL 1 TYPE FIN-Z 0. APRCH-X 10.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Example 1: A workpiece machined in a line machining unit (LINE OUT) C20 300 Y 100 X 200 Workpiece zero point 500 C20 M3P312 UNo. 1 SNo. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 100. FIN-Z 0. (b) FIG 2 Data setting in shape sequence CIRCLE (see figure above) PTN CIR P1X/CX x1 P1Y/CY y1 P3X/R r P3Y " CN1 " CN2 " CN3 " CN4 " ": Data are not necessary to be set here. 7-230 . the following menu will be displayed. Cursor position P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R Description Enter the X coordinate of the center of a circle (x1). CIRCLE (fixed form) r P1 Y y1 X Workpiece zero point x1 M3P314 (a) Menu selection After setting tool sequence data of the line/face machining unit. Enter the Y coordinate of the center of a circle (y1).7 PROGRAM CREATION 2. PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>? SQUARE CIRCLE ARBITRY SHAPE END XY PLANE CHECK Press the [CIRCLE] menu key. Enter the radius of the circle to be machined (r). No. R1 FIG 1 UNIT POCKET TOOL END MILL PTN CIR DEPTH 5. CN3 " INTER-R 99. NOM-φ 10. CN4 " CHMF 0. PATTERN OF FIGURE <MENU>? SQUARE CIRCLE ARBITRY SHAPE END XY PLANE CHECK Press the [ARBITRY] menu key. the following menu will be displayed.A P1X/CX 200. ? P3X/R 80. Selection of arbitrary form After setting tool sequence data of the line/face machining unit.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Example: A workpiece machined in a face machining unit (POCKET) R80 Y 100 X 200 Workpiece zero point M3P315 UNo. 5. SRV-Z 5. 1 SNo. 5. CW ARC CCW ARC SHAPE ROTATE SHAPE SHIFT REPEAT STARTING END POINT SHAPE END XY PLANE CHECK 7-231 . BTM 1 TYPE CW " WAL 1 ZFD G01 P3Y FIN-Z 0. M TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M ← Shape sequence data B. Arbitrary 1. ! LINE The following menu will be displayed. APRCH-X APRCH-Y ? P1Y/CY 100. " CN1 " CN2 " FIN-R 0. ......... Corner R C-chamfering: Press the [CORNER CHAMFER] menu key and enter a numeric value........ Corner C 7-232 ........ (b) Data setting in shape sequence LINE (see figure above) FIG 3 PTN LINE X x Y y R/th I i J j P p CNR C (R) θ Cursor position X Description Enter the X coordinate of an end point for line machining (x).. Function of automatically calculating a point of intersection............ select the [ ? ] menu key...” P Specify the corner chamfering distance (C) or corner radius of a circular arc (R). R-machining: CNR Enter the numeric value directly.. ..........Press the [UP] menu key to specify the upper intersecting point... Y Enter the Y coordinate of an end point for line machining (y)...... LINE End point Cornering: C or R Y y j θ X X x i Workpiece zero point M3P316 (a) Menu selection Press the [LINE] menu key... Y R /th Y X X θ = 225° Y X θ = –135° Y X θ = –315° M3P317 θ = 45° I J Enter the X-axial vector value (i). Enter the Y-axial vector value (j)... Select the conditions of intersecting with the following forms (P): ... select the [ ? ] menu key...... .. Note: For details refer to “C... If it is unknown...7 PROGRAM CREATION 2............. ...Press the [LEFT] menu key to specify the intersecting point at the left........ Example: Four θs given below signify the identical line......Press the [DOWN] menu key to specify the lower intersecting point..Press the [RIGHT] menu key to specify the intersecting point at the right... Enter the angle between X-axis and machining line (θ).......... If it is unknown......... ↑ (θ = –90°. 150) A workpiece machined in a face machining unit (POCKET) Y 150 X 50 100 Workpiece zero point 200 300 M3P318 UNo. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP P CNR ATTRIB FR CLOSED " CLOSED " CLOSED " CLOSED " ← Shape sequence data -1. ? 100. FIN-Z 0. ? R/th BTM 1 CW WAL 1 G01 I 1.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Example: Start point (200. 10. 12 CHMF 0. 300.A X 200. 1 SNo. SRV-Z 5. FIN-R 0. INTER-R 99. 6. J 0. 0.) 7-233 .03 M M M NOM-φ No. 270° or –270° is applicable. ? Y 150. ? 50. FR 0. R1 FIG 1 2 3 4 UNIT POCKET TOOL END MILL PTN LINE LINE LINE LINE DEPTH 5. ? 90. 5. ....... I Enter the X coordinate value of the center of an arc (i). select the [ ? ] menu key.. . Y Enter the Y coordinate of an end point (y)....... If it is unknown..............Press the [LEFT] menu key to specify the intersecting point at the left.....Press the [DOWN] menu key to specify the lower intersecting point.. 7-234 ...... J Enter the Y coordinate value of the center of an arc (j).Press the [UP] menu key to specify the upper intersecting point..... If it is unknown......7 PROGRAM CREATION 3...... . ARC (CW and CCW) (CW) ARC Start point (CCW) ARC Start point ( i.Press the [RIGHT] menu key to specify the intersecting point at the right.. select the [ ? ] menu key. If it is unknown... j ) Y y X End point Workpiece zero point x Workpiece zero point X End point x r Y y r ( i. Function of automatically calculating a point of intersection.. R-machining: CNR Enter the numeric value directly.. (see figure above) FIG 4 PTN CW (CCW) X x Y y R/th r I i J j P p CNR C (R) R-FEED RGH Cursor position X Description Enter the X coordinate of an end point (x). select the [ ? ] menu key.. (b) Data setting in shape sequence CW/CCW ARC. select the [ ? ] menu key... Select the conditions of intersecting with the following forms (P): ............ R-FEED RGH Corner C Specify the roughing feedrate....... ..” Specify the corner chamfering distance (C) or corner radius of a circular arc (R)... See Remark 1 for further details.. Specify the finishing feedrate according to the particular roughness of the surface.... R/th Enter the radius of an arc (r)......... If it is unknown.. If it is unknown. Note: P For details refer to “C...... . j ) M3P319 (a) Menu selection Press the [CW ARC] or [CCW ARC] menu key.. Corner R C-chamfering: Press the [CORNER CHAMFER] menu key and enter a numeric value... select the [ ? ] menu key..... 1 ZFD START DEP-Z 4. 200. R1 F2 FIG 1 2 3 4 UNIT LINE LFT TOOL END MILL END MILL PTN LINE LINE CCW LINE DEPTH 5. No. 200. 200. INTER-R 99.A X 100. 50. 250. 30. ? R/th 100. CHMF 0.313 M M M CLOSED CLOSED NOM-φ No. 2 SNo. P CNR R-FEED ← Shape sequence data -30.0) X (0. FIN-R 0.70) (80. SRV-R 10. FR 0. APRCH-X ? ? Y 0. 50.1 TYPE " " J FIN-R 0.A X 0. 150.006 M M M APRCH-X APRCH-Y DEP-Z 5.* 7-235 .30) Y (50.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Example 1: Start point R50 R100 300 Y 200 X Workpiece zero point 100 200 M3P320 UNo. 70. SRV-R 5. 1 SNo. CNR WID-R C-SP " R-FEED RGH 17 ← Shape sequence data Example 2: (80. 20. 150. R1 FIG 1 2 3 4 UNIT LINE OUT TOOL END MILL PTN CW LINE CCW LINE DEPTH 5. ? Y 200. RGH 3 APRCH-Y ? ? R/th I FIN-Z 0. 90.0) R30 UNo. 300. 0. FR 0.9 " END WID-R " " RGH INTER-R CHMF 99 C-SP 76 76 0. SRV-Z 5. 200. 80. 250. 80. NOM-φ 10. 0.123 0. SRV-Z 5.A 20. I RGH 1 TYPE CCW J 200. ZFD G01 P FIN-Z 0. 4. if the angle of the arc is more than 180 degrees. R can be entered using either a plus sign or a minus sign. radius R can be entered using a plus (+) sign.For CW ARC and CCW ARC. 70) R30 (80. the arc will appear as shown in the diagram below. 30) (0. . J) of the arc have been specified. 7-236 .* If “30” is entered as R. 0) . enter a minus ( – ) value as radius R.With CNR specified. however.7 PROGRAM CREATION . 0) (50. When the central coordinates (I. (80. SHAPE ROTATE (CW and CCW) (CCW) ROTATE [3] [2] [5] [1] Defined shape r [1] r [5] [4] [4] [3] [2] (CW) ROTATE Y j Workpiece zero point i Y j Workpiece zero point i Defined shape X X M3P321 (a) Menu selection Press the menu keys [SHAPE ROTATE] and [CW SHIFT] or [CCW SHIFT] in this order. If it is unknown. See Remark 1 for further details. select the [ ? ] menu key. APRCH-X ? ? Y " 75. Example: CW SHIFT [2] R30 [3] 75 Y Workpiece zero point 30 60 90 M3P322 Start point [4] [1] 105 X UNo. If it is unknown. select the [ ? ] menu key. 100. 75. 30. Specify the finishing feedrate according to the particular roughness of the surface. Enter the number of defined shape repetitions (p). M M M 0. " No. NOM-φ 20. Cursor position R/th Description Enter the radius to rotate a defined shape (r).A 10. RGH 4 TYPE CW CW J 75. If it is unknown. (c) REPEAT END Press the [REPEAT END] menu key and a shape sequence of SHAPE ROTATE (CW or CCW) will be brought to the end. " " I 90. " " ZFD G01 G01 P 4 FIN-Z 0.043 0.A X " 60. 1 SNo.6 WID-R " " " INTER-R 99. C-SP 14 20 FR CHMF 0.224 CNR R-FEED RGH ← Shape sequence data " " " 7-237 .PROGRAM CREATION 7 (b) Data setting in shape sequence CW/CCW SHIFT(see figure above) FIG 5 PTN CW-SH (CCW-SH) X " Y " R/th r I i J j P p CNR " R-FEED " RGH " Use LINE. REP-EN " " " " " " " " " ": Data are not necessary to be set here. 50. 105.4 " " " FIN-R 0. 75. SRV-Z 10. R1 F2 FIG 1 2 3 4 5 UNIT LINE OUT TOOL END MILL END MILL PTN CW-SH LINE CW CW REP-EN DEPTH 10. J P R-FEED RGH Enter the Y coordinate of the center to rotate a defined shape (j). " SRV-R 10. CW ARC or CCW ARC to enter a defined shape. select the [ ? ] menu key. Specify the roughing feedrate.6 DEP-Z 9. APRCH-Y ? ? R/th 30. I Enter the X coordinate of the center to rotate a defined shape (i). 45. 90. CW ARC or CCW ARC to enter a defined shape. P times Defined shape M3P323 (a) Menu selection Press the [SHAPE SHIFT] menu key.7 PROGRAM CREATION 5. 7-238 . Cursor position P Description Specify the number of repetitions (p) for a defined shape. SHAPE SHIFT The end point will be regarded as the next start point. (b) Data setting in shape sequence SHAPE SHIFT (see figure above) FIG 6 PTN FIG-SH X " " Y " " R/th " " I " " J " " P p " CNR " " R-FEED " " RGH " " Use LINE. REP-EN " : Data are not necessary to be set here. PROGRAM CREATION 7 (c) REPEAT END Press the [REPEAT END] menu key and a shape sequence of SHAPE SHIFT will be brought to the end. 150. " SRV-Z 5. 0.066 M M M CNR R-FEED RGH ← Shape sequence data " " " " " " " 7-239 . NOM-φ No. DEP-Z 5. 0.A X " 50. Example: 100 [1] Y 50 X Workpiece zero point 10 Start point 50 150 10 [2] [3] [4] M3P324 UNo. 10. 140. " WID-R " " START CLOSED C-SP 17 " END CLOSED FR 0. 90. 100. APRCH-X ? Y " 0. " SRV-R 5. R1 FIG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 UNIT LINE CTR TOOL END MILL PTN FIG-SH LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE REP-EN DEPTH 5. APRCH-Y ? R/th " I RGH 1 TYPE " J " " ZFD G01 P 4 FIN-Z 0. 1 SNo. 50. 50. Point-of-Intersection X. Y coordinates of a point of intersection are unknown as illustrated above. Y 20. 7-20 Function of automatically calculating a point of intersection After checking the plane. Note: When unknown X.4 20. ? 20. Y coordinates Even if X. R/th I J P CNR 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 30. the NC system will automatically obtain it from the coordinates of the start and end points and from angles involved. Y 20. 100. do not fail to enter P. (Select the position of point of intersection. return to the PROGRAM display again and the numeric value so automatically obtained as a point of intersection will be displayed in yellow. 72. ? 150. FIG PTN X 50. Y coordinates of a point of intersection are automatically obtained in a combination of a line with an arc or of two arcs. 1. 140. Start point Y 20 X 50 Workpiece zero point 150 30° 100° M3P325 Fig.) 7-240 .7 PROGRAM CREATION C. FIG PTN X 50. 100. Function of automatically calculating a point of intersection Automatically calculating a point of intersection in the function for the NC system is to compute unknown coordinates of a point of intersection on an arbitrary form and to automatically enter the result in a program. R/th I J P CNR 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE Displayed in yellow 30. 150. 200. 125 20 LEFT or DOWN (?. 40. LINE | ARC (Contacting) 50 150 20 (120. 80) FIG PTN X 50. 20. Y 20. ? 200. ? 150. press the[RIGHT] or [UP] menu key. ? 20. ? ) R: 30 Shape sequence 30° FIG PTN X 50. ? 150. Y 20. 0) 30° (200. ? ) 120° LINE | LINE 20 50 150 M3P327 ( ?. 120. If the point of intersection at right is the desired one. 2. Y 20 ? ? R/th I J P CNR 1 LINE 2 INE 3 CW M3P329 30. ? 20. line with arc and arc with arc as shown in the examples below. compare the positions of two points. R/th I J P CNR 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 CW 30. ? 20. L 7-241 . 80. 20 ) M3P326 Remark: To find a point of intersection with the automatic intersection point calculation function. 120. Y 20. 20) FIG 1 2 3 M3P328 PTN LINE LINE CW X 50. R/th I J P CNR 30. 80. LEFT or DOWN R: 80 LINE | ARC (Intersecting) 50 20 (200. R/th I J P CNR 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 30. ?) Y 20 X Workpiece zero point 50 125 30° (125. Examples of automatic intersection point calculation A point of intersection is automatically calculated for combinations of line with line. ? 165. Pattern Shape ( ?.PROGRAM CREATION 7 FIG PTN X 50. 20 ) RIGHT or UP R: 40 (165. 20. $: Both X and Y coordinates are not known (i. 5) 10. ?) g2 (20. ?) R:10 (55. 20. 55. ? ? ? ? 10. ?) g3 ARC | LINE | ARC FIG R:15 (55. 5) g2 (?. 5. 5) 2 3 4 75. ? 55. 10. 45. 15. 5. (40. ? ? R/th I J P CNR 1 LINE 2 CW 3 CCW 15. ?) M3P331 PTN X 10. ?) (25. R:10 R:15 (60. 5) R:10 R:4 ARC | ARC M3P330 FIG 1 CW PTN X ? ? Y ? ? R/th 10. 5. 25. I J P U D CNR R4 R4 20. 5. j in the case of the center of an arc). 15. g4 (?. 45. Y 5. j in the case of the center of an arc). 40.7 PROGRAM CREATION Pattern Shape Shape sequence Closed R:4 R:15 (20. 5. ? D Closed (?. 5. ?) M3P332 Open R:45 FIG 1 PTN LINE CW CCW CCW X Y R/th I J P CNR ARC | ARC | ARC 5 10 (20. M3P333 #: Both X and Y coordinates are known (i. 15. 5) (45. 5. ?) g3 (75. 60. 5) R:10 g5 (?. 5) 2 CW Open R:15 FIG 5 10 (?. 7-242 . 5. 5. ?) (?. 5) PTN LINE CW LINE CCW X ? ? ? ? Y ? ? ? ? R/th I J P CNR 1 2 3 4 10. select one of the surface roughness codes indicated on the machining drawing. Ff1 = U19 × Kf × Z K32 Ff1 U19 Kf Z : : : : : Parameter used to set a reference diameter for the feedrate of finishing during milling Radial-direction finishing feedrate Parameter used to set a feedrate for reference degree of surface roughness (∇∇4) Feed factor Number of teeth of the tool Each surface roughness code and feed factor are correlated as follows: Surface roughness Kf ∇ 1 K0/0...625) ∇∇∇ 4 K0 (0.. one can have: In case of D < K32. LINE OUT and LINE IN units..164) Reference value: K0 = 0. The following menu will be displayed: ∇ 1 ∇ 2 ∇ 3 ∇ 4 ∇∇ 5 ∇∇ 6 ∇∇ 7 ∇∇∇ 8 ∇∇∇ 9 2) Next. Ff2 = Ff1 × Ff2 : K23 : K32 100 Axial-direction finishing feedrate Factor to set an axial direction feedrate .781) ∇∇∇ 3 K0/0. If the diameter of the tool to be used is taken as D.84 (0.If a surface roughness code is to be selected: The code can be entered either by setting the desired code number directly with numerical keys or using the following procedure: 1) First... 7-243 .256) ∇∇∇∇ 8 K0 × 0.82 (0.32) ∇∇∇ 7 K0 × 0.. Ff1 = U19 × D × Kf × Z K32 In case of D ≥ K32..83 (0.. LINE LFT. The following menu will be displayed when the cursor is placed at this item: ROUGHNES FEEDRATE / rev . and direct setting of any desired feedrate.. CAUTION # This item can be set for LINE CTR.5 The axial-direction finishing feedrate is calculated from the following expression automatically. set the desired value (finishing feedrate in radial-direction)... The finishing feedrate in radial direction is calculated from the following expression automatically.. the NC unit automatically calculates the appropriate feedrate for the selected surface roughness code)...5) ∇∇∇ 5 K0 × 0..85 (0... press the [ROUGHNES] menu key. LINE RGT.82 (0.8 (0.If a feedrate is to be directly set: After pressing the [FEEDRATE/rev] menu key.8 (0...83 (0..4) ∇∇∇ 6 K0 × 0. from the above menu. finishing is done at the feedrate that was set for tool sequence data item FR.. For setting a finishing feedrate.. The axial-direction finishing feedrate is calculated from the above expression automatically.205) ∇∇∇∇ 9 K0 × 0.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Remark 1: Roughness Set a finishing feedrate appropriate for particular surface roughness.977) ∇ 2 K0/0.. # During sequences having no data set for this item. two methods are available: selection of a surface roughness code (for this case. E31 Amount of protrusion = Tool diameter × 10 7-244 . FIG 1 PTN LINE X Y R/th I J P CNR ATTRIB OPEN FR Amount of protrusion Open shape Amount of protrusion D740PA062 The amount of protrusion is automatically determined by a parameter.Pressing the [CORNER CHAMFER] menu key changes the menu to reverse display mode and then setting data returns the menu to the original display mode. [Fixed form] corner C of the square [Arbitrary form] corner C of the end point End point Corner C Corner C Corner C Corner C Corner C . Remark 3: Shape of open pocket For pocket milling units. .R machining (rounding) : Set data as it is. an open attribute can be specified for each side of any shape. as described below.C chamfering: Set data after pressing the [CORNER CHAMFER] menu key. pocket milling-mountain units and pocket milling-valley units. [Fixed form] corner R of the square [Arbitrary form] corner R of the end point End point Corner R Corner R Corner R Corner R Corner R .7 PROGRAM CREATION Remark 2: Corner Set the machining pattern for the corner. ..... RETURN Zero point .......... ATC WORK Ｎｏ. 1: After returning the tool.. 1......... ◆ is displayed and no data can be entered.. it is regarded that 1 has been set.. Menu selection Press the [END] menu key.. CONTI... " is displayed and no data can be entered.... Set the address for the axis and coordinate value using the numerical keys..... 7-245 .. Note 2: If 1 is set in CONTI.... Tool returns to the user-specified position Specify the Work No.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-9 End Unit This unit is set at the end of the program. Note 1: If no data is set... Specify whether the next program is to be executed or not... DATA1 to DATA9 Specify the returning position.... 2: After the axes movement. Specify the returning positon after machining. Note: When this unit is specified in the middle of a program. ! DATA7 ! DATA8 ! EXECUTE ! DATA9 ! Cursor position Specify if the program is repeated or not.. Specify the ATC movement at the end of machining. or Work No..... Note: When 1 is set in CONTI. of the program to be executed next...... EXECUTE Note: When 1 is set in CONTI......... Data setting in the end unit UNo. DATA1 ! CONTI...... . is not specified. the part of the program after the unit thus specified is not executed...... 0: No repetition 1: Repetition Description Specify if the number of executions of the program is displayed or not by the counter on the POSITION display.. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END MEASURE SHAPE CHECK 2... Tool returns to the machine zero point Fixed point . ! DATA2 ! DATA3 ! NUMBER ! DATA4 ! ATC ! DATA5 ! RETURN ! DATA6 ! WORK No..... 0: The tool is not returned.. the tool is returned.. the axes are moved. NUMBER 0: No display 1: Display Note: The number of target times is entered in the POSITION display.. This unit indicates the end of the program concerned. Tool returns to the fixed point Arbitrary . Moreover. the cumulative value can be reset to zero.. UNIT END SNo... ◆ is displayed and no data can be entered....... ! M1 ! M2 ! M3 ! M4 ! M5 ! M6 ! M7 ! M8 ! M9 ! M10 M11 M12 ! ! ! Cursor position Description Specify the priority machining number (prior machining. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK (2) Press the [OTHER] menu key. No. subsequent machining). Menu selection Press the [M CODE] menu key. CHANGE ASSIGN ( ) PRI. No. SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END (3) Press the menu key for the intended special mode unit. For details. There are the following three entry methods: . No. “PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-10 Special Mode Unit This unit serves to control a special movement other than machining. 7-10-1 Procedure for calling up the special mode unit (1) Press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu keys). SUB PROG ALL ERAS PROC END No.? DELAY PRIORITY PRI. Data setting in M-code unit UNo. 7-10-2 M-code unit This is for making the machine execute a special movement other than machining. PRI. The following menu will be displayed. # M CODE The following menu will be displayed.Without entry: ordinary machining Note: For details. 1. The respective movement (operations) are numbered. Permissible input range (0 to 99) .” 7-246 . M CODE SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END 2. . Permissible input range (0 to 99) MACHINING PRIORITY No. UNIT M-CODE No.Subsequent machining number: To be entered by means of numeric keys after having pressed the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu key. refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.Prior machining number: To be entered by means of numeric keys. refer to Chapter 8. Menu selection Press the [SUB PROGRAM] menu key. Pressing the [ >>> ] menu key changes the menu a → b → c → a in this order. The subprogram can be used both in the MAZATROL program and in the EIA/ISO program. M CODE SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END 7-247 . enter the number of required M-code by referring to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List using the numeric key. M91 and M92 command cannot be given in the same block. However. 01 OPT.PROGRAM CREATION 7 Cursor position Description Specify the desired operation during the machining of a workpiece. Note 2: When M-code mirror image command is given. it is desirable to prepare and call up a special program for this movement with this subprogram unit. Moreover. 03 SPNDL 04 SPNDL 05 SPNDL 07 MIST 08 FLOOD 09 OFF 50 AIR 51 THR STOP FWD REV STOP COOLANT COOLANT COOLANT BLAST COOLANT >>> a 00 PROG 19 SPNDL 35 T-BRK STOP ORIENT DETECT >>> b >>> c M1 to M12 For the M-codes other than those of the displayed menu. the call of the subprogram is called Nesting. In this case. M92 command in M5 to M8 respectively. the maximum number of nesting is nine for the MAZATROL program and eight for the EIA/ISO program. 7-10-3 Subprogram unit When the same movement is repeated in a machining process or when a common movement is used in several programs. 1. The M-codes you have set are executed in the following order: M1 *** M2 *** M3 *** M4 *** M5 *** M6 *** M7 *** M8 *** M9 *** M10 *** M11 *** M12 *** (1) (Synchronous) (2) (Synchronous) (3) (Synchronous) Note 1: When the M-code is not entered under the M-code unit. the alarm 616 DATA ERROR IN M CODE UNIT will be displayed. the calling side is referred to as the Main program and the called side is referred to as the Subprogram. Give M91 command in M1 to M4. Description of the user macroprogram . the subprogram will be performed only one time. ARGM 1 to ARGM 6 Enter the data corresponding to the address by means of numeric keys. Enter the number of repetitions of the specified subprogram.Calling up the EIA/ISO programs . Description Enter the work number of the subprogram to be used by means of numeric keys. it is executed once. N. Use the [MEASURE MACRO] menu key only when the coordinates stored within the basic coordinates unit of the MAZATROL program is to be rewritten using a user macroprogram. but that specified in the subprogram is only valid in the said-subprogram. At the time of return to the main program. the auxiliary coordinates system and basic coordinates system in the main program become void. O and P cannot be used as address of the argument. UNIT SUB PRO SNo. G. . the auxiliary coordinates system which was valid before the use of the subprogram. Note 3: Even when 0 is selected for the number of repetitions of the subprogram.7 PROGRAM CREATION 2. refer to the Programming Manual for EIA/ISO Programming. Data setting in subprogram unit UNo. Note: If no value has been entered.Rewriting the basic coordinates system of the MAZATROL program 7-248 . becomes valid. L. Note 4: For details concerning the following items. 1 ARGM 1 ! WORK No. ! ARGM 2 ! REPEAT ! ARGM 3 ! ARGM 4 ! ARGM 5 ! ARGM 6 ! Cursor position WORK No. Note 2: When the basic coordinates system is entered again in the subprogram. REPEAT Enter the address of the argument using the alphabet key. Note 1: The auxiliary coordinates system specified in the main program is also valid in the subprogram. 999 Specify the rotational angle for the table rotational axis (C-axis) in the workpiece coordinates system.999 SHIFT-Y SHIFT-Z SHIFT-C SHIFT-A ROT. and thus simplifies programming. 7-249 . Menu selection Press the [WPC SHIFT] menu key. to the basic coordinate shift unit. Set the angle using the numeric keys.-th ! Description Enter the amount of shift from the reference origin (WPC) in the X-axial direction to the program origin.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-10-4 Basic coordinate shift unit (option) To calculate the coordinates of the plane-by-plane program origins for machining multi-plane workpieces using a machine equipped with a tilt table. Permissible input range: 0 to ±9999. as shown in the table below.-th 2. Permissible input range: 0 to ±99999. Automatic program origin coordinate calculation Automatic calculation of the program origin for the plane indexed to the top face is possible by assigning the amount of shift from the reference origin (WPC) to the program origin of that plane. programming is a very time-consuming task since each plane must be indexed to the top face for measurement. Two methods are available to enter the angle: 1. Permissible input range: 0 to ±9999. Select the [AUTO SET] menu function. However. Data setting in basic coordinate shift unit UNo.999 Enter the amount of shift from the reference origin (WPC) in the Y-axial direction to the program origin. The reference origin (WPC) always refers to the basic coordinates system unit that was last registered before the basic coordinate shift unit was set.-th will be auto-set according to the particular value of SHIFT-A.-th 180° 0° An alarm will be displayed if a value is not assigned to SHIFT-A. to this basic coordinate shift unit. Permissible input range: 0 to ±99999. UNIT WPCSHIFT Cursor position SHIFT-X SHIFT-X ! SHIFT-Y ! SHIFT-Z ! SHIFT-C ! SHIFT-A ! ROT. 1. SHIFT-A SHIFT-A < 0 0 ≤ SHIFT-A Note: Auto-set value of ROT. Permissible input range: 0 to ±999.999 Specify the rotational angle for the tilt axis (A-axis) in the workpiece coordinates system. 3.999 Specify the angle through which the workpiece coordinates system on the X-Y plane after the plane to be machined has been indexed is to be rotated for returning the coordinate system to the required direction for machining. automatic calculation of the program origin for the plane indexed to the top face is possible by assigning the amount of shift from the reference origin (WPC) to the program origin of that plane. ROT. Permissible input range: 0 to ±99999. M CODE SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END 2. This makes it unnecessary to index the intended plane to the top face for measuring the coordinates of the program origin.999 Enter the amount of shift from the reference origin (WPC) in the Z-axial direction to the program origin. 2 WPCSHIFT (SHIFT-X. Z 0. The coordinates of the program origin are calculated automatically. 7-21 Sample program that uses basic coordinate shift unit Reference origin A Point B (X. 7-21 and “Point B” in Fig. Y –150. Z) Point B Point B Z Y X (a) Table rotation 180° (b) Table rotation –45° (c) The coordinates of the program origin (i. use the indexing unit as before. 7-22. SHIFT-Z)” in Fig. Reference origin (point A) See (a) in the figure below. See Item 4. UNo. 2 UNIT WPC-1 UNIT WPCSHIFT X –200. Y. SHIFT-X 0. Note 1: After the basic coordinate shift unit has been set. SHIFT-A –45. 1 UNo. operation proceeds on the coordinate system that has been determined by the above automatic calculation. Measure the coordinates of the reference origin (WPC) and set the basic coordinates system unit. Note 2: The plane to be machined is not indexed by a basic coordinate shift unit.and Caxial coordinates).7 PROGRAM CREATION The procedure for creating a sample program that automatically calculates the coordinates of the program origin is shown below. SHIFT-C)” in Fig. 1 WPC-1” in Fig. 2.. X-. in terms of the amount of shift (A. 2 WPCSHIFT (SHIFT-A. 4. 7-22 Machining coordinate index process 7-250 . SHIFT-Z –50. the machine coordinates at position B) are calculated according to: C-axial 180 deg rotation from (a) to (b) A-axial –45 deg rotation from (b) to (c). A 0. 7-22. See “UNo. 7-21 and “Reference origin A” in Fig. Assign to the basic coordinate shift unit the amount of shift (i.e. ROT. 7-22.-th” (rotational angle) in the basic coordinate shift unit. 5. 3. Point B (= WPC-1 + WPCSHIFT) See (a) to (c) in the figure below. Amount of shift from point A (basic coordinate shift unit) Fig.e. SHIFT-Y. SHIFT-Y –50. Specify in the basic coordinate shift unit the angle through which the table is to be rotated for indexing the intended plane to the top face. 7-22. and Z-axial coordinates) from the reference origin (WPC) to the program origin of the plane to be machined. for details.. C 0. Coordinate rotating function. To perform the index operation. Fig. th 0. The coordinates in this coordinate system are valid until the next basic coordinates system unit and/or basic coordinate shift unit has been set. See “UNo. 7-21 and “(b) and (c)” in Fig. SHIFT-C 180. See “UNo.-th 180. Y-. Set “ROT. See “Point B” in Fig. 1. Y –200. However. Set the basic coordinate shift (ROT. SHIFT-C 180.. Z 0.-th 180. 7-251 . 7-24 (a) is the program coordinate system for one side. 1 UNo. 7-24 (b).e. i.PROGRAM CREATION 7 4. Coordinate rotational angle: The program coordinates system is rotated about the Z-axis of the actual coordinate system with the program origin as its center. 2 UNIT WPC-1 UNIT WPCSHIFT X –200. th 0. the indexing of that side to the top face will orient the program coordinate system in the direction opposite to that of the coordinate system actually used during machining. SHIFT-Z –200. the program coordinate system will change to the state shown in Fig. and if the plane is machined under this state. A sample program for performing the coordinate rotating function is shown below. the machining operation will take place in the same coordinate system F as the actual coordinate system. Coordinate rotating function When the program is created on one side.-th) so as to ensure that the direction of the coordinate system existing after the plane to be machined has been indexed to the top face. SHIFT-X 0. 7-24 Coordinate rotational view Coordinate system E in Fig. SHIFT-Y 0.. 7-23 Basic coordinate shift unit Z Z Y X Program coordinate system E Y X Actual coordinate system Y X X Y Program coordinate system E’ Coordinate rotational angle Coordinate system F (a) (b) Fig. 7-24 (b). SHIFT-A –90. i.e. the direction of coordinate system F in Fig. 7-24 (b) is matched to the direction of the coordinate system actually used during machining. C 0. ROT. 7-23 above. setting the basic coordinate shift unit (ROT. A 0. the direction of coordinate system E’ in Fig. Fig. UNo.-th) makes the coordinate rotating function rotate the program coordinate system to ensure that this coordinate system matches to the direction of the coordinate system actually used during machining. When this side is indexed to the top face. Coordinate system E’ obtained by rotating the above coordinate system through 180 degrees can be used as the program coordinate system by specifying the coordinate rotational angle value shown in Fig. UNIT SHIFT-X 7 WPCSHIFT 100. SHIFT-A –45. EXECUTE FR M M 1. Y –165. TURN POS Z 0. 150. 1 UNo. 90. X –200. 25 0. C-SP FR M M M 20 0. R1 FIG 1 MAT S45C UNIT INDEX UNIT WPC-1 UNIT POCKET TOOL E-MILL PTN SQR INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG 50. SHIFT-Z –50. 0. 9. 5. TOOL DEPTH NOM-φ No. SHIFT-C 180. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF 6 DRILLING 10. 90.C 0. OPEN SNo. 100 DRILL T9. 90. PITCH-X " PITCH-Y " ANGLE A 0.C 180. TURN POS Z 0. 10. R5.WPC TURN POS Y 0. LINE 5 UNo. 20. TURN DIR. 5. 1 0. 10.7 PROGRAM CREATION 5. SNo.771 TURN POS Z 0. 10 UNIT END CONT.123 Z –30. R5. M M UNo. 0 2 2 UNo. NOM-φ No. " P1X/CX P1Y/CY P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 10. 0 NUMBER 0 ATC 0 RETURN WORK No. 0. Reference origin α DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF 5. 50. 50. 5. TURN DIR. 0 OFF " TURN POS X 0. TURN POS Y 0. 8 UNIT INDEX SHIFT-Y –50.132 P Q R 0 0 0 Amount of shift (α → program origin γ) TURN POS X 0. LINE 4 20. ADD. 5 UNIT INDEX Amount of shift (α → program origin β) TURN POS X 0. LINE 2 90. ROT.-th 180.5 58 1. END OPEN C-SP 58 CNR UNo.555 A 0. Sample program The following shows a sample machining program that uses the basic coordinate shift unit: Machine zero point Work image Reference origin (WPC) α Program origin β Program origin γ 50 100 50 50 200 45° 200 200 Unit: mm UNo. UNIT SHIFT-X 4 WPCSHIFT 0. C 0. 10. SHIFT-C 180. TURN DIR.C –90. TOOL ZFD DEP-Z WID-R NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE R1 E-MILL 25. 20. SHIFT-Y –50. 90° CTR-D " " " 2 DRILL 10. R5. UNo. 1 1 0. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH 1 CTR-DR 10. 17. LINE 1 20. 0. 150. 0. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH FIN-Z START 9 LINE CTR 5. SHIFT-A –90. TURN POS Y 0. LINE 3 90. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M 25. 0. ANGLE A 180. 3 SNo. FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 T1 T2 F M N 1 SQR 0. 0. R5. 2 UNo.-th 180. M 7-252 . ROT. UNo. UNo. 10. ANGLE A –45. 1 G01 5. th 0. 0. 50. 1 CW G01 5. 0. 0 UNo. SHIFT-Z –150. " " FIG PTN X Y R/th I J P 20. as with “th” of the basic coordinates system unit. specify the basic coordinates system unit in the subprogram as well. When the basic coordinates system unit (WPC) is not assigned. 7-253 . 3.PROGRAM CREATION 7 6. the basic coordinate shift data within the subprogram will not be taken over to the main program. A) and basic coordinate shift-A (WPCSHIFT. For further details.5) in the EIA/ISO subprogram is recommended in that case. however.-th on the basic coordinate shift unit specified in the main program is invalid. even after control has been returned to the main program.) There is no problem. Specifying a coordinate system rotate command (G92. If the basic coordinate shift unit alone is specified in the MAZATROL subprogram. In an EIA/ISO subprogram. observe the following four precautions: 1. the rotational angle value ROT. if “0” is assigned to basic coordinates-A and any other value is assigned to basic coordinate shift-A so as to shift the A-axis using the shifting function or if a value other than “0” is assigned to basic coordinates-A and a value is not assigned to basic coordinate shift-A so as not to shift the A-axis. the amount of shift from the machine zero point will be used. Therefore. The correct program zero point cannot be calculated if basic coordinates-A (WPC. A) are both assigned a value other than “0”. Precautions When using the basic coordinate shifting function. (The correct program zero point cannot be calculated since the data in basic coordinates-A will be allowed for during the “automatic program origin coordinate calculation” process of the basic coordinate shifting function. 2. refer to the Programming Manual for EIA/ISO Programming. 4. Data setting in pallet changing unit UNo. “PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL. refer to Chapter 8. ! ( ! ) Cursor position PALLET No. ( ) Description Enter the number of the pallet on which the machining will be performed. Enter the number of pallet to be changed later. For details. use the pallet changing unit in principle.” Note 2: The pallet number presently located on the table is displayed on the POSITION display. PALLET No. by means of numeric keys. this entering is only possible for the preparation specifications of the following pallet.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-10-5 Pallet changing unit This is the unit for changing the pallet. 3. Menu selection Press the [PALLET CHANGE] menu key. However. 7-254 . by means of numeric keys. In order to change the pallet in the program containing the priority function for the same tool. UNIT PALT CHG PALLET No. Note 1: The entering of this unit results in the delimiting of the range of priority numbers. the ATC for the tool to be used next is executed at the same time as the execution of the pallet change. 1. M CODE SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END 2. Simultaneous movement of pallet change and ATC With the parameter L49 = 1. Menu selection Press the [INDEX] menu key. Enter the indexing angle c. Note 2: In the case of the M-code indexing table. Enter the Y coordinate of the table rotation position on the basis of the machine coordinates system by means of numeric keys. program with the M-code unit. 1. the execution of the indexing unit outputs the M-code (entered by the parameter L38) as many times as necessary until the table comes to the specified position. then indexing unit will be executed as appropriate according to the particular operation of that unit. which will use the tool. If the indexing unit is programmed to be followed by other unit than that mentioned above.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-10-6 Indexing unit This unit serves to control the angle of the surface to be machined on the machine with an indexing table or an NC (numerically controlled) rotating table (function of the 4th axis). or the end unit is to follow. ANGLE A Note 1: If the machining unit. it is impossible to control the table by this indexing unit. When the function of priority for the same tool is used on each surface. such as an M-code unit. then that unit will be actually executed first. M CODE SUB PROGRAM WPC SHIFT PALLET CHANGE INDEX PROCESS END 2. 7-255 . The number of outputs is determined by the minimum indexing angle (entered by the parameter L37). use this unit for controlling the angle. Note: Specify an absolute value in the workpiece coordinate system. Note: Specify an absolute value in the workpiece coordinate system. Note 3: In the case of the M-code indexing table in which one indexing movement requires more than one M-code or for which the program is executed step by step by M-code coming from the Numerical Control through a programmable controller located on the indexing side. Enter the Z coordinate of the table rotation position on the basis of the machine coordinates system by means of numeric keys. UNIT INDEX TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE C ! ! ! ! ANGLE A ! Cursor position TURN POS X TURN POS Y TURN POS Z ANGLE C Description Enter the X coordinate of the table rotation position on the basis of the machine coordinates system by means of numeric keys. In this case. Enter the indexing angle A. Data setting in indexing unit UNo. rotation of the table and ATC are executed simultaneously after movement to the indexing position. rotation of the table and ATC are executed simultaneously. (2) Press the menu selector key (key located at the right of the menu keys) and display the following editing menu. (When this line is to be the upper line of the useful scope.) SNo. Simultaneous movement of table rotation indexing and of ATC By entering 1 or 2 to parameter L41.. enter the indexing unit before the pallet changing unit and specify the indexing angle which permits changing of the pallet.. UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR . UNIT . Note 1: In the case of the simultaneous execution of the rotation of the table and the ATC. 1 UNo. the entering of data is only possible in the article TURN POS X of the indexing unit. it is possible to perform the simultaneous rotation of the table and the ATC. The entering of data for the Y-axis and the Z-axis will cause an alarm.. Note 2: With parameter L41 = 1. INDEX UNo. .. 3. 7-10-7 Process end unit This serves to delimit the useful scope of the priority number. . movement to the indexing position. it is possible that the table pivots to a position different from the rotation position specified by the indexing unit. (1) Move the cursor at the line (upper line) that delimits the useful scope of the priority number. 1 Enter the value 0 if the changing of the pallet is possible with the indexing table being at 0°... With the parameter L41 = 1. . 7-256 . set 0 at parameter L38... PROGRAM SEARCH CALCULAT COMPLETE TPC INSERT ERASE SHAPE COPY UNIT COPY PROGRAM COPY HELP (3) Press the [INSERT] menu key and the input key INPUT .7 PROGRAM CREATION Note 4: In order to change the pallet on a machine equipped with an indexing table. Example: UNo. UNIT BORE T1 ← Place the cursor on this line.. Note 5: Since rotary direction is unavailable for NC rotary specification machine. UNo.. UNIT PALT CHG ANGLE 0 PALLET No. With parameter L41 = 2. UNIT PROC END UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR .” 7-257 . 1 The upper limit of the useful scope is set as follows. UNIT PROC END UNIT BORE T1 . 1 UNIT PROC END UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR . # UNo. UNo. . UNo. UNo. # UNo. (5) Move the cursor at the line (lower line) that delimits the useful scope of the priority number. refer to Chapter 8. “PRIORITY FUNCITON FOR THE SAME TOOL. place the cursor on the next line. . UNo. . Scope of priority number for the same tool UNo. Note 2: For details. SNo. . UNo. . (6) Insert the PROCESS END unit by the same operation as (2) to (4). UNo. UNIT BORE T1 ← When this line is to be the lower line of the useful scope. 1 The lower limit of the useful scope is set as follows. . UNIT PROC END UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR . . . SNo. SNo. UNIT BORE T1 UNo. . Note 1: The scope of the priority number can also be delimited by entering of the pallet changing unit. .PROGRAM CREATION 7 (4) Press the [PROCESS END] menu key in the menu. . . No.7 PROGRAM CREATION 7-11 Manual Program Mode Unit This unit serves for programming in detail each of the movement of the machine. No.? DELAY PRIORITY PRI.9 . POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK 7-11-2 Structure of the unit 1. Input range: 0 to 99 . “PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL. Determine the priority machining number (prior machining.Priority No. . [FACE MILL]. for subsequent machining: Press the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu key. . subsequent machining). For details. SUB PROG ALL ERAS PROC END No.Priority No. PRI. No. The machining order is not specified. Data setting in manual program mode unit UNo. Note: When one of the menu keys [END MILL]. The identification code is selected from the menu: A B C D E F G H HEAVY TOOL >>> NOM-φ .BAR VACUUM >>> TOOL a >>> b Note: The tool number will be 0 if no tool selection is made. The input of data is done in accordance with the following 3 methods.In the case of the identical designation and length but of different materials. ! Cursor position Description Select menu key corresponding to the tool used.1 to 999. Enter the nominal diameter of the tool by means of numeric keys. Input range: 0 to 99 MACHINING PRIORITY No. ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL CUTTER ENDMILL CENTER DRILL DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER FACER OTHER TOOL TAP TOUCH SENSOR BORING BACK CHIP BAR BOR. the alarm 434 NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE is displayed if the selected tool has not been previously recorded in the TOOL FILE display. refer to Chapter 8.In order to designate the heavy tool. Pressing the [ >>> ] menu key changes the menu a → b → a in this order.” 7-258 . it is necessary to differentiate them by identification code. for prior machining: Enter the number by means of numeric keys. select the desired menu item after having displayed the menu for heavy tool identification code by pressing the [HEAVY TOOL] menu key. CHANGE ASSIGN ( ) PRI. then enter the number by means of numeric keys.Without input: Normal machining. [CHAMFER CUTTER] and [BALL ENDMILL] is selected in the article TOOL. UNIT MANL PRO TOOL ! NOM-φ ! No. Input range: 0. 7-11-1 Input procedure Press the [MANUAL PROGRAM] menu key. one sequence data line corresponds to one EIA/ISO program block. press the [B CODE INPUT] menu key and enter a numeric value. (G: 2 data. refer to the Programming Manual for EIA/ISO Programming. DATA 1 to DATA 6 X Y Z F R A C >>> a I J K P D >>> b After the address has been set. 3. the data set here will be handled as an argument. 1 G1 ! G2 ! DATA 1 ! DATA 2 ! DATA 3 ! DATA 4 ! DATA 5 ! DATA 6 ! S ! M/B ! Cursor position Description Enter the G-codes (preparetory function) by means of menu keys or numeric keys. Setting sequence data SNo.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-11-3 Composition of the sequence In the manual program mode unit. 2. For M-code. which limits the number of data which can be entered in one block. 1. S Enter the rotational speed of the spindle by means of numeric keys. Input range: 0 to 99999 Enter the M-code (auxiliary function) or the B-code (second auxiliary function. For the details of each of the commands. 2. 3 digits) by means of numeric keys. It is necessary to retain this in case of a command concerning the correction of the tool length. In the manual program unit. Select the address of the data to be entered from the following menus. S: 1 data. all entries are made with a decimal point except the entry of the F function in G94 mode. In the manual program mode. Difference between the Manual Program and the EIA/ISO Program The manual program can be prepared the same as the EIA/ISO program but with certain differences as shown below. the offset of the tool (G44) is automatically performed at the head of the program on one tool length registered in the TOOL FILE display. G00 G01 G02 G03 G1. 1. refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List. 2 Note: G40 CANCEL G41 LEFT G42 RIGHT G94 (/MIN) G95 (/REV) MANUAL END Up to two G-code commands can be designated in one sequence data line. M/B: 1 data. M/B For B-code setting. Pressing the [ >>> ] menu key changes the menu a → b → a in this order. 1 line of tool sequence data corresponds to one block of the EIA/ISO program. If the sequence data contains G65 in “G1” or “G2” item. 7-259 . Others: 6 data) The data to be entered in the items DATA 1 to DATA 6 are limited to those indicated in the menu for address input. enter and set data using the numeric keys. Moreover. 6. the designated feed value of F in the unit data will become blank (****). 5.7 PROGRAM CREATION 4. the tool is deviated on a distance entered in the article ACT-φ on the TOOL DATA display (on the nominal diameter in case of the data absence) when the tool diameter correction command (G41 or G42) is given. 7-260 . If the method of feed is modified from G94 to G95 or from G95 to G94. A MAZATROL program cannot be called up during designation of a subprogram call such as G65. In the manual program unit. Specify the surface coordinates to be measured by means of numeric keys. Data setting in MMS unit UNo. SKIP 0: Execution 1: Non-execution 7-12-3 Composition of the MMS sequence 1. UNIT MMS TOOL T. SENS NOM-φ ! U. U.and C-axial indexing position during measurement. “Type of measurement. refer to Subsection 7-12-6. Y. POINT LINE FACE MANUAL MACH-ING MACH-ING MACH-ING PROGRAM OTHER WPC OFFSET END WPC MSR SHAPE CHECK 7-12-2 Composition of the unit 1. C R Specify the measurment starting position.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-12 MMS Unit The MMS unit automatically compensates the workpiece coordinates system by performing the centering measurement in automatic operation mode. Specify the A. The measuring movement is performed by specifying the feeler (touch sensor) as a tool and the type of measurement. Description Enters the aproximate diameter of the point of feeler by means of numeric keys. SKIP ! $ Cursor position NOM-φ Specify the nominal diameter of the feeler. 7-12-1 Procedure for calling up the MMS unit (1) Select [WPC MSR] from the following menu. 7-261 .” X. 1 PTN ! X ! Y ! Z ! A ! C ! R ! D/L ! K ! Cursor position Description Select the type of measurement from the following menus. Setting MMS sequence data SNo. Z A. Specify whether the MMS unit is executed or not. X FACE Y FACE X-Y BOSS Z FACE X-Y-th CNR X GRV Y GRV X STP Y STP CALIBR. PTN END PTN END >>> a PTN X-Y BORE >>> b For details. Pressing the [ >>> ] menu key changes the menu a → b → a in this order. Note: The contents of the entry vary according to the type of measurement. all the types of measurement in the MMS unit [2] are executed according to the data of the basic coordinates unit [1]. Note 2: During the process of the measurement movement. the machining is performed according to the new system of basic coordinates (workpiece zero point) corrected in the MMS unit [2]. etc. R 0. Y -400 0. see Subsection 7-12-6. But the data of the basic coordinates unit [1] are rewritten for each type of measurement. 2 [2] SNo. “Type of measurement. 0. the MMS unit is only executed a first time. U. Note: The contents of the entry differ according to the type of measurement. the block by block stop and rapid feed deceleration are effective. Note 5: The compensation is made correctly even when the basic coordinates unit and the MMS unit are entered separately in the main program and in the subprogram. 0.7 PROGRAM CREATION Cursor position Description Specify the diameter of the hole. From unit [3]. Example: [1] UNo.5 A 0. by means of numeric keys. Note 1: The measurement movement is executed after the movement. D/L " " K " " th 0. C 0.or Caxis. NOM-φ 5. 1 UNo. but not the override of skip feed. on the A. Note 4: When the common unit contains the workpiece multi-piece machining command. the width of the projection. no measurements can be correctly performed if an angle has been set in article th of the basic coordinates unit. Z -500. Note 7: Before execution of the MMS unit turn off the symmetrical image function. 0.” D/L Specify the feed distance at skip speed by means of numeric keys. DEPTH 20. 7-262 . Note 6: Except for measurement of inclinations. 0. For details. the diameter of the boss. if any. Note 3: The MMS unit performs the movement in the initial basic coordinates system until the completion of all the types of measurement specified in the unit. Z -10. 1 2 [3] UNo. X -300. -10. The measurement movement after contact with the workpiece may not be correctly performed if the symmetrical image function is valid. -20.SENS X -20. the width of the groove. No. 3 UNIT FRM-0 UNIT MMS PTN X-FACE Y-FACE UNIT DRILLING UNIT TOOL T. KIP In the above example. Y 0. DIA 10. CHMF 0. A 0. C 0. K The term skip speed means the feed speed at the time when the probe comes into contact with the surface to be measured. Protruding section D735PG002 7-263 . (5) Send a protruding-section interference avoidance instruction from the feeler. move the cursor to the pocket number PKNo. Note: For random ATC specifications. Press the display selector key and [TOOL DATA] menu key in this order to select the TOOL DATA display. Measure the length of the feeler in the following manner: (1) Move the cursor to the tool number TNo. press the [MG DIR + +] menu key if the protruding section faces in the direction that the pocket number increases. or press the [MG DIR – – ] menu key if the protruding section faces toward pocket number reduction.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-12-4 Measurement of length of feeler in manual mode It is necessary to measure the length of the feeler in order to enter the data into the article LENGTH on the TOOL DATA display. of the magazine in which the feeler is to be mounted. (3) Press the [TOUCH SENSOR] menu key and enter data in NOM-φ and other fields. This section describes the tool length measurement in manual mode using the TEACH function on the TOOL DATA display. D740PA079E (4) If the feeler is of the protruding type (such as MP3). When mounting the feeler in the magazine. (2) Press the [EDIT] menu key first and then the [TOOLDATA ASSIGN] menu key. Skip to step (6) if the feeler is of a non-protruding type (such as MP10). mount the feeler directly in the magazine assuming the situation where the feeler is mounted in the spindle. of the tool data for which the feeler (touch sensor) is to be registered. In manual mode. In the case of horizontal type machine an edge locator is used for setting the reference surface. return the pulse generator handle through one graduation in the +Z direction. (11) Press the manual pulse feed key (0. Move the Z-axis slowly until the contact signal indicator (MMS) in the status display window has turned on. Contact signal indicator D740PA080 (8) After the indicator has lit. .Make sure that the feeler is mounted properly in the spindle. (13) Move the pulse generator handle through 10 graduations in a –Z direction.001). move the axes in order to bring the point of feeler to the upper face of the reference block or to a workpiece of which the height is known. Note 2: Pay extra careful attention to interference with fixtures. Move the Z-axis slowly until the contact signal indicator (MMS) in the status display window has turned on.01). then enter the tool number. and make sure that the indicator turns on. (10) After the indicator has lit. (12) After the indicator has lit. Move the Z-axis slowly until the contact signal indicator (MMS) in the status display window has turned on. Note 1: Remove chips and other foreign substances from the reference surface of the workpiece and the measuring surface to keep them clean. # The cursor appears in the article LENGTH on the display. return the pulse generator handle through 10 graduations in the +Z direction. 7-264 .1) in manual operation mode. (9) Press the manual pulse feed key (0. and press the input key INPUT . return the pulse generator handle through one graduation in a +Z direction. (15) Press the [TEACH] menu key.7 PROGRAM CREATION (6) Press the [TOOL CHANGE] menu key in MDI operation mode. (14) Call up the TOOL DATA display. (7) Press the manual pulse feed key (0. press the keys in the TOOL DATA display. # The NC equipment calculates the length of the feeler and the value thus obtained is automatically entered in the article LENGTH. 7-25 Correction of calibration measurement 7-265 . in the following order: the menu key [TEACH]. Horizontal type Operation (1) Distance from machine zero point to the actual position of the machine Distance from the machine zero point to the table (parameter L5) Table L5 Operation (2) Length of feeler Edge locator Distance from the table to the tip of the feeler Reference block or workpiece In this situation. 2 × Mx ex : Alignment deviation correction on X axis ey : Alignment deviation correction on Y axis Mx: Correction of the form of the point of feeler on X axis My: Correction of the form of the point of feeler on Y axis ey 2 × My ex Point of feeler Spindle center M3P337 Fig. etc. 0 and INPUT . Table M3P336’ Since the NC equipment memorizes the actual position of the machine. 7-12-5 Feeler calibration measurement The calibration measurement function serves to automatically record in the parameters the main measurement correction of the point of feeler such as the alignment deviation of the point of feeler and the tool shank (on X.PROGRAM CREATION 7 (16) Enter the height of the reference block or of the workpiece by means of numeric keys. the functional clearance and the inertia feed of the machine itself. the length of the feeler (distance from the table to the point of feeler) is automatically calculated if the height of the reference block or of the workpiece is specified. Y). (7) Measure the inside diameter of the master hole. and mount the feeler in the spindle. If the feeler cannot be rotated manually.7 PROGRAM CREATION The procedure of the calibration measurement is as follows: (1) Mount the stylus at the top of the feeler. Tighten the stylus with a wrench. and fix the block to the XY plane. (6) Have a reference block (with a 50 . and read the tester gauge indication of runout by manually rotating the feeler. D735PG003 (2) Rotate the feeler by hand and verify that the spindle is in a free status. 7-266 .100 mm diameter master hole) at hand. (4) Perform adjustments with the four bolts on both sides of the feeler body so that the runout indication stays within 10 µm. free the spindle by entering a spindle speed of 0 min–1 (rpm) in manual mode and then pressing the spindle startup button. Note: Do not rotate the spindle to avoid damaging the protruding section of the feeler. (3) Apply a pick tester to the leading end of the stylus. Set screw Runout: within 10 µm D735PG004 (5) Remove the feeler from the spindle. Contact signal indicator D740PA080 (13) Enter the Z coordinate of the spindle in the Z column of the WPC unit using the menu keys [WPC MSR]. Note 2: The precision of all measurements depends on the precision of this alignment. # Measurement and ATC operation (return to magazine) for the feeler are executed. (9) Prepare the calibration measurement program. [WPC SEARCH] and [TEACH] on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.PROGRAM CREATION 7 (8) Move the spindle to the central coordinates of the master hole (this moving operation is for centering. 7-267 . press the [CALIBR. refer to Chapter 9. . The same as for the general measurement program. refer to Chapter 9.For details. “COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION. then prepare the program.” (14) Select the automatic operation mode and start the calibration measurement program. .” (11) Mount the feeler on the spindle.] menu key. (10) Enter the X. (12) In manual mode.Move the Z-axis slowly until the contact light (MMS) lights. Y coordinates of the spindle axis in the X and Y articles of the WPC unit by using the menu keys [WPC MSR]. For details. “COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION.Thus. [WPC SEARCH] and [TEACH] on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display. the correction data is automatically entered in the parameters (L1 to L4). NM210-00548 Note 1: It must be correctly measured to within 1/1000 by means of a dial type comparator for measuring cylindricity. . move the axes in order to place the point of the feeler in contact with top of the workpiece having the reference hole. lever tester whirling must be within 4 µm). Y Specify the coordinates of the center of the hole based on the workpiece zero point (Basic coordinates).SKIP C 0 ATC A 0 RETURN $ R " WNo. Feed distance at skip speed (K = 2 to 5) Note 1: These corrections are essential data for ensuring the deviation of the system by the feeler. [3] X. D/L K Z C 0 A 0 MULTI-FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y [1] NOM-φ 5 Z [1] No. 0 UNo. but it must obligatorily be made when the feeler is used for the first time or when it is replaced by a new one. Coordinates of the center of the reference hole entered by operation (10). 1 UNo. [4] [5] [6] Z D/L K Specify the depth to which the point of feeler is inserted in the reference hole in order to make the measurement. measured by operation (7). 3 MAT FC UNIT FRM-0 UNIT MMS PTN CAL UNIT END ADD.SENS X Y INITIAL-Z 50. WPC ◆ TOOL T. 2 SNo. 0 because the workpiece zero point equals to the center of the reference hole. Specify the measurement value of the inside diameter of the reference hole. In this example. 7-268 . 1 UNo. X ATC MODE 0 Y MULTI-MODE OFF th 0 U. Y [2] Z Specify the Z coordinates of the workpiece zero point (Basic coordinates) in the machine coordinate system. [4] NUMBER 0 [5] [5] EXECUTE No.7 PROGRAM CREATION Example of calibration measurement program UNo. Inside diameter of the reference hole. Coordinates of the top of the reference hole entered by operation (12). [2] [3] 0 [3] CONTI. Note 2: The calibration measurement is not necessary for each deviation of the coordinates system. The precision of other measurements are influenced by the precision of the positioning of the machine itself and of this calibration measurement. Item Description Specify the X and Y coordinates of the workpiece zero point (Basic coordinates) in the machine coordinate system. [1] X. 1 PTN X-FACE X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R rx D/L ◆ K ◆ ": Data are not necessary to set here.Y reference face (Y-FACE) . Y and Z. SNo. .Z reference face (Z-FACE) A. Measurement of the reference surface The measurement of the reference surface is of three types: X. PTN END >>> 1. The six types of measurement available are described in the following descriptions 1 to 6: X FACE Y FACE Z FACE X GRV Y GRV X STP Y STP PTN END >>> [1] Reference face X-Y BORE ↑ [4] Boring center X-Y BOSS ↑ [5] Boss center X-Y-th CNR ↑ [6] Workpiece inclination [2] Groove center [3] Projection width CALIBR.PROGRAM CREATION 7 7-12-6 Type of measurement Select the type of measurement for the deviation of the coordinates system. X reference face The X-axial basic coordinate is corrected by entering the position of the X reference face in the workpiece coordinates system. 7-269 .X reference face (X-FACE) . 7-26 X reference face M3P338 [Measurement movement] [2] Movement to the initial point above the measurement start point [1] ATC for feeler Before measurement INITIAL-Z Movement to [3] measurement start point Surface of measurement X Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed [4] Measurement After measurement [6] Movement to the initial point above the measurement start point [7] Movement to the ATC position. then execution of ATC [5] Return to the measurement start point Surface of measurement X M3P339 Note 1: The X basic coordinate is corrected so that the X coordinate of the measurement surface is equal to the coordinate entered in rx when the feeler is moved to the initial point [6]. y1. Y. z1: Coordinates of measurement start point based on the workpiece zero point rx: Distance from workpiece zero point to X surface (Dimension shown on drawing) WPC-X. Note 2: The direction in which the measurement movement is made from the measurement start point depends on x1 and rx.7 PROGRAM CREATION x1 rx WPC-X Machine zero point WPC-Y Workpiece zero point y1 Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed (Measurement movement) Surface to be measured X Measurement start point ATC position WPC-Z INITIAL-Z Workpiece zero point z1 x1. 7-270 . Z: Basic coordinates (Workpiece zero point coordinates in the machine coordinates system) Measurement start point Fig. PROGRAM CREATION 7 rx x1 Workpiece zero point x1 < rx – X The measurement movement is executed in +X from the measurement start point. SNo. Z reference face The Z-axial basic coordinate ris corrected by entering the position of the Z reference face in the workpiece coordinates system. – X + Measurement start point M3P340 B. 7-271 . 1 PTN Z-FACE X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R rz D/L ◆ K ◆ ": Data are not necessary to set here. The movement is. 1 PTN Y-FACE X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ry D/L ◆ K ◆ ": Data are not necessary to set here. ry signifies the distance from the workpiece zero-point to the Y surface (dimension shown on the drawing). SNo. identical to that for the X reference face. in principle. + Measurement start point x1 rx Workpiece zero point x1 > rx The measurement movement is executed in –X from the measurement start point. C. Y reference face The Y-axial basic coordinate ris corrected by entering the position of the Y reference face in the workpiece coordinates system. when the feeler is moved to the initial point [6]. 7-27 Z reference face [Measurement movement] [2] Movement to the initial point above the measurement start point [1] ATC for feeler INITIAL-Z Before measurement Movement to the [3] measurement start point z1 Measurement [4] Z measurement surface Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed [7] Movement to the ATC position. Y. z1: Coordinates of measurement start point based on the workpiece zero point rz: Distance from workpiece zero point to Z surface (Dimension shown on drawing) WPC-X.7 PROGRAM CREATION WPC-X Machine zero point x1 Workpiece zero point y1 Measurement start point Machine zero point Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed (Measurement movement) WPC-Y WPC-Z INITIAL-Z Workpiece zero point z1 Measurement start point rz x1. y1. Z: Basic coordinates (Workpiece zero point coordinates in the machine coordinates system) M3P341 Fig. 7-272 . then execution of ATC INITIAL-Z After measurement Movement to the [6] initial point above the measurement start point z1 [5] Movement to the measurement start point Z measurement surface M3P342 Note: The Z basic coordinate is corrected so that the Z coordinate of the measurement surface is equal to the coordinate entered in rz. Groove center-X The X-axial basic coordinate is corrected by entering the position of the groove center in the workpiece coordinates system and the groove width. Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system) l Fig. Measurement of groove center The measurement from groove center is available in two types according to whether the direction of the groove width is on the X-axis or the Y-axis.Groove center-X (X-GRV) . . WPC-X x1 Machine zero point WPC-Y Workpiece zero point y1 Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed l Machine zero point ATC position WPC-Z x1: y1. 1 PTN X-GRV X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ◆ D/L l K k ": Data are not necessary to set here.Groove center-Y (Y-GRV) A. 7-28 Groove center-X M3P343 7-273 . SNo. z1: Distance of the workpiece zero point to the center of the groove on X (Dimension shown on drawing) Y and Z cordinates of the measurement start point based on the workpiece zero point k Workpiece zero point INITIAL-Z z1 Width of groove l: k: Feed distance at skip speed WPC-X. Y.PROGRAM CREATION 7 2. 1 PTN Y-GRV X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ◆ D/L l K k ": Data are not necessary to set here. then execution of ATC INITIAL-Z After measurement [7] Movement to the initial point [6] Movement to the measurement start point k z1 M3P344 Note: The X basic coordinate is corrected so that the coordinate of the center of the groove to be measured is equal to the coordinate entered in x1 when the feeler is moved to the initial point [7]. 7-274 .7 PROGRAM CREATION [Measurement movement] [1] ATC for feeler Movement to the measurement start point [3] Measurement of another side of the groove width [5] [2] Movement to the initial point above the measurement start point INITIAL-Z Before measurement [4] Measurement of one side of the groove width z1 Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed k k [8] Movement to the ATC position. in principle. y1 signifies the distance on Y from the workpiece zero-point to the center of the groove width (dimension marked on the drawing). The movement is. Groove center-Y The Y-axial basic coordinate is corrected by entering the position of the groove center in the workpiece coordinates system and the groove width. SNo. B. identical to that for the center of groove-X. 7-29 Projection width on X-axis 7-275 . z1: Distance of the workpiece zero point at the center of the projection on X (Dimension shown on drawing) Y and Z coordinates of the meas-urement start point based on the workpiece zero point z1 Width of projection l: k: Feed distance at skip speed WPC-X. 1 PTN X-STP X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ◆ D/L l K k ": Data are not necessary to set here. WPC-X x1 Machine zero point WPC-Y Workpiece zero point y1 Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed l Machine zero point x1: ATC position WPC-Z INITIAL-Z Workpiece zero point k l y1.PROGRAM CREATION 7 3. SNo. Projection width on X-axis (X-STP) Projection width on Y-axis (Y-STP) A. Projection width on X-axis The X-axial basic coordinate is corrected by entering the position of the projection center in the workpiece coordinates system and the projection width. Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system) M3P345 Fig. Measurement of center of projection width The measurement of the center of the projection width is available in two types according to whether the direction of the width of the projection is on the X-axis or on the Y-axis. Y. 7-276 . SNo. identical to that for the projection width on the X-axis. B. then execution of ATC INITIAL-Z After measurement [5] Movement to the measurement start point z1 k M3P346 Note: The X basic coordinate is corrected so that the coordinate of the center of the projection width to be measured is equal to the coordinate entered in x1 when the feeler is moved to the initial point [5]. Projection width on Y-axis The Z-axial basic coordinate ris corrected by entering the position of the projection center in the workpiece coordinates system and the projection width. 1 PTN Y-STP X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ◆ D/L l K k ": Data are not necessary to set here. The movement is.7 PROGRAM CREATION [Measurement movement] [2] Movement to the measurement start point [1] ATC for feeler INITIAL-Z Initial Before measurement [4] Measurement of another side of the projection [3] Measurement of one side of the projection z1 Rapid feed (G00) k k Skip feed [6] Movement to the ATC position. y1 signifies the distance on Y from the workpiece zero-point to the center of the projection width (dimension shown on the drawing). in principle. 1 PTN XY-HOL X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ◆ D/L d K k ": Data are not necessary to set here. Y. Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system) k d k M3P347 Fig. WPC-X Machine zero point x1 WPC-Y Workpiece zero point y1 Rapid feed (G00) d Machine zero point Skip feed WPC-Z x1. SNo. y1: Workpiece zero point INITIAL-Z z1 Distance of workpiece zero point at boring center on X and Y (Dimension shown on drawing) z1: Z coordinate of the measurement start point based on the workpiece zero point d: Boring diameter k: Feed distance at skip speed WPC-X. 7-30 Measurement of boring center 7-277 . Measurement of boring center (XY-HOL) The X and Y basic coordinates are corrected by entering the coordinates of the boring center in the workpiece coordinate system and also the boring diameter.PROGRAM CREATION 7 4. then measurement movement [4] and [5] on Y-axis [1] ATC for feeler INITIAL-Z [4]Measurement of one side of inside diameter z1 Before measurement [6] [5] Measurement of another side of inside diameter k k Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed [9] Movement to the ATC position. 1 PTN XY-BOS X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R ◆ D/L d K k ": Data are not necessary to set here. 7-278 . 5.7 PROGRAM CREATION [Measurement movement] Movement to the initial point above the measurement start point [2] Movement to the measurement [3] start point Movement to the measurement start point. Measurement of boss center (XY-BOS) The correction of the basic coordinates X and Y are done by entering the distance of the workpiece zero point at the boss center on X and Y and also the diameter of the boss. SNo. then execution of ATC INITIAL-Z After measurement [8] Movement to the initial point [7] Movement from the measurement surface on X to the measurement start point z1 M3P348 Note: The X and Y basic coordinates are corrected so that the X and Y coordinates of the boring center to be measured are equal to the coordinates x1 and y1 respectively when the feeler is moved to the initial point [8]. then execution of ATC [5] After measurement Movement of the measurement surface on Y-axis to measurement start point M3P350 Note: The X and Y basic coordinates are corrected so that the X and Y coordinates of the boss center to be measured are equal to the coordinates x1 and y1 respectively at the time of the movement of the feeler to the initial point [6] . y1: Machine zero point WPC-Z INITIAL-Z Workpiece zero point k d k z1 Distance of workpiece zero point at boss center on X and Y (Dimension shown on drawing) z1: Z coordinate of the measurement start point based on the workpiece zero point d: Boss diameter k: Feed distance at skip speed WPC-X. 7-31 Mesurement of boss center [Measurement movement] Movement to the measurement start point [2] Movement to [5] the measurement start point. Z: Basic coordinates (Coordinates of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system) M3P349 Fig. Y.PROGRAM CREATION 7 WPC-X x1 Machine zero point Workpiece zero point WPC-Y Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed y1 x1. 7-279 . then measurement movement [3] and [4] on Y-axis INITIAL-Z [3] Measurement of one side of boss [1] ATC for feeler Before measurement [4] Measurement of another side of boss Rapid feed (G00) k k Skip feed [7] Movement to the ATC position. 7 PROGRAM CREATION 6. z1: Coordinates of the measurement start point with relation to workpiece zero point Distance from P1 to P2 Basic coordinates (Coordinates of the workpiece zero point in the machine coordinates system and the workpiece inclination angle) Rapid feed (G00) Skip feed P1 Measurement start point r: WPC-Z WPC-X. y1. 1 PTN XYthCNR X x1 Y y1 Z z1 C 0 A 0 R r D/L ◆ K ◆ ": Data are not necessary to set here. 7-32 Measurement of workpiece inclination 7-280 . Y. Measurement of workpiece inclination (XYthCNR) The X and Y basic coordinates and the inclination of the workpiece coordinates system are corrected by specifying the workpiece zero point at the corner of the workpiece to be measured. SNo. WPC-X Machine zero point x1 WPC-Y WPC-th P3 P2 Workpiece zero point y1 r Machine zero point x1. th: Workpiece zero point INITIAL-Z z1 M3P351 Fig. Z. Article Date X x1＞0 Y y1＞0 Z C A R r＞0 X x1＜0 Y y1＞0 Z C A R r＜0 — — P2 — — P2 — P1 — P1 P3 Measurement surface Corner where a workpiece zero point is located Measurement surface P3 Axial movement direction [1] [3] [2] [4] P3 Measurement surface P3 Measurement surface P2 P1 P1 P2 M3P352 Article Date X x1＞0 Y y1＞0 Z C A R r＞0 X x1＜0 Y y1＞0 Z C A R r＜0 — — — — — — Note: In types [1] to [4] above. then execution of ATC [10] Movement to P2. P2 ATC for feeler Movement to the initial point above P1 [2] Movement to P1. [4] then measurement z1 [7] INITIAL-Z [9] Movement to the initial point above P1 z1 z1 M3P353 Movement to P3.Direction of movement of the probe on the basis of the position of the workpiece zero point and also the content of the data. the positions related to the points P1 and P2 depend on the sign of r. B. then measurement 7-281 . Measurement movement according to type [3] Measurement at P3 After measurement Measurement at P1. Direction of movement of the feeler probe The axial movement direction for measurement of inclination of the workpiece is of four types which are determined automatically according to preset data. . then measurement [3] Movement to the Movement to the initial point above P3 initial point above P2 [5] [6] [1] Movement to the initial point above [8] P3 Movement to the ATC position.PROGRAM CREATION 7 A. WPC X -700. . UNo. U. Z -10.1 Y -501. 1 UNo. A 0. C 0.This is a part of program corresponding to MMS. No th 0. Example: Machine zero point y500 (Actual value 501. R 100 $ " D/L " K " Z -500. Z -500. Y -500. A 0.SKIP 0.0) Workpiece 3° z500 Machine zero point Workpiece zero point x700 (Actual value 700. WPC X -700. Y and th basic coordinates are corrected so that the coordinates X and Y of the corner obtained by measurement serve as workpiece zero point when the feeler is moved to the initial point [9]. th 3. C 0. 7-282 .SENS X 10. Y -10. UNo. Thus the workpiece zero point is located at the real corner. Correction of the workpiece zero point for the workpiece placed as shown below. C 0. 1 UNIT WPC-0 UNIT MMS PTN XYth CNR TOOL T. 1 UNIT WPC-0 ADD.The execution of the MMS unit has the effect of correcting the basic coordinates as follows. A 0. 2 SNo.1) Table M3P354 . ADD. NOM-φ 5.7 PROGRAM CREATION Note: The X. Y0) L: Maximum measurement movement L α P3 90° θ α P3 P2 r θ Workpiece zero point P1 Workpiece zero point P1 P2 M3P355 Fig.PROGRAM CREATION 7 C. Moreover. If the angle of the corner to be measured is not 90°. it is possible that the feeler will not come into contact with the workpiece or that the feeler probe will be damaged. If these conditions are not fulfilled. When the workpiece zero point has been specified at a point distant from the corner of the workpiece. P2: Position with distance r and angle θ with relation to P1 P3: Position obtained by turning P1 in a counter-clockwise direction (to 90 +2α) around the workpiece zero point (X0. the followings (1). Risk of collision with the workpiece at the time of positioning on Z-axis. 1. Precautions The measurement of the inclination of the workpiece requires that the workpiece zero point to be located at the corner of the workpiece and that the angle of the corner be 90°. Positioning of other measuring points P2. it is possible that the feeler probe will be damaged. 2. P3) and measurement start point (P1) D. 7-33 Positioning relation of measuring points (P2. θ ≠ 90° P1 P2 M3P356 7-283 . (2) can occur. P3) and measurement start point (P1) is shown below. the correction of the coordinates is not made correctly for the measured corner. P3 other than the measurement starting point P1 Positioning relation of measuring points (P2. NOTE - 7-284 E .7 PROGRAM CREATION . the ATC is repeated for each of the tools specified in the tool sequence. Prior machining . the priority number can not be specified.The priority number is specified when the need for machining lastly is arises. It is in the following units and tool sequence that the priority number can be specified... H740PAH040E 8-1 .. 3. Tool sequence of machining unit Manual program unit (In the case of absence of a tool.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 8 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL The program is executed by numeric order from its head. centering drill... 1.) MMS unit M-code unit 8-1 Priority Machining Order In a program containing specified priority numbers. 4. This priority function for the same tool is intended to reduce the number of ATCs and therefore the machining time by assigning the priority number to tools developed and by performing the machining according to the numbers thus assigned...... in the case of chamfering cutter.. The machining is done by the numeric order of the tools with priority numbers (displayed in reversed status).The machining is done in the programmed order of the tools developed by the tool sequence (tools without priority number).. etc.. Subsequent machining. Ordinary machining .. 2.. Consequently....The priority number is specified if the necessity of machining with complete priority occurs. The machining is done by numeric order of the tools with priority number (displayed in yellow).. in the case of face mill.... for example... the machining is done in the following order. for example.. 999. 0 No. ATC MODE 1 MULTI MODE OFF Y -300. 1 FIG 1 UNo. 2 SNo. 999. 1 UNo. 999. NUMBER 0 TOOL NOM-φ No. AN2 CHMF 5. HOLE-φ 10. PRE-DIA ! ! 15. 1 FIG 1 UNo. X 20. ATC MODE 1 MULTI MODE OFF Y -300. A P1X/CX 0. DIA 20. 15. 20. Subsequent machining priority number ATC If one reclassifies these two programs by machining order. Y 60. 20. th 0. AN1 ! AN2 ! RETURN WNo. Z 0. 8-2 .8 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL Program without priority number UNo. AN1 AN2 ! ! ATC RETURN PRE-DIA ! ! 20. CHAMFER 20. DEPTH 20. Y AN1 20. EXECUTE Program with priority number UNo. UNIT DIA DRILLING 15. 2 [1] X 60. Y AN1 20. the following tables are obtained. WPC DEPTH 0. 0. 15. NOM-φ No. CONTI. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. HOLE-DEP ! 15. 0. 2 SNo. NOM-φ 20. 20. Z X 0. HOLE-DEP ! 15. FCE MILL 100. BTM 1 APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 100. HOLE-φ 10. th 0. HOLE-DEP ! 20. A 1 PTN P1X/CX SQR 0. X -300. DIA 20. NUMBER 0 PRE-DIA ! ! 15. TYPE XBI P3Y 100. 20. 15. 0 WNo. [1] 20. 0 UNo. 0 UNo. BTM 1 APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 100. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. DEPTH 20. PTN Z X PT 0. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 0. 2 20. 3 Prior machining priority number SNo. DRILL 20. EXECUTE PRE-DIA ! ! 20. NOM-φ 20. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. HOLE-φ 10. TYPE XBI P3Y 100. HOLE-φ 10. No. X -300. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. CHMF 5. 15. ZFD ADD. HOLE-DEP ! 20. ZFD ADD. 0. 3 SNo. DEPTH 15. 20. 4 SNo. 100. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 0. 5 MAT CBN STL UNIT WPC-1 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL PTN SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL CHAMFER PTN PT UNIT DRILLING INITIAL-Z 50. 999. CTR DR 20. 0. TOOL NOM-φ No. 20. Z 0. SRV-Z 5. DIA 15. SRV-Z 5. AN2 CHMF 5. 60. DEPTH 15. 5 MAT CBN STL UNIT WPC-1 UNIT FCE MILL INITIAL-Z 50. 4 SNo. Y 60. TOOL CTR-DR DRILL CHAMFER PTN PT UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR DR DRILL CHAMFER PTN PT UNIT END NOM-φ No. WPC DEPTH 0. UNIT END CONTI. 1 UNo. CHMF 5. 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 SNo. cutter " " " " " " 6 times ATC UNo. the ATCs are executed 6 times. Note 1: If a different priority number is assigned to the same tool. cutter Face mill —[5] —[6] —[7] —[2] —[3] —[4] —[1] Centering drill Drill Chamf. Consequently. cutter " " " " 4 times ATC Centering drill Drill Chamf. two machinings of the same type are done at the same time by the same tool. cutter Centering drill Drill Chamf. By specifying the priority number. cutter Chamf. the machining is done by the programmed order and the ATCs are executed for each tool. 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 TOOL Face mill Centering drill Centering drill Drill Drill Chamf. the machining is done in the order of the priority number. 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 TOOL Face mill Centering drill Drill Chamf. which permits reducing the number of ATCs to 4.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 Program without priority number UNo. Note 2: When the priority number is assigned to all the tools of the same process. cutter Centering drill Drill Chamf. the M-code unit without a priority number is executed once for extra between the prior machining and the subsequent machining. in this example. cutter Centering drill Drill Chamf. 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 Program with priority number SNo. cutter Face mill ([1] to [7]: Machining order) —[3] —[5] —[7] —[2] —[4] —[6] —[1] M3P357 Without a specified priority number. 8-3 . 8 8-2 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL Priority Machining Zone The priority machining zone for the same tool is delimited by the following units. Centering drill No. centering drill and charmfering cutter. EXECUTE Priority number Prior machining: 1. SRV-Z 5. 2 [1] X 60. UNIT END P1X/CX 0. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. 3 SNo. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 0. DRILL 15. DEPTH 15. [1] End M3P358 Note: The combination of the manual program mode unit and the M-code unit permits performing the changing of the pallet. 4 UNo. 2 SNo. CHAMFER 20. If the program is executed which contains the priority numbers specified for face mill.WPC X -300. HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA ! ! ! 20. 20. 1 UNo. ZFD ! UNo. AN1 AN2 ! ! ATC RETURN WNo. [1] Pallet change Centering drill No. the machining is done in the following order. 0 UNo.Process end unit Example: Case where the pallet changing unit has been programmed. HOLE-φ 10. 5 Process 2 SNo. 0 DEPTH 20. 15. MULTI MODE OFF th 0. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. 2 [1] X 20. In the case of different processes. 2 Process 2 Drill No. HOLE-φ 10. PTN Z PT 0 UNIT PALT CHG UNIT DRILLING TOOL NOM-φ CTR-DR 20. 2 Chamfering cutter No. 20. it is necessary to specify the process end unit before and after the unit concerned. Y 20 APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 100. PTN Z PT 0. CONTI. DIA 15. it is possible to specify the same priority number for a different tool. 999. 8-4 . 15. The zone delimited by these units is called process. No. DRILL 20. 6 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL NOM-φ No.Pallet changing unit . 2 Subsequent machining: [1] Face mill No. FCE MILL 100. MAT CBN STL UNIT WPC-1 INITIAL-Z 50. CHAMFER 20. No. BTM 1 TYPE XBI P3Y 100. In order to perform this pallet change and the priority function for the same tool in one program. 0. Chamfering cutter No. AN1 AN2 PALLET No DIA 20. . A 1 PTN SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL NOM-φ CTR-DR 20. 1 Process 1 Drill No. ADD. PRE-DIA ! ! ! 15. 999. CHMF 5. 0. ATC MODE 1 Y -300. Y 60. Process HOLE-DEP. NUMBER 0 CHMF 5. 1 FIG 1 UNo. DEPTH 0. Subsequent machining priority number 1) Press the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu key. APRCH-X ← Cursor # The message ACHINING PRIORITY No. No. but it is impossible to assign the same priority number to different tools. MACHINING PRIORITY No. A SRV-Z 5. The priority number is entered in ascending order of the tool sequence. Moreover. it is entered by means of menu keys and numeric keys. SUB PROG ALL ERAS PROC END (2) Enter the priority number. No. 1 APRCH-X Note 1: The prior machining and subsequent machining can receive a priority number from 1 to 99. 1 TOOL FCE MILL NOM-φ 100. move the cursor to the item No. this will cause the alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS to display. Move the cursor to the following article. There are the three following entry methods: Prior machining priority number To be set by means of numeric keys. Without entry (ordinary machining) The priority number is not entered. A No. # The display of [DELAY PRIORITY] is reversed. # When the priority number is entered. move the cursor to the position concerned and press the data cancellation key . the cursor moves to the following article. it is not always necessary to mark the priority of the sequence numbers. (1) In creating mode. Note 3: In order to cancel a priority number after it has been entered. UNo. PRI. No. Note 2: It is possible to assign the same priority number or a different priority number to the same tool. CHANGE ASSIGN PRI. 2 SNo. respectively. # The number is displayed in yellow. No. 1 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL DEPTH 0.? is displayed and the menu changes as follows. SNo. # The priority number is displayed in reversed status. 8-5 .? DELAY PRIORITY PRI. 2) Set the subsequent machining priority number by means of numeric keys.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 8-3 8-3-1 Editing Function and Input Method of Priority Numbers Input of priority numbers The priority number is of two types: for prior machining and for subsequent machining. NOM-φ 100. A SRV-Z 5. 1 TOOL FCE MILL UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL NOM-φ 100. 2 SRV-Z 10. ASSIGN] is reversed and the message MACHINING PRIORITY No. 2 SNo.? is displayed in the message zone of the display. No. APRCH-X ← Cursor (2) Press the [PRI.8 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8-3-2 Assignment of priority numbers This function is used to make the assignment of priority numbers entered for all the identical tools in the same process. NOM-φ 100. ASSIGN] ( → [DELAY PRIORITY]) (1) In creating mode. No. 8-6 . Menu selection: [PRI. ASSIGN] menu key. UNo. Note: This function is only useful for a program in the process of editing. Entry of 2 Press the following keys: 2 INPUT (3) Enter the priority number by means of numeric keys. 1 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL DEPTH 0. NOM-φ 100. No. # The display of [PRI. No. all the identical tools in the process are marked with the same priority number.For subsequent machining. A No. No. SNo. move the cursor to the item No. enter the intended number after having pressed the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu key. 1 UNo. all the priority numbers for the If the data cancellation key identical tools in the process will be erased. Note: # is pressed. The same priority number is assigned to all the identical tools in the process and the cursor moves to the following article. Example: . A DEPTH 0. 3 SNo. 2 APRCH-X APRCH-X Note: Regardless of whether the priority number is entered or not. For subsequent machining. A SRV-Z 5. Menu selection: [PRI. Note: # is pressed. The same priority number is assigned to all the identical tools in the process and the cursor moves to the next item. press the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu key.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 8-3-3 Change of priority numbers This function is used for changing the priority number entered for all the identical tools in a process. No. # The display of [PRI. the same priority number is assigned to all the identical tools in the process. 2 SNo. NOM-φ 100. CHANGE] ( → [DELAY PRIORITY]) (1) In creating mode. APRCH-X ← Cursor (2) Press the [PRI. NOM-φ 100. 5 APRCH-X APRCH-X ← Cursor Note: Regardless of whether the priority number is entered or not. UNo. No. 5 SRV-Z 10. SNo. No. Entry of 5 Press the following keys: 5 INPUT (3) Enter the priority number by using numeric keys. 1 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL DEPTH 0. Example: .? is displayed in the message zone of the display. No. Note: This function is only useful for a program in the process of editing. CHANGE] is reversed and the message MACHINING PRIORITY No. CHANGE] menu key. move the cursor to the item No. No. and then enter the intended number. 1 UNo. A No. 1 TOOL FCE MILL UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL NOM-φ 100. 8-7 . all the priority numbers for the If the data cancellation key identical tools in the process will be erased. 3 SNo. A DEPTH 0. PROG:1>? is displayed in the message zone of the screen. . specify the zones to be deleted. . NOM-φ 100. which has the result that the subprogram is treated the same as the process end unit. 1 TOOL FCE MILL UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL NOM-φ 100. No. No. If in the process constituting the subject of the editing. APRCH-X ← Cursor 8-3-5 How to use the SUB PROG PROC END function When the priority number has been edited in the main program. ALL ERAS] menu key. Menu selection: [PRI.8 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8-3-4 Deletion of all the priority numbers This function is used for deleting all the priority numbers contained in the process or in the program. APRCH-X ← Cursor (2) Press the [PRI No. A SRV-Z 5. move the cursor to the item No. A DEPTH 0. 1 UNo. SNo. press the [SUB PROG PROC END] menu key in order to invert the display. # The display of [PRI. 8-8 .Enter 0 to delete all the priority numbers contained in a process where the cursor is located. A SRV-Z 10. there is a subprogram containing a process delimitation unit (pallet changing unit or process end unit). UNo. No. NOM-φ 100. 1 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL DEPTH 0. No. ALL ERAS] is reversed and the message ALL ERASE <PROC:0. 3 SNo. Note: This function is only useful for a program in the process of editing. APRCH-X No. it is necessary to perform the same editing for the subprogram. 2 SNo. Example: # Deletion of all the priority numbers contained in a program Press the following keys: 1 INPUT . (3) By means of numeric keys. ALL ERAS] (1) In creating mode. All the priority numbers in the specified zone are deleted.Enter 1 to delete all the priority numbers contained in the program. 3 UNo. NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ 10. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 0. WPC DEPTH 0. 0. HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA ! ! ! 15. 3 SNo. th 0. 15. SRV-Z 5. 100. PRE-DIA HOLE-DEP ! ! ! 15. A P1X/CX 0. ATC MODE 1 X -300. 8-1 Subprogram unit = process end unit Remark 1: The editing function zone can be divided by the subprogram unit. 5 UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL CHAMFER PTN PT UNIT END UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL PTN SQR DEPTH 0.φ 10. HOLE. ADD. 1 UNo. NOM-φ No. AN1 AN2 [2] Subprogram DIA 20. 1 FIG 1 UNo. AN1 AN2 Process 2 PRE-DIA ! ! 20. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. MULTI MODE OFF Y -300. 20 20. 15. 20. Z X 0. NUMBER 0 CHMF 5. 2 10. CONTI. Even if the editing function is executed in delimited zone [1]. Main program UNo. 999. 0 UNo. DIA 15. 2 20. 2 SNo. AN1 AN2 ATC RETURN WNo. ZFD ! [1] Process 1 CHMF 5. EXECUTE Subprogram UNo. 0. 6 UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL CHAMFER PTN PT UNIT END MAT CBN STL UNIT WPC-1 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL PTN SQR UNIT DRILLING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL CHAMFER PTN PT INITIAL-Z 50. 0. 15. 0 NUMBER 0 CHMF 5. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. ZFD ! Pallet change DIA DEPTH 15. 60. Y 20. 4 SNo. HOLE-φ 20. 20. 999. BTM 1 TYPE XBI P3Y 100. 4 UNo. TYPE XBI P3Y 100. Z X Y 0.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 Display of [SUB PROG PROC END] is not reversed. 5 SNo. this has no effect in the zone [2]. CONTI. Z X 0. NOM-φ No. 2 SNo. 1 15. 15. 999. 20. 20. 1 FIG 1 Process 1 UNo. A P1X/CX 0. DEPTH 15. NOM-φ No. 15. Remark 2: Display of [SUB PROG PROC END] is reversed: Two processes (1) and (2) Display of [SUB PROG PROC END[ is not reversed: One process (1) 8-9 . [3] [4] ATC RETURN WNo. Y 60. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 0. BTM 1. 20. APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 100. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. 20. HOLE-DEP ! 20. 100. Display of [SUB PROG PROC END] is reversed. EXECUTE [3] M3P359 Fig. 20. [3] and [4]. NOM-φ No. [2] APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 100. 15. SRV-Z 5. 0 DEPTH 20. APRCH-X FCE MILL 100. CTR-DR 20. MAT INITIAL-Z 0 CBN STL 50. 5 SNo. WPC ATC MODE 1 X -300. ! PRE-DIA ! ! 15. 15. 1 FIG 1 Machining order UNo. 20 UNo. 20. 2 Drill No. cutter No.) . PTN Z X PT 0. ZFD ! No. 2 Drill No. 4 UNo. Y 60. 6 UNIT WPC-1 ADD. A ? 1 PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CY SQR 0. 60. Drill No. Chamf. ! ! 2 2 DRILL 15. [1] CHAMFER 20. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z FCE MILL 0. 5 UNIT END CONTI. 0. 1 UNo. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. HOLE-φ 10. CHAMFER 20. ! 15. th 0. the subprogram unit is always executed. [1] Chamfering cutter No. (The machinings specified in the subprogram are executed in the numeric order of the priority numbers. 20. UNIT DIA DEPTH CHMF DRILLING 15. 5. MULTI MODE OFF Y -300. TOOL NOM-φ No. 3 SNo. 10. the machining order is as mentioned below. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP 10. 2 DRILL 20. 2 SNo. cutter No. 0 DEPTH 20. 2 Centering drill No. the subprogram unit is only executed once at the time of ordinary machining. 3 CHAMFER 20. 0. 2 [1] DEPTH CHMF 15. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. TOOL NOM-φ CTR-DR 20. 20. APRCH-Y ? P3X/R 100. TOOL NOM-φ No. AN1 AN2 Centering drill No. 20. UNIT DIA DRILLING 15.In the case wheresubprogram is a MAZATROL program. 8-10 . the subprogram unit is executed as follows: . TOOL NOM-φ No. 999. FIG PTN Z X Y AN1 AN2 1 PT 0. 0. EXECUTE Priority number Prior machining: 1 Subsequent machining: [1] Subprogram Centering drill No. 5. 15. 15. ! [1] 999.In the case where subprogram is an EIA/ISO program. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA 1 CTR-DR 20. Chamf. PTN Z PT 0. NUMBER ATC RETURN WNo. HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA ! ! 20. DRILL 15. [1] NUMBER 0 ATC RETURN WNo. UNIT END CONTI. X Y AN1 20. 15. SNo. EXECUTE 0 0 M3P360 End In the process of priority machining search. 15. [1] Subprogram UNo. UNo. Example: Entry of priority number for centering drill and chamfering cutter UNo. ! 0. BTM 1 TYPE XBI P3Y 100. AN2 ! Face mill No. 999. 1 Subprogram UNIT DIA DRILLING 20. CHMF 5. 5.8 8-4 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL Relation between the Subprogram Unit and the Priority Machining Function If one program contains a subprogram unit and the priority function for the same tool. UNIT 8 INDEX UNo. 100. UNIT 6 INDEX UNo. 1 30. 100. TURN POS X TURN POS Y . 20. 2 Indexing 0° Centering drill No. HOLE-φ No. 2 Chamfering cutter No. 100. HOLE-φ NOM-φ No. 6 Y Z X 100.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 8-5 Relation between the Index Unit and Priority Machining Function When the machining is performed controlling the machining angle on the indexing table (indexed by B. 4 999.. NOM-φ 20. 3 End UNo. 0. DEPTH 20. the machining order is as follows: Workpiece positioned at indexing angle of 0° Workpiece positioned at indexing angle of 180° Centering drill -[1] Drill -[4] Chamf. 5 Y Z X 100.: 1. 4 Chamfering cutter No. 2 30. 30.or M-code). UNIT 10 END TURN POS X 100. UNIT 9 DRILLING SNo. NUMBER ATC 0 0 M3P361 At the time of the execution of this program. 6 Drill No. the NC rotating table or the tilting table. 30. 0. which contributes to the reduction of machining time. 10. DIA 30. 5 Indexing 180° Indexing 180° Centering drill No. cutter -[5] Centering drill -[2] Drill -[3] Chamf. TOOL 1 CTR-DR 2 DRILL 3 CHAMFER FIG PTN 1 PT UNo. DIA DEPTH 30. ANGLE 0 100. cutter -[6] M3P362 8-11 ... 1 Drill No. TOOL 1 CTR-DR 2 DRILL 3 CHAMFER FIG PTN 1 PT UNo. 20. TURN POS Y. drill and chamfering cutter Prior machining priority No. UNIT 7 DRILLING SNo. it is possible to combine the priority function for the same tool and the index unit.. 3 999. CONTI. ANGLE 180 100. Example: Priority number assigned to centering drill. 10. ! ! 15. APRCH-X APRCH-Y 1 ? ? P1Y/CY P3X/R 0. M-code unit ZFD ! M M M M UNo. 1 UNo. TOOL 1 FCE MILL FIG PTN 1 SQR SRV-Z 5. With priority No. 999. 20. NUMBER 0 ATC RETURN WNo. TOOL 1 CTR-DR DRILL 2 CHAMFER 3 FIG PTN 1 PT UNo. Z 0. X -300. 100.. No. 15. WPC DEPTH 0. 0. 1 UNIT WPC-1 ADD. 5. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP. 6 UNIT END DIA 15. Z 0. TOOL End 1 CTR-DR DRILL 2 The M-code unit is CHAMFER 3 executed only once FIG PTN in conformity with 1 PT the priority No. 5. ! 20. EXECUTE M3P363 8-12 . X Y AN1 AN2 20. DEPTH CHMF 15. PRE-DIA 2 10. No. 20. 20. MULTI MODE OFF Y -300. ! 15. 20. UNIT 5 DRILLING SNo. UNo. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA 2 10. UNIT 2 FCE MILL SNo. UNo. according to whether the M-code unit contains the priority code for the same tool or not. X Y AN1 AN2 60. A P1X/CX 0. DEPTH CHMF 20. Without priority No. 3 UNo. 15. 20. NOM-φ 20. 0 End In the process of the search for the priority No. th 0. 0. UNo. No. NOM-φ 100. UNIT 4 DRILLING SNo.8 8-6 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL Relation between the M-Code Unit and the Priority Machining Function The machining order differs as follows. the M-code unit is executed each time it is read. ! ! 20. MAT INITIAL-Z ATC MODE 0 CBN STL 50. NOM-φ 20. CONTI. TYPE XBI P3Y 100. 60. BTM 1. 999. DIA 20. TOOL 1 CTR-DR DRILL 2 FIG PTN 1 PT UNo. 2 UNo.PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL 8 8-7 Relation between Multi-workpiece Machining and the Priority Machining Function If the multi-workpiece machining process and same-priority-numbered tool data are set both in one program. UNIT 2 DRILLING SNo. Y 15. DEPTH 20. No. 1 NUMBER 0 Drilling in the unit No. 3 UNIT END INITIAL-Z 50. Z 0. NOM-φ 20. Parameter F71 = 0: Priority machining is performed workpiece by workpiece. UNIT 1 DRILLING SNo. TOOL 1 CTR-DR DRILL 2 FIG PTN 1 PT UNo. 0 ATC DEPTH 20. Y 100 200 DIA 10. DIA 20. 2 Drilling in the unit No. 1: Priority machining is performed on all the workpiece. 1 E71 = 0 E71 = 1 Machine zero point M3P364 8-13 . HOLE-φ 1 X Y Workpiece of offset No. the order of machining is assigned by the parameter F71. 15. MAT 0 CST IRN OFS X 1 0 2 0 UNo. CONTI. NOM-φ 20. 20. Example: Assigning the priority number to centering drills Workpiece of offset No. HOLE-φ 1 X 15. Z 0. No. NOTE - 8-14 E .8 PRIORITY FUNCTION FOR THE SAME TOOL . WPC X Y (7) Make the spindle turn. ! WPC SEARCH The following menu will be displayed.COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 9 9 COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION The coordinate measurement function is intended for measuring the basic coordinates by using a measuring device (feeler or centering bar) or a tool like an end mill. 2 INPUT . The cursor is moved to the article X of the WPC unit. Measurement surface Measurement surface Measurement surface On X. (6) Press the input key ! UNo. etc. TEACH +X SENSOR -X SENSOR +Y SENSOR -Y SENSOR -Z SENSOR (5) Pressing the [WPC SEARCH] menu key selects the WPC unit (fundamental coordinates system unit) in which the measured fundamental coordinates are recorded. (1) In ATC mode. (3) Pressing the [PROGRAM] menu key. mount the measuring device or the tool on the spindle. (4) Press the [WPC MSR] menu key. UNIT WPC-0 ADD. H740PAJ040E 9-1 . (2) Press the display selector key (key located to the left of the menu keys) to display the menu related to the display.or Y-axis On Z-axis NM210-00549 9-1 Method of Measurement of Coordinates by TEACH Function On the basis of the position of the tool edge or the edge of a measuring device in contact with the workpiece to be machined. the basic coordinates can be calculated and recorded in the basic coordinates unit. (1) Case of use of a centering bar (2) Case of use of an end mill. automatically calculates the basic coordinates. The system. For an axial direction +Z – 20 –Z 2 0 INPUT (11) The basic coordinate is thus automatically calculated and recorded in the WPC unit. 9-1 Tool in contact with the surface (9) Press the [TEACH] menu key. ! WPC SEARCH The display of [TEACH] is reversed TEACH +X SENSOR -X SENSOR +Y SENSOR -Y SENSOR -Z SENSOR (10) Input the coordinate of the workpiece zero point by means of numeric keys.or Y-axis Z-axis M3P365 Fig.9 COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION (8) Move the spindle. UNo. after making reference to the tool length data included in the tool data. 10-mm diameter end +Z For a radial direction –X +X – –Z 5 INPUT Set the axial coordinate of the workpiece orgin when seen from the tool nose. WPC X -210. 2 UNIT WPC-0 ADD. X. Y th 9-2 . Set the radial coordinate of the workpiece origin when seen from the tool center. Go to manual mode and put the tool in contact with the surface of the workpiece to be measured by the manual pulse handle (see the figure below). axis names are for machine coordinates) 10-mm diameter end mill +Z X (WPC-X) –X +X – –Z 5 INPUT 10-mm diameter end mill +Z Y (WPC-Y) –Y +Y – –Z 5 INPUT +Z Z (WPC-Z) – 20 –Z 2 0 INPUT 9-3 . Note: During execution of WPC units.COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 9 (12) Repeat the above-indicated operations to record the basic coordinates on the other axes. the alarm message 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed if the cursor position is not followed by a WPC unit. the system searches only for the data present at after the cursor position. Also. Setting tool nose position strage data for each of the planes to be machined (in the table below. Go to manual mode and by using the manual pulse handle. (3) Press the [PROGRAM] menu key.The position in which the feeler point is stopped is the measurement start point. The cursor is moved to the article X of the WPC unit. (6) Press the input key ! UNo. 9-4 . . (2) Press the display selector key (key located to left of the menu keys) to display the menu related to the display. mount the feeler on the spindle. WPC SEARCH TEACH +X SENSOR -X SENSOR +Y SENSOR -Y SENSOR -Z SENSOR (10) Select the measurement direction by means of the corresponding menu key. WPC X Y th Z C A (7) Move the spindle. (9) Press the menu selector key (key located to the right of the menu keys) to display the coordinates measurement menu. (4) Press the [WPC MSR] menu key. 2 INPUT . ! WPC SEARCH The coordinate measurement menu shown below is displayed. UNIT WPC-0 ADD. TEACH +X SENSOR -X SENSOR +Y SENSOR -Y SENSOR -Z SENSOR (5) Pressing the [WPC SEARCH] menu key selects the WPC unit in which are recorded the measured basic coordinates. (1) In ATC mode.9 9-2 COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION Method of Measurement of Coordinates by MDI-MMS The use of the feeler permits automatic calculation of the basic coordinates and recording thereof in the WPC unit. Note: Do not put the feeler point in contact with the surface to be measured. Sensor –Z Sensor +X Sensor –X Sensor +Y Coordinate measurement with MDI-MMS is available for both the side and the top. bring the feeler point to a point close to the surface to be measured. (8) Press the MDI run key to go to MDI mode. (12) Press the start button. Entry of 20 Press the keys ! 2 0 and INPUT in this order. Y th Z Note: The basic coordinates will not be accurately measured if MDI-MMS is performed with the NC unit not containing the correction data based on tool length measurement with a touch sensor and on calibration measurement with a feeler. 2 UNIT WPC-0 ADD. WPC X 220.Thus. UNo. . the feeler returns to the measurement start point at rapid feed.COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 9 (11) Enter the coordinate of the face with which the feeler point comes into contact (measurement surface) in the workpiece coordinates system. 9-5 . the basic coordinate is automatically calculated and displayed. The feeler moves slowly at skip speed and after its point comes into contact with the surface to be measured. NOTE - 9-6 E .9 COORDINATES MEASUREMENT FUNCTION . and thus to remove unnecessary paths or prevent interference. .Auxiliary coordinates system unit (OFFSET) .Process end unit . UNo. 1 UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL ∗∗ CB-DIA ∗∗∗ No.Three-dimensional surface machining unit (3-D) (1) Set the cursor on the unit data where the TPC data is to be set. and the data that has been set in various parameters. 0 MAT ∗∗ If the TPC data is to be set for the RGH CBOR unit MULTI MODE ∗∗∗ . . Tool paths are automatically created using the data that has been set on the PROGRAM display. The TPC data consists of data items used to adjust tool paths and relay points. . CB-DEP ∗∗∗ HOLE-φ ∗∗ CHMF ∗∗ HOLE-DEP ∗∗ NOM-φ ∗∗ PRE-DIA PRE-DEP ∗∗ ∗∗ H740PAK040E 10-1 .Basic coordinates system unit (WPC) . . The TPC data is intended to allow unitby-unit modification of the tool paths that have thus been created.Common unit .M-code unit . therefore.End unit . MULTI FLAG ∗∗∗ PITCH-X ∗∗∗ PITCH-Y ∗∗∗ Place the cursor at this line.Pallet changing unit . Example: UNo. . The TPC data. 3 SNo.Indexing unit .TPC DATA CREATION 10 10 TPC DATA CREATION 10-1 Setting Tool Path Control (TPC) Data Tool path control (TPC) data can be set for each unit of the program. does not always need to be set to perform machining operations.Subprogram unit . The TPC data cannot be set for the following units: . BTM ∗∗ DIA ∗∗ DEPTH ∗∗ RGH ∗∗ DEPTH ∗∗ C-SP ∗∗ FR ∗∗ M ∗∗ M ∗∗ INITIAL-Z ATC MODE ∗∗∗ ∗∗ . The parameter settings will not change even if the displayed data is changed on the TPC display.1 mm (0. unit data that was set on the PROGRAM display will be displayed as it is.10 TPC DATA CREATION (2) Press the menu selector key. Parameters denoting the distance are usually preset in 0.1 mm steps) ↓ D42 data displayed on the TPC display: 5. Uno. To specify relay points for the tool approach or escape (return) path. they will be displayed in 1 mm (1 inch) steps.Items marked with " can be filled with data as required. and then press the [MANUAL]. The data cannot be changed on the TPC display. but on the TPC display. Example: Data preset in parameter D42: 50 (in 0. . . menu key The item marked with the cursor will change over to [MANU] and you can set required data for the relay points.01 inch) steps.See the next section for the contents of each TPC data. If changes are made to the data.On line A above. the corresponding unit will have its parameter settings overriden with the new data.Data that is preset in related parameters will be displayed at items marked with !. and then press the [TPC] menu key. Pressing the [TPC] menu key makes the TPC display of the unit which was designated at step (1) above. . . 10-2 . 2 UNIT RGH CBOR CB-DIA ∗∗∗ CB-DEP ∗∗∗ CHMF ∗∗ BTM ∗∗ DIA ∗∗ DEPTH ∗∗∗ A PARAMETER D1 ! D41 ! RELAY POINT D3 ! D42 ! D16 ! D91 ! D17 ! D92 ! D19 ! D45 ! D23 ! D46 ! TPC data APPROACH RELAY POINT [MANU] X 1 2 3 " " " Y " " " Z " " " 1 2 3 ESCAPE RELAY POINT [MANU] X " " " Y " " " Z " " " (3) Set the data in indicated item or change the data displayed in indicated item. first move the cursor to the item [AUTO] of the required data section.0 (in 1 mm steps) Data being displayed at these items can be changed to any other data. HOLE-φ Note 3: Carry out the following procedure to cancel the entire TPC data that has been set (or changed). 1 FIG 1 MAT INITIAL-Z ∗ ∗ UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL ∗ ∗ PTN ∗ ∗ ??? Z ∗ ∗ X ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Y ∗ ∗ CB-DEP ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ X ∗ ∗ Y ∗ ∗ CHMF ∗ ∗ HOLE-DEP ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ CB-DIA ∗ ∗ ATC MODE ∗ ∗ CB-DEP ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ CHMF ∗ ∗ HOLE-DEP ∗ ∗ CB-DIA CB-DEP NOM-φ No. HOLE-φ UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL ∗ ∗ PTN ∗ ∗ Z ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ CB-DIA UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL ∗ ∗ PTN ∗ ∗ Z ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ CB-DIA NOM-φ No.TPC DATA CREATION 10 Note 1: The following menu is displayed while the TPC display remains on the screen: TPC END TPC CANCEL Pressing the [TPC END] menu key calls up the PROGRAM display anew. of course. HOLE-φ NOM-φ No. 1 FIG 1 UNo. Note 2: Setting or changing TPC data displays “+” mark on the left side of the corresponding unit number. 1 SNo. 1 FIG 1 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ X ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ Y ∗ ∗ CB-DEP ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ X ∗ ∗ Y ∗ ∗ CHMF ∗ ∗ HOLE-DEP ∗ ∗ + mark UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL ∗ ∗ PTN ∗ ∗ Z ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ATC MODE ∗ ∗ CHMF ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ If TPC data has been set for unit No. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP NOM-φ No. 0 UNo. maximum three more blocks of program memory will be used. 2 SNo.” The entire current TPC data is cancelled and initial TPC data is displayed on the TPC display. If TPC data has not ben set: UNo. the + mark on the PROGRAM display is deleted. +2 SNo. 1 FIG 1 UNo. 2: UNo. 1 SNo. This procedure. 10-3 . For units whose TPC data has been set or changed. Also. MAT INITIAL-Z 0 UNo. 1) Press the [TPC CANCEL] menu key. 2) Set “–9999. only cancels the TPC data for the respective unit. but they will be displayed here in 1 mm (or 1 in. The data cannot be changed with the TPC data displayed on the screen.) steps. Parameters denoting the distance are usually set in 0. The data settings on the PARAMETER display. first set the cursor at [AUTO] of the required section and then press the [MANUAL] menu key. 2 UNIT RGH CBOR CB-DIA * * * CB-DEP * * * CHMF * * BTM * * DIA * * DEPTH * * * (a) PARAMETER D1 1. P2 (P2x. P1y. 2 and 3) in the desired order of relaying.4 D41 0. P2z) Tool change position P3 (P3x. to display [MANU].01 in. D16 2 D91 00000000 D17 0. (c) Use this section to modify the approach path so that interference does not occur. P2y.10 TPC DATA CREATION 10-2 Description of Each TPC Data Item UNo.) steps. will not change by their modification on the TPC display.1 mm (or 0.4 D92 00000000 D19 0 D45 1 D23 0. (b) The addresses of related parameters and the data that have been set on the PARAMETER display are displayed according to the particular type of unit. D46 1 (b) RELAY POINT APPROACH RELAY POINT [MANU] X 1 2 3 (c) Y Z 1 2 3 (d) ESCAPE RELAY POINT [MANU] X Y Z (a) Unit data for which the TPC display is called up. P3y. Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for details of parameter data. To modify the path. Finally enter the coordinates of the relay points on three lines (1. P1z) Initial point Machining start point Workpiece 10-4 . however. P3z) P1 (P1x. D3 2 D42 0. Modification of the data allows the machine to be correspondingly operated only during that unit. ............ Path through P3 Specify the position using the program coordinates system............. Path through P1 P2Z .. P1’y.... Path through P2 P3Z .............. P2’z) Tool change position P1’ (P1’x....... as shown above.... P2’y.................TPC DATA CREATION 10 For approaching path from the tool change position through relay points P1........ P3’z) Initial point Machining start point Workpiece ESCAPE RELAY POINT [MANU] X 1 2 3 P1’X P2’X P3’X Y P1’y P2’y P3’y Z P1’Z. P1’z) P3’ (P3’x.... Refer to the description in (c) for details on data setting..... Path through P3’ Specify the position using the program coordinates system...... P2’ (P2’x................................... 10-5 . Path through P1’ P2’Z..... (d) Use this section to modify the escape path so that interference does not occur....... P3’y.... Path through P2’ P3’Z....... set data as follows: APPROACH RELAY POINT [MANU] X 1 2 3 P1X P2X P3X Y P1y P2y P3y Z P1Z ..................... P2 and P3 to the machining start point.............. 10 TPC DATA CREATION .NOTE - 10-6 E . The work number of the program to be executed is entered in the POSITION display while the work No. Note 2: The program in the process of automatic operation and its subprogram can not be edited. perform the operation after confirmation of the work number presented actually on the display. MATRIX permits preparing a program even during automatic operation.BACKGROUND PROGRAMMING 11 11 BACKGROUND PROGRAMMING For the purpose of more efficient programming. of the program to be created or to be edited is entered in the PROGRAM display. This function is called Background programming. ∆∆∆∆ ( ) !!!! ( ) POSITION display PROGRAM display Program for automatic operation Program to be displayed and edited M3P379 Note 1: It is possible that the displayed work number on the POSITION display does not coincide with that on the PROGRAM display. Therefore. H740PAL040E 11-1 . 11 BACKGROUND PROGRAMMING .NOTE - 11-2 E . ....... H740PAM040E 12-1 ...... (1) Check the alarm number and message in the alarm display section of the screen......... Clear the display with the reset key Note: While background programming is done in the automatic operation mode........ Blue . Lights up in the event of machine failure.. clear it by the following procedure........... ..CASE OF APPEARANCE OF ALARM 12 12 CASE OF APPEARANCE OF ALARM 1...... cause of the alarm and action to be taken to eliminate the cause... Clear the display with the clear key Red .... Clearing alarm When the alarm is displayed during creating and editing the program... pressing the in order to cancel an alarm also has the effect of returning the reset key automatic operation to the initial status...................... . Lights up if erroneous operations are carried out during creating or editing a program.... 2................................ Red ......... Blue ................... (2) Refer to “Parameter/Alarm/M-Code List” and eliminate the cause of the alarm by referring to the alarm No...... (3) Clear the alarm display with either the clear key or the reset key ............... Alarm display Alarm is displayed either in red or blue. alarm message.. 12 CASE OF APPEARANCE OF ALARM .NOTE - 12-2 E . Do not change the order. . etc. succeed the block of the three-digit G-code of sequence data and are positioned between code G420. PARAMETER. The various types of data within the NC unit are each assigned to a specific “three-digit G + address + data” set. 13-2 Detailed Description 1.234 APRCH-Y 2. if present. Example: SNo. unit data.2345 Y&2.The output data of machining programs may include additional lower digits which are not displayed on the screen. Data on the TOOL OFFSET. . MAZATROL program data . Use of the data input/output functions based on the three-digit G-format allows the NC-stored data to be managed under the same environment as those of EIA/ISO programs. The codes for data identification are listed up and described in detail on the following pages.Tool sequence data succeed the block of the three-digit G-code of the unit data and are positioned between code G424. That is. which denotes the end of the shape data.A Output data N1T15D10.Unit data have an assigned specific three-digit G-code for each unit. for example. and code G421.The code G10 is used to input/output the above data. which denotes the end of the sequence data. which denotes the beginning of the shape data.The TPC data.345 Displayed data 2. . .S1 X&1. if present. APRCH-X 1. Such data should not therefore be modified with respect to the displayed data. This is the case.The shape data. TPC data. with the values of approach point or crossing point which are automatically calculated and internally used by the NC unit. No. H740ＰAN040E 13-1 . and if the edited data are restored into the NC unit. and WORK OFFSET displays. 1 TOOL END MILL NOM-φ 10. sequence data and shape data are output in that order. succeed the block of the three-digit G-code of the unit data and are positioned between code G422. MACRO VARIABLE. Data that have been output to external units in the three-digit G-format can be edited using a personal computer.THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13-1 Outline The three-digit G-format is a format of expressing MAZATROL program data and other NC data. . which denotes the beginning of the sequence data. TOOL FILE.The order of output of the machining program data is predetermined. . and code G423. CUTTING COND. which denotes the beginning of TPC data. which denotes the end of TPC data. TOOL DATA.3455 ~ Output longer by one digit than displayed. the corresponding original data within the NC unit will be auto-modified according to the required edition. and code G425. Identifier The code “(MG3-251)” succeeding the program number identifies a MAZATROL program described in the three-digit G-format of the MATRIX. 1 to 99999999) or four digits (Nos. 13-2 .Program name The program name is assigned in the parentheses with the identifier separated by a colon. Program number and program name In the three-digit G-format input/output of MAZATROL programs. O99999999 EOB Description in 3-digit G-format EOB EOR % ( M G 3 — 2 5 1 ) Identifier (With program name) EOB Program No. An error will result if an illegal program number is designated. the number and name of a program is described in the following format: (Without program name) EOB Program No. The distinction in the number of digits must be observed even in the designation of the program to be output. The maximum available number of characters is usually 48 for naming a program stored in the NC memory.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13-3 Three-digit G-format of MAZATROL Program 1.Program number The program number is assigned following “O. . 1 to 9999) according to the setting of the related parameter. An excess in characters will be given away.” Program numbers are output in eight digits (normal setting. . O99999999 EOB Description in 3-digit G-format Identifier EOB EOR % ( M G 3 — 2 5 1 : Program name ) . Nos. Common unit UNo.G54.1P300 .Auxiliary coordinates system unit UNo. U U(X) X V(Y) Y D(th) D W(Z) Z G380 . ADD.G59 A-K G54. U ( MAT ) Program P G300 Designation INITIAL-Z ATC MODE D Z A B 1: OFF 2: 5 * 2 3: OFFSET TYPE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y C X Y Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 .Subprogram unit UNo. W $ G303 REPEAT F 0: Subprogram contains no measurement 1: Subprogram contains measurement Measurement flag $ V: 0-9 –1 .9) Multi-workpiece machining (A .THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 2. U WORK No.16 17 .End unit UNo. U B G301 NUMBER C A ATC D 0: None 1: Machine zero point 2: Fixed point 3: Arbitrary RETURN ( WORK No. WPC No.316 B: G54 .D) V L 13-3 .1P1 .Basic coordinates system unit UNo. ) E 0: YES 1: NO EXECUTE . WPC 1-6 7 . WPC X U A B X Y th Y E G379 Z Z 4 F ADD.–4 Unit skip (0 . Unit . CONTI. BAL EMIL ID code S: 0 1 : 8 9 : 13 14 : 24 –1 : –8 –9 : –13 –14 : –24 A : H J : N P : Z A : H J : N P : Z Priority No.M-code unit UNo. SENS. U X X Y Y Z Z F 4 G306 5 H E th . SKIP $ P K V Refer to “Manual program mode unit.–99 No priority No. for prior machining Priority No. of next pallet &P 13-4 . TOOL NOM-φ U T D S ID code G305 Priority No.MMS unit UNo. refer to “Tapping unit. U P G302 M1 MA M2 MB M3 MC M4 MD M5 ME M6 MF M7 MG M8 MH M9 MI M10 M11 M12 MJ MK ML Refer to “Manual program mode unit. Priority No. U PALLET No. U.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT . for subsequent machining .Pallet changing unit UNo. P G381 No.Basic coordinate shift unit UNo.” .99 –1 .Manual program mode unit UNo. Priority No. P: 0 1 . P * For nominal diameter of taps. U TOOL T G304 NOM-φ D S ID code Priority No.” TOOL T: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Tool name CTR-DR DRILL REAMER TAP (M) TAP (UN) TAP (PT) TAP (PF) TAP (PS) TAP (OTHER) BCK FACE BOR BAR B-B BAR CHAMFER FCE MILL END MILL OTHER CHIP VAC T.” . RGH BCB machining unit UNo.Indexing unit UNo.Tapping unit UNo.Circular milling unit UNo. U G385 .Back boring unit UNo. NOMU * G354 PITCH TAP-DEP CHMF CHP P H C K Tap screw type A: 1 M 2 UNn 3 UN Tap fraction B: 1 2 3 1/2 1/4 1/8 MAJOR-φ E Example: 4 PT A1D10. U DIA D H G350 DEPTH CHMF C . U CB-DIA &D CB-DEP &H D DIA G352 DEPTH H CHMF C . I BTM PRE-DIA &D CHMF &C PITCH1 E PITCH2 F 13-5 .Drilling unit UNo.Reaming unit UNo. U D DIA H G353 CHMF C A 0: Drilling 1: Boring 2: End milling PRE-REAM CHP K DEPTH . UNn 1-2 UN 1H-2 PT 2Q . U CB-DIA &D CB-DEP &H CHMF C F G351 BTM DIA D DEPTH H . TURN POS X U X G382 TURN POS Y Y TURN POS Z Z K ANGLE C J ANGLE A . A2D1V2 A3D1V2B1 A4D2B2 5 PF 6 PS 7 OTHER 4 1/16 Nominal diameter D: Nominal diameter 2 V: M10. U DIA D DEPTH H I G355 BTM WAL J PRE-DIA &D PRE-DEP &H CHMF C WAL &J .THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 . U DIA D DEPTH H C G356 CHMF K 0: CIRCUL 1: TORNADE TORNA.RGH CBOR machining unit UNo.Process end unit UNo. U DIA D DEPTH H CHMF C J G358 WAL . DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH U H Z R F &Z G364 FIN-Z FIN-R START &R A: bit 0 END A: bit 1 INTER-R J R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding CHMF C bit = ‘0’: OPEN bit = ‘1’: CLOSED .” . DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH U H Z R F &Z G363 FIN-Z FIN-R START &R A: bit 0 END A: bit 1 INTER-R J R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding CHMF C bit = ‘0’: OPEN bit = ‘1’: CLOSED . DEPTH U H Z SRV-Z R SRV-R F G362 RGH FIN-Z &Z START A: bit 0 bit = ‘0’: OPEN bit = ‘1’: CLOSED END A: bit 1 .Outside linear machining unit UNo.Right-hand linear machining unit UNo. U DIA D DEPTH H CHMF C BTM I G359 WAL J PRE-DIA E . U CB-DIA &D CB-DEP &H CHMF &C BTM &I WAL &J G361 PRE-DIA E DIA D DEPTH H CHMF C BTM I WAL J . DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH U H Z R F G365 FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R &Z &R J R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding CHMF C 13-6 .13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT .Through hole boring unit UNo. U * NOMMAJOR-φ E P G357 PITCH TAP-DEP H CHMF C CB-DIA &D CB-DEP &H CHMF &C I BTM CHP K Refer to “Tapping unit.Stepped non-through hole boring unit UNo.Central linear machining unit UNo.Left-hand linear machining unit UNo.Stepped through hole boring unit UNo.Non-through hole boring unit UNo.Counterbore-tapping unit UNo. U CB-DIA &D CB-DEP &H CHMF &C BTM &I G360 WAL &J DIA D DEPTH H CHMF C WAL J . Inside linear machining unit UNo.Outside chamfering unit UNo. DEPTH SRV-Z SRV-R RGH U H Z R F G366 FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R &Z &R J R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding CHMF C .Left-hand chamfering unit UNo.End milling-top unit UNo. DEPTH U H Z SRV-Z G371 BTM I FIN-Z &Z .Inside chamfering unit UNo. DEPTH INTER-Z U H I INTER-R J G367 CHMF C START A: bit 0 END A: bit 1 R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding bit = ‘0’: OPEN bit = ‘1’: CLOSED . DEPTH INTER-Z U H I J G369 CHMF C R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding INTER-R . DEPTH INTER-Z U H I J G370 INTER-R CHMF C R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding .THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 . DEPTH U H Z SRV-Z I G372 BTM FIN-Z &Z .Right-hand chamfering unit UNo.Face milling unit UNo.End milling-step unit UNo. DEPTH U H Z SRV-Z I G373 BTM WAL J FIN-Z &Z FIN-R &R 13-7 . DEPTH INTER-Z U H I INTER-R J G368 CHMF C START A: bit 0 END A: bit 1 R-chamfering flag B 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding bit = ‘0’: OPEN bit = ‘1’: CLOSED . 3-D unit (ROTATE 3) UNo.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT . DEPTH U H Z SRV-Z D G377 SLOT-WID I BTM WAL J FIN-Z &Z FIN-R &R . 1) UNo.Pocket milling-mountain unit UNo. DIST/th U D MAT-HIGH H I G390 FIN CUT-PROCESS K .3-D unit (PARALL. 2) UNo. U DIST/th D MAT-HIGH H I G387 FIN CUT-PROCESS K 4 5 .3-D unit (PARALL. U MAT-HIGH H I FIN K G389 CUT-PROCESS .3-D unit (ROTATE 4) UNo. DEPTH U H SRV-Z Z BTM I WAL J G375 FIN-Z &Z FIN-R &R . U DIST/th D MAT-HIGH H I G386 FIN CUT-PROCESS K CUT-PROCESS K: 1 2 3 R1 R1-F2 R1-F2-F2 F1 F1-F2 .3-D unit (ROTATE 1) UNo. U DIST/th D MAT-HIGH H I G391 FIN CUT-PROCESS K 13-8 . U MAT-HIGH H I FIN K G388 CUT-PROCESS .Pocket milling unit UNo. DEPTH U H Z SRV-Z I G374 BTM WAL J FIN-Z &Z FIN-R &R INTER-R K CHMF C R-chamfering flag R 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding .3-D unit (ROTATE 2) UNo.End milling-slot unit UNo. DEPTH U H SRV-Z Z BTM I J G376 WAL FIN-Z &Z FIN-R &R .Pocket milling-valley unit UNo. 3-D plane definition UNo.-Y ROT. U MAT-HIGH H I FIN K G393 CUT-PROCESS .-Y ROT. 4) UNo. U MAT-HIGH H I FIN K G394 CUT-PROCESS .3-D unit (RULED-S.-X ROT. U MAT-HIGH H I FIN K G396 CUT-PROCESS .-X ROT. 3) UNo.3-D unit (NORMAL 2) UNo.3-D unit (NORMAL 1) UNo.3-D processing-area appointment UNo.-Z U X Y Z G398 SHIFT-X &X SHIFT-Y &Y SHIFT-Z &Z . U MAT-HIGH H I FIN K G392 CUT-PROCESS .THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 . U LINE A 1: FL 2: GL PLANE B 1: X-Y 2: Y-Z 3: X-Z D G397 DISTANCE ROT.) UNo.3-D coordinates transfer UNo.3-D unit (PARALL. ROT.3-D unit (PARALL. U MAT-HIGH H I FIN G395 CUT-PROCESS K .-Z X Y Z SHIFT-X &X SHIFT-Y &Y SHIFT-Z &Z . U X-MIN X X-MAX &X Y-MIN Y Y-MAX &Y Z G399 Z-MIN Z-MAX &Z A 1: IN 2: OUT IN/OUT 13-9 . 13-10 .Manual program mode sequence SNo. &5 or &6 is used respectively). 4: 180° 5: 270° . G421 Beginning of sequence data (U: unit No. .) Sequence data End of sequence data .g. B-code B: Address and data are set as specified. ADD.456” (if 4th.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 3. N X X Y th Y E Z Z . N A 1: UPPER FACE 2: 3: 0° 90° C-FACE WORK No. . WORK No. 5th or 6th axis has been specified. set &4. . Machining sequence G420U_ N1 N2 . “X123.Plane definition sequence SNo.Five surface machining sequence SNo. . PTN X Y Z C A R N A D/L K K PTN A: 1 X-FACE 2 Y-FACE 3 Z-FACE 4 X-GRV PTN A: 5 Y-GRV 6 X-STP 7 Y-STP 8 XY-HOL PTN A: 9 XY-BOS 10 XYthCNR 11 CAL X Y Z C J R D . e. ADD.Multi-workpiece machining sequence SNo. WPC ( ) B X X Y Y Z Z F 4 Refer to the basic coordinates system unit.MMS sequence SNo. . . WPC N ( ) B X X Y Y Z Z F 4 ANGLE D K 0: X-Z 1: B-X 2: B-Z TYPE P P Refer to the basic coordinates system unit. N G1 G G2 &G DATA 1 ? DATA 2 ? DATA 3 ? DATA 4 ? DATA 5 ? DATA 6 ? S S M/B M/B M-code M:. Subprogram sequence SNo.Shape sequence (arbitrary) SNo.456” (if macro variable has been specified.g. N A 1: LINE 2: CW 3: CCW 4: FIG-SH 5: CW-SH 6: CCW-SH 7: REP-EN PTN X X Y R/th Y V I I J J P CNR S 0: Not start point 1: Start point Start point Shape sequence type B 1: Arbitrary P C/R 13-11 .Shape sequence. N A 2: CIR PTN CX CY R X Y Shape sequence type 0: Fixed form R B . N A 1: PT 2: LIN 3: SQR 4: GRD 5: CIR 6: ARC 7: CHD PTN Z Z X X Y AN1 AN2 DB T1 T2 TA TB F F M N M K P P Q R Q R Y DA . e.Shape sequence. N ARGM 1 ? ARGM 2 ? ARGM 3 ? ARGM 4 ? ARGM 5 ? ARGM 6 ? Address and data are set as specified. N A 1: SQR PTN P1X X P1Y Y P3X &X P3Y &Y CN1 CA/RA CN2 CB/RB CN3 CC/RC CN4 CD/RD Shape sequence type B 0: Fixed form C_ or R_ is used for corner chamfering or rounding respectively.THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 . . “X#100” is unsed) . SQUARE (fixed form) SNo.Point machining shape sequence SNo. “X123. CIRCLE (fixed form) SNo. .9999 1: DRIL 2: PCK2 3: PCK1 4: AUTO 18: PCK1 19: PCK2 –1: G00 CTR-DR Z: 0: CTR-DR 1: CHAMF BOR BAR &E 0: CYCLE 1 1: CYCLE 2 2: CYCLE 3 TAP &E 0: TAP 1: PECK 2: PLANET For nominal diameter of taps.1 . “X&123. . APRCH-X APRCH-Y N T D S P X Y TYPE Q 7: CW 8: CCW F –1: G00 0: G01 0. G425 Tool sequence data Beginning of tool sequence (U: unit No. .9. refer to “Tapping unit. Tool sequence G424U_ N1 N2 . e.” If the AUTO SET function has been used. .Point machining tool sequence SNo.g. In this case. .Line machining tool sequence SNo. “&” will be added to the output data. TOOL NOM-φ ID code Priority No.456. “X?” is used.” Refer to “Manual program mode unit.” 13-12 .13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 4.) End of tool sequence .” . TOOL NOM-φ ID code Priority No.9 ZFD DEP-Z C-SP Z I FR J M M M R/F B 0: R 1: F MA MB MC Refer to “Manual program mode unit. N T D S P HOLE-φ E HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR H &E &H F Z I J M MA M MB M MC E-MILL &H 0: CCW 1: CW 2: CCW 3: CW CTR-DR F: 0: 90° 1: 118° 2: 60° DRILL F: REAM Z: 0: G01 1 . ” If the AUTO SET function has been used. APRCH-X APRCH-Y S P X Y Q 1: XBI TYPE F ZFD W TYPE DEP-Z WID-R C-SP Z R I FR J M M MA MB MC –1: G00 0:STANDARD 0: G01 1:TAPER 0. .g. set as follows: “X12345. e. P APRCH-X APRCH-Y X Y Q 1: //-1 2:  -1 3: //-2 4:  -2 5: XBI TYPE #T DEPTH PITCH C-SP FR V Z W I J M M M R/F STATUS B 0: R 1: F 2: R C MA MB MC Refer to “Manual program mode unit. e.Subsequent blocks up to the code G423 (End of TPC data) are handled as relay-point data. Ex. U ? DATA 1 ……… ……… ? DATA 9 For example.g.THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 M R/F B 0: R 1: F .) TPC data End of TPC data 13-13 . TPC TPC data consists of two types: TPC data (parameter) section and relay-point section. .3-D machining tool sequence No. “&” will be added to the output data.456. the second characters 1 to 3 are converted to A to C respectively.9 2:HELICAL 3:PECKING Refer to “Manual program mode unit. TOOL N T D NOM ID code Priority No. G423 Beginning of TPC data (U: unit No. In this case. To set “123.” 2: YBI 3: XUN 4: YUN 5: XBI-S If the AUTO SET function has been used. 11: XUN 12: YUN .” 6: YBI 7: XUN 8: YUN 9: XBI/.” In this case.End sequence SNo. For axis name of 2 characters. “&” will be added to the output data.1 . 10: YBI/.The block next to the code G422 (Beginning of TPC data) is always handled as parameter data. and .Face machining tool sequence SNo. “X&123.9. .6789”. . .456” for the X2-axis: “XB123.456” 5. The two types of data are identified as follows: . “X&123. N TOOL T D NOM ID code S Priority No. .” 6: YBI-S 7: CW 8: CCW 9: XB-AS 10:YB-AS . “X?” is used. . G422U_ . . set “X?.456. Relay point Relay point type A 0: APPROACH 1: ESCAPE B 0: AUTO 1: MANU Relay point setting X1 XA Y1 YA Z1 ZA X2 XB Y2 YB Z2 ZB X3 XC Y3 YC Z3 ZC 13-14 . denote parameter type. MMS TPC data A L1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 E2 E2 E2 E1 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 E1 E1 E2 E2 E5 E5 B L2 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D3 D16 D17 D16 D17 D16 D17 D5 D19 D23 D19 D40 D41 D42 D91 D45 D46 C D E F H I J K L M P Q R S Y Z DRILLING RGH CBOR RGH RCB REAMING TAPPING BK-CBORE CIRC. E17 E17 E17 E17 E17 E11 E17 E11 E17 E11 E17 E11 E17 E12 E15 E13 E17 E16 E17 E97 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E91 E98 E21 E21 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 E95 E22 E23 E24 E25 E95 E22 E23 E24 E25 E95 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E95 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E95 E95 E95 E95 E95 E1 E1 E1 E1 E2 E2 E2 E2 E5 E5 E5 E5 E7 E7 E7 E7 E7 E17 E18 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E92 E17 E18 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E93 E17 E18 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E94 E98 E17 E21 E96 B.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT A. E2 etc. FACE D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D16 D17 D18 D19 D23 D24 D25 D26 D28 D29 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D16 D17 D22 D48 D31 D32 D49 D29 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D16 D17 D18 D19 D23 D24 D25 D26 D28 D33 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D16 D17 D19 D23 D41 D42 D91 D92 D16 D17 D22 D19 D23 D48 D31 D32 D49 D29 D41 D42 D91 D92 D45 D46 D16 D17 D18 D19 D23 D24 D25 D26 D28 D16 D17 D18 D19 D23 D24 D25 D26 D28 D16 D17 D18 D19 D23 D24 D25 D26 D28 D16 D17 D18 D19 D23 D24 D25 D26 D28 E7 E7 E7 E7 E7 E8 E8 E8 E8 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E7 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E9 E12 D1. MIL CBOR-TAP BORE T1 BORE S1 BORE T2 BORE S2 LINE CTR LINE RGT LINE LFT LINE OUT LINE IN CHMF RGH CHMF LFT CHMF OUT CHMF IN FCE MILL TOP EMIL STEP POCKET PCKT MT PCKT VLY SLOT ANG. .. E N 2.. Type A G10L10P_R_ B.. CO. P Tool name Nom.. G10L_ Data type 1.. No... P R OFFSET 3..No.... and address “L” that follows denotes the type of the data. Tap returning POS... of teeth U Tap pitch I Use Z-axis cut Z Taper angle N Tool tip Tool lengh matterial T () Material 1 to 8 <> 13-15 .. H ACT-φ LENG. CO. &Q MAT.... Type B Geometric compensation for tool length ..... CO..Tool data 1 Milling tool G10L40T_P_C_D_S_I_E_H_K_R_J_Q_（_）A_N_W_ TNo... G10L10P_R_ Defacement for tool length . CO... dia C D Cutting depth R S Suffix Min... F... &J LENG COMP.... PW ROT feedrate V P K S R GROUP ACT-φ IDNo.THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 13-4 Various Data Description Using G10 “G10” is normally used to express the other various data than program data.... BORDER () A STATUS STATUS 1 2 N W CORNER TEETH R R B . Tool file G10L49P_C_D_S_E_H_U_Z_R_F_I_N_T_(_)[_]<_><_><_><_><_><_><_><_> Tool file No.. T P TOOL C NOM-φ ID CODE INTERFER...... tool dia. G10L13P_R_ Offset No. HOLDER T Q TIP THRUST HORSE MAX.... E Cutting/ Chamfer angle F H R-chamfering flag R 0: Chamfering 1: Rounding No... No.Tool data 2 G10L41M_T_Q_V_P_K_S_R_J_I_D_H_E_N_ TNo...... K USED NUM. Tool data .. J I D LENG.... D S TAP TYPE Y J I LIFE TIME ACT-φ E CUT TIME Q LENGTH H LIME NUM.. Tool offset A... G10L12P_R_ Defacement for tool radius .. PKNo. G10L11P_R_ Geometric compensation for tool radius .. Cutting condition A. P X X Y Y Z Z 4 A 5 B P2: G55 P6: G59 P3: G56 P4: G57 13-16 .13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 4. Additional workpiece coordinate system G10L20P_ P1: G54. P ( WORK-MAT ) B. Cutting condition (WORK-MAT) G10L52P_(_) Material No.1P1 to P300: G54. Workpiece offset A. ) C. Standard G10L2P_ P0: Coordinates system shifting P1: G54 P5: G58 B. Cutting condition (TOOL-MAT. FR) G10L_P_S_(_) G10L_P_S_F_ DRILL G10L53 No. C-SP. Cutting condition parameter G10L68A_Z_ G10L68B_Z_ G10L68C_Z_ Parameter address A/B/C Cutting condition parameter A1 to A108 Cutting condition parameter B1 to B108 Cutting condition parameter C1 to C108 Parameter setting Z 5. P CTR-DR G10L54 C-SP S F REAMER G10L55 TAP G10L56 BOR BAR G10L57 B-B BAR G10L58 BCK FACE G10L59 CHAMFER END MILL G10L60 G10L61 FCE MILL G10L62 BAL EMIL OTHER G10L63 L10L64 FR ( TOOL-MAT.1P300 No. Parameter A. . G11 AXIS X 1: X 2: Y 3: Z 4: 4 5: 5 6: 6 P1 A P2 B Pitch error compensation setting start 1 is set to #1 (example). . . . . G11 J: Machine parameter setting start 1 is set to J1 (example). .THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 6. User parameter setting end E: E1 to E144 TC: C1 to C154 IO: H1 to H456 57*8 I: I1 to I384 24*16 SU: A1 to A672 168*4 SD: B1 to B168 F: F1 to F168 B. Pitch error compensation setting end P3 C P4 D P5 E Parameter data should not be changed until you have fully understood the meaning of the 13-17 . X2A0B255C0D0E0 P1Z1 . . . Pitch error compensation G10L47 X1A0B255C0D0E0 P1Z1 P2Z1 . Machine parameter G10L51 J1Z1 J2Z1 . C. User parameter G10L50 D1Z1 D2Z2 . G11 D: D1 to D144 User parameter setting start 1 is set to D1 (example). Machine parameter setting end K: K1 to K144 L: L1 to L144 M: M1 to M768 48*16 N: N1 to N768 48*16 S: S1 to S768 48*16 SA: W1 to W1152 144*8 J1 to J144 SP: P1 to P2048 256*8 SV: V1 to V6144 384*16 BA: X1 to X528 132*4 R register R2100 to R2527 R10500 to R11199 R16176 to R16383 Pitch error compensation * For details refer to the relevant description below. PALLET No. 100 is set to #100. MAIN J N K M 10. In case of background G10L45#100 = 100 100 is set to #100. Macro variable A. 9. U R ( ) S 1: READY 2: CUTTING 3: FINISHED 4: UNFINISH MULTIPLE SWITCH A A JIG OFFSET X X MULTIPLE SWITCH B B JIG OFFSET Y Y MULTIPLE SWITCH C C JIG OFFSET Z Z E Error No. Additional WPC G10L43P_X_Y_E_Z_F_ WPC No. Head offset G10L48P_H_I_F_J_X_Y_Z_S_ OFFSET P HEAD No.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT respective parameter. P 1: A 2: B 3: C 4: D 5: E 6: F 7: G 8: H 9: J 10: K X X Y th Y E Z Z A A C C 8. CMD OFFSET X X OFFSET Y Y OFFSET Z Z S RPM 13-18 . P Process No. H I 1: V/H→V 2: V/H→H 3: V 4: H 5: SLN 6: CVR TYPE ROT. 7. Pallet management G10L46P_U_R_W_S_J_N_K_M_A_B_C_D_Q_X_Y_Z_E_ No. MULTIPLE SWITCH D D Set up order Q STATE ORDER NUMBER UNIT SKIP SWITCH MULTIPLE SWITCH. WNo. In case of foreground G10L44#100 = 100 B. DIR F 1: F 2: R J 1: 0 2: R 3: R0 SPDL. Maintenance check A. Check item P ( ) 13-19 . P T Target time ) Year Y Month M D Day Check item ( ) Current time C B. Regular check item G10L70P_T_C_Y_M_D_( Check No. Long-term check item G10L70P_( ) Check No.THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 11. NOM-φ No. P1Y/CY APRCH-Y 10.5 0. NOM-φ No. APRCH-X -35. CONTI.2 0. 50. 4 SNo. P3Y 150. 35.1 ! 100 42.7 20. 6. NUMBER 0 SRV-Z 5. CHMF 1.3 M M M APRCH-Y –3. DEPTH 0. MAJOR-φ 20. 20.A M20 AN2 ! ! ! 0 RETURN WORK No.7 ! AN1 30. 1 2 3 4 FIG 1 UNo. DEPTH 0.5 F ! M 6 22 27 14 28 N ! FR M M M 0.3 P Q R NOM-φ No. CN4 INTER-R 50. DEP-R C-SP 35. ADD. 50. FIN-R ! ! -200. 150. ATC 0 TAP-DEP 30. HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP HOLE-DIA PRE-DEP 17. -35. ! 0 17. 1 UNo. 0 X 70. 200. P1X/CX 0. CN3 160 160 FR 1. APRCH-X 205.4 ! CN2 C 0.75 Y 0. CHMF 1. 5 MAT CBN STL UNIT WPC-0 UNIT FCE MILL TOOL FCE MILL FCE MILL PTN SQR UNIT CHMF RGT TOOL CHAMFER PTN LINE LINE UNIT TAPPING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL CHAMFE R TAP PTN ARC UNIT END 8. INITIAL-Z 20. EXECUTE ! 13-20 .5 ! CHP 0 RGH 90° PCK 1 ! FIX T1 30.3 0.59 C1.7 999. WPC X ATC MODE 0 Y -200. PITCH-X PITCH-Y ! A 0.5 ! 42. Y 80.6 DEP-Z 4. NOMM20 0. + 3 SNo.14 0. INTER-Z 30. 30. 0 UNo.2 2. 10.C X 200.722 I TYPE ! R/th PITCH 2.9 20.7 M M M P3X/R 200. R1 F1 FIG 1 UNo.45 17. 2 SNo. MULTI MODE OFF th 0. FIN-Z 0.13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT Example of output in use of 3-digit G-format UNo. T2 ! DEPTH C-SP ! T1. BTM 4 WAL ! TYPE XBI XBI CN1 ZFD ! ! MULTI FLAG ! Z -300. 1 FIG 1 2 UNo.1 P2. START OPEN ZFD G01 J END CLOSED DEP-Z ! P WID-R C-SP ! CNR 15 FR 0. Z 0. 7H42.Y-200.DA30.I160J0.Z2.Y&10.P2.Y0.I160J1.9H0.&H100F3Z1.F0M6R0 G421 End unit G301U5B0C0A0 13-21 .5H30.E0.&E17.7B1 G425 Face milling shape data G420U2 N1A1X0.Z-300.1I14J0.C1A00000010B0.14 N2T2D17.I30.Y&10.TA30.THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT 13 O00004567(MG3-251) Common unit G300U0(5334354320202020)Z20.F0.S0E20.D3.722F0.Q1R35.1K0 G424U4 N1T1D8.S1E999.I15J0.4R35.3 G425 Tapping unit shape data G420U4 N1A5Z0.5Z1.5&E0.A0B1 Basic coordinates system unit G379U1A0X-200.3B0 N2T14D50. G422U3 B2.Q1Z4.3B0 G425 Right-hand chamfering shape data G420U3 N1A1X200.45I22J0.Y0.&Y150.I4&Z0.S0X&-35.75Y&-3.5I28J2.7S0E17.E2.H0Q00000000 G423 G424U3 N1T13D20.P0S0B1 G421 Tapping unit Tapping unit sequence G354U4A1D20.6 Face milling sequence G424U2 N1T14D50.J50.&X200.S0E6.P0S1B1 N2A1X200.H30.S0X&-35.X70.7&H42.2 N3T13D20. Face milling unit G371U2H0.59I27J0.Y150.C1.Z5.Y80.E20.B0 G421 Right-hand chamfering unit TPC data for right-hand chamfering unit Right-hand chamfering sequence G367U3H0.S3X&205.2 N4T4A1D20. 13 THREE-DIGIT G-FORMAT .NOTE - 13-22 E . APPENDIX 14 14 APPENDIX 14-1 Program Example H740PAP040E 14-1 . TEETH 2 M3P381 14-2 . CARBIDE DEPTH 30. 1 120 NOM-φ 10. A MAT.14 APPENDIX Example 1: Machining drawing 9-mm diameter through hole 14-mm counterbored to 10-mm depth (4 placed) φ30 50 30 25 10 15 90 120 30 5 50 5 10 20 30 Workpiece shape (material: cast iron) 50 50 30 TOOL FILE .END MILL display 20 No. DIA 30. PRE-DIA PRE-DEP ! 11. N ! ! ! 9. 24. DEPTH 10. 60. 14. WAL 5 HOLE-DEP. SRV-R 5. T 2. DEPTH 10. 11. R1 FIG 1 2 UNo.039 M CHMF 0. R1 FIG 1 2 UNo. No. NOM-φ 10.5 29. T2 30.5 30. 50. APRCH-X ? R/th I Y -200. NOM-φ 10. AN1 ! -20. 28. 4 SNo. 30.5 T6. 9. 10. F 0 M 2 ! ! ! Y 10. SRV-R 5. RGH 90° DRILL 0 0 0 P 0 Q 0 DEPTH ! T12. DEPTH 10. 0. 1 UNo. AN2 ! ATC T1 ! RETURN T2 ! ! ! CYCLE 1 CYCLE 1 CYCLE 1 F ! WNo. CB-DEP 10. 1 2 3 4 5 FIG 1 UNo. AN1 AN2 0. FR 0. FIN-Z 0. No. 0. PRE-DIA PRE-DEP 9. NOM-φ 20.25 R 0 C-SP 20 25 34 38 42 FR 0.2 0. 11. CONTI. SRV-Z 10.126 0. START OPEN ! RGH END OPEN PITCH-X ! PITCH-Y ! A 0.5 30.119 0.A Y 0. 0 NUMBER 0 EXECUTE ! 14-3 . TYPE ZFD ! G00 CNR FIN-R 0. DEPTH 30. ! 30. NOM-φ 20. 9.APPENDIX 14 Program MAT 0 UNo. 11. RGH 3 APRCH-Y ? J P MULTI MODE OFF th 0. X HOLE-φ HOLE-DEP. R-FEED START OPEN ! RGH END OPEN INTER-R 99. RGH 90° PCK1 1 N 2 P 0 DEPTH ! T4. HOLE-φ 10. 2 SNo. TYPE ZFD ! G00 CNR MULTI FLAG ! Z -300.A X 15. BTM 1 DIA 9.039 CHMF 0. 24. CHMF 0. M M M No. ADD. X 90. No. 3 SNo.A X 30. 90.5 T 0. 5 SNo. 50.25 T 0.066 M M M Y 25.091 0.2 0. Q 0 R 1 C-SP 20 22 51 FR 0. FIN-R 0. WPC ACT MODE 1 X -100. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. 90. R-FEED C 0. INTER-R 99.5 29. 10. CHMF 0. DEP-Z 10. M M WID-R C-SP 60 APRCH-X ? WID-R C-SP 60 CB-DIA 14. Y 0. FR 0. 28. INITIAL-Z 20. 6 CST IRN UNIT WPC-1 UNIT LINE RGT TOOL END MILL PTN LINE LINE UNIT LINE LFT TOOL END MILL PTN LINE LINE UNIT RGH CBOR TOOL CTR-DR DRILL END MILL PTN SQR UNIT BORE T1 TOOL CTR-DR DRILL BOR BAR BOR BAR BOR BAR PTN PT UNIT END Z Z 0. T1 90. RGH 3 APRCH-Y ? I J P FIN-Z 0. DEP-Z 10.253 0.025 M M M R/th SRV-Z 10. M ! ! ! 0. HSS TEETH 2 ANG. 1 NOM-φ 20. TEETH 2 20 R40 TOOL FILE . M3P382 14-4 . A MIN-φ 5. 45. 1 NOM-φ 20. MAT.14 APPENDIX Example 2: Machining drawing 80 30 10 30° φ40 4-UN1/4-20 (at equal pitch) 80 70 50 R60 R40 C2 10 20 Workpiece shape (material: alminium) TOOL FILE . A MAT.CHAMFER display No.END MILL display 80 80 No. CARBIDE DEPTH 30. 50. 201 FR 0. FIN-R 0. INTER-R 99. 3 SNo. ZFD G00 CN2 ! EXECUTE ! ! ! ! -10. DEPTH 0. PRE-DIA PRE-DEP ! 17.35 10. 0 INTER-Z 10.A P1Y/CY 0. ! MAJOR-φ 6. 30.45 5. 1 UNo. WPC ACT MODE 1 X -100. CONTI.076 1. 20. ? P3X/R 80. ATC DEP-Z ! CN3 ! WID-R ! CN4 ! C-SP 105 FR 0.2 0.055 M M M PITCH-X ! PITCH-Y ! NOM-φ No. T1 60 T2 ! ! ! ! F 1 M 4 CHMF 2. CN4 P1X/CX 0.27 M M M Y -200. TYPE CW CN1 ! WNo. TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z CCW CN1 G00 10. BTM 3 ! CN2 Z -300. 0 UNo. ! PITCH 1. 5. ADD.27 HOLE-φ 6. MULTI MODE OFF th 0. 1 2 3 FIG 1 UNo. AN1 0. NOM- R 40. APRCH-Y ? P3Y ! RETURN No. 4 SNo. NUMBER 0 P3X/R 20. 2 SNo.APPENDIX 14 Program UNo. R1 FIG 1 UNo. WAL 3 ! CN3 MULTI FLAG ! 4 0. APRCH-Y ? P3Y 80. APRCH-X 20. AN2 -90.3 6.3 M M M 14-5 . R1 FIG 1 2 UNo. 5 MAT ALUMINUM UNIT WPC-1 UNIT STEP TOOL END MILL PTN SQR CIR UNIT TAPPING TOOL CTR-DR DRILL TAP PTN ARC UNIT CHMF OUT TOOL CHAMFER PTN CIR UNIT END Z DEPTH 10. WID-R C-SP 14. APRCH-X ? P1Y/CY 50. INITIAL-Z 20.35 No. SRV-Z 10. ! TAP-DEP 10.27 R 0 C-SP 48 54 18 FR 0. ! CHMF 0.35 Y 70. 10.6 ! CHP 0 RGH 90° PCK1 FIX N ! P ! Q 0 DEPTH ! T1. NOM-φ 20.A P1X/CX 30.59 P1. UN1Q-20 NOM-φ 20. FIN-Z 0.3 UN1Q-20 X HOLE-DEP. 50.A 20.14 APPENDIX Example 3: Program for creating an equally spaced arc arrangement of grooves Machining drawing 120 120 120 45° 40 20 120 10 R30 40 TOOL FILE . 4 D735PG005 14-6 . 1 NOM-φ MAT.END MILL display No.A CERMET 30. 1 NOM-φ MAT. CARBIDE DEPTH TEETH 8. DEPTH TEETH ANG.FACE MILL display No. 2 TOOL FILE . 0. 0. NUMBER ATC 0 RETURN WNo. 315. UNIT 1 UNo. Subprogram (assign “1” as the work number) INITIAL-Z 50.56 M M M MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG OFF ! PITCH-X ! PITCH-Y ! CST IRN UNo. 0. 0 MAT Main program INITIAL-Z 50.WPC SRV-Z 2. 5.6 TYPE XUN XBI-S CN1 CN2 ZFD ! ! CN3 DEP-Z WID-R C-SP 1. 135. UNIT SLOT TOOL Y 0. 0. R 1 F 2 FIG 1 2 UNo.2 0. Y 0.4 ! CN4 35. J PTN LINE LINE UNIT END X 30. th 0. Enter 1 in CONTI. 1 SNo. Do not set fundamental coordinates in the subprogram. 2 SNo. 0. 2 MAT CST IRN X 0. 0. Arrange grooves by utilizing multi-workpiece machining mode. J END MILL 8. 0. 0. 0. 0. ACT MODE 1 th 0.066 M M M 4. A FCE MILL 50. 4 ! FIN-Z 0. $ P3X/R 60. 180. 0. 45. ! EXECUTE ! 2.9 ! 10. 0. 1 Y 0.APPENDIX 14 Program Create a subprogram for grooving only. X 0.1 WID-R C-SP ! ! 48 60 FR 0. 0. DEPTH 0. 4 WPC-0 UNIT ADD. BTM 4 APRCH-X ? ? P1Y/CY –60. 1 CONTI. R 1 F 2 FIG 1 UNo. 0. Z 0. 0. 0. 225. EXECUTE ! APRCH-Y ? ? P3Y 60. 0. FACE MIL TOOL FCE MILL 50. UNo. 14-7 . A PTN SQR UNIT SUB PRO UNIT END 0 P1X/CX –60. REPEAT 1 NUMBER 0 ATC RETURN WNo. 0. and execute this subprogram in the main program. 3 UNo. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD TYPE PK-DEP DEP-Z END MILL 8. 128 143 FR 1. 0. 0. 0. 0.106 0. NOM-φ No. WAL 9 CW CW P CNR FIN-Z 0. 90. 5. CONTI. 50. 0. of END unit. 0. WORK No. ? ? R/th I J ACT MODE 1 Z 0. 35. 0 OFS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 UNo. 9 ? ? MULTI MODE OFFSET TYPE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X ! ! PITCH-Y ! DEPTH SRV-Z SLOT-WID BTM NOM-φ No. UNo.1 G01 G01 R-FEED RGH FIN-R 0. 0. 0. 270. 1. Wrong data has been input (data change). Here. Wrong data has been input (data erasure). A wrong numeric key has been pressed. How to erase a tool sequence(s). The display selector key or the menu selector key has been pressed inadvertently. This data is to be changed to 145. it offers a description of how to act in case of trouble.A P1X/CX 5. (2) Press the correct numeric key(s). The wrong data has been erased. 14-8 . APRCH-Y ? P3Y 95. 1. Wrong data has been input (data change). Operate as follows: Wrong data 101 (1) Press the clear key to erase the data in the data selection area . Wrong numeric key has been pressed. 2. 5. 7. Consult this Appendix in such cases. 8. APRCH-X ? P3X/R 146. P1Y/CY 5. No. R1 FIG 1 TOOL END MILL PTN SQR NOM-φ 10. 4. 3. the following states of trouble are covered: 1. Operate as follows: SNo.14 APPENDIX 14-2 What To Do in Such a Case? If an erroneous key operation is carried out during creation of a program. How to add a tool sequence(s). 2. How to erase unit(s). you may be placed at a loss what to do. How to add a unit(s). 6. . Operate as follows: P1X/CX 5. 1 4 5 INPUT in this order. P3X/R 145. CN1 R 5. P1Y/CY 5. The wrong data has been changed to a correct one.” 14-9 . P3Y 95. Insertion of a tool sequence. APRCH-Y ? P3Y 95. This data is to be erased. Deletion of the tool sequence. press SNo. Deletion of the unit. CN1 The wrong data has been erased. “1. P1Y/CY 5. 3.” 8. P3X/R 145. How to add a tool sequence(s). “2. ). Wrong data has been input (data erasure). Refer to Subsection 5-2-4. The display selector key or the menu selector key has been pressed inadvertently. APRCH-X ? P3X/R 145. Refer to Subsection 5-2-4.A P1X/CX 5. P1Y/CY 5. 4.” 7.APPENDIX 14 (1) Position the cursor on the wrong data using the cursor keys ( P1Y/CY 5. (2) Press the data cancellation key P1X/CX 5. No. How to add a unit(s). R1 FIG 1 TOOL END MILL PTN SQR NOM-φ 10. (1) Position the cursor on the wrong data using the cursor keys ( P3Y 95. P3X/R 146 P3Y 95. CN1 R5 ). “1. Refer to Subsection 5-2-3. (2) Input correct data. How to erase a tool sequence(s). How to erase a unit(s). 5. Refer to Subsection 5-2-3. In this case. Pressing of the menu selector key causes the original menu to be resumed. Insertion of a unit.” 6. “2. NOTE - 14-10 E .14 APPENDIX .